IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 U( l&i 12.2 10 12.0 I I.I f L25 IBJA 11.6 1. ». <^ ^ 3^ y Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. MSM (716) •72-4503 CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHIVI/ICIVIH Collection de microfiches. Canadian InstitMta for Historical IMicroreproductions / Inttitut Canadian da microraproductions historiquas T«ehnical and Bibliographic Nota&/Notas tacliniquaa at bibiiographiquaa Tha Inttituta has attamptad to obtain tha baat original copy availabia for filming. Faaturaa of this copy which may ba bibllographically uniqua. which may aNar any of tha imagaa in tha raproduction. or which may significantly changa tha usual mathod of filming, ara chackad balow. D D D n D Coiourad covers/ Couvartura da coulaur I I Covars damagad/ Couvartura andommagAa □ Covars rastorad and/or laminatad/ Couvartura rastaurta at/ou pailicuiia □ Covar title missing/ La titra da couvartura manqua I I Coiourad maps/ Cartas gAographiquas an coulaur Coiourad ink (l.a. othar than blua or black)/ Encra da coulaur (i.a. autra qua biaua ou noira) |~n Coiourad platas and/or illustrations/ Planchas at/ou illustrations an coulaur Bound with othar matarial/ RoliA avac d'autros documents Tight binding may causa shadows or distortion along intarior margin/ La raliura sarric paut causar da I'ombra ou da la distortion la long da la marga intAriaura Blank laavas addad during rastoration may appaar within tha taxt. Whenavar possibia. thasa have baan omittad from filming/ II sa paut qua cartainas pagas blanchas ajoutAas lors d'une restauratlon apparaissant dans la taxta, mais. lorsque cela Atait possibia, cas pagas n'ont pas «t« fllmios. L'Institut a microfilm* la maillaur axamplaira qu'ii lui a *tA possibia da sa procurer. Las details da cat axamplaira qui sont paut-Atra uniquaa du point da vua bibiiographiqua, qui pauvant modifier una image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une modification dans la mithoda normaia do fiimaga aont 'ndiquAs ci-dessous. |~~| Coloured peges/ El Pages de couleur Pagas damaged/ Pages endommag^as Pages restored and/oi Pages restaurtas at/ou paiiiculAes Peges discoloured, stained or foxec Peges dAcoiories, tachetAes ou piquies Peges detached/ Peges dAtachAas Showthrough/ Transperence Quality of prir Quality InAgeie de i'impression Includes supplementary materii Comprend du metAriei supplAmentaire Only edition aveiieble/ Seuie Mition disponible I — I Pagas damaged/ I — I Pages restored end/or leminated/ I — I Peges discoloured, stained or foxed/ I I Peges detached/ |~~| Showthrough/ I I Quality of print varies/ |~~| Includes supplementary materiel/ I — I Only edition aveiieble/ Tl to Tl P< o1 fil O b( th si ol fil Sii Ol Tl s^ Tl w M dii er be rl< re m Pages wholly or pertially obscured by errata slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to ensure the best possible image/ Les pages totelement ou partiellement obscurcies par un fauiliet d'errata. une pelure, etc., ont At6 fiimies A nouveeu da fa^on A obtanir la meilleure image possible. K.y Additional comments:/ Commentairas supplAmanitalres: Irrtgular pagination: [i] • xiv, (1 ] ■ 327, [1 ] - xxv, [329] - 34S p. This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ Ce document est film* au taux de reduction indiquA ci-dessous. 10X 14X 18X 22X 2SX aox V 12X 16X aox 24X 28X 32X i •lis du )difi«r una nag* Th« copy film«d h«r« ha* b**n r*produc*d thank* to th* g*n*ro*ity of: D.B.WtldonUbrary Univartity of WMtsm Ontario The imag** appearing h«r* ara tha b*6t quality possible considaring th* condition and jagibility of tha original copy and in kaaping with th* filming contr*ct spscifications. Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed beginning with the front cover and ending on th* last page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All other original copies are liimed beginning en the first page with a printed or illustrated impres sion, and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impression. The last recorded frame on each microfiche shall contain the symbol — ^ (meaning "CON- TINUED"), or the symbol y (meaning "END"), whichever applies. L'exemplaire filmA fut reproduit grice A la ginArositA de: D.B.W«MonUbrary Univanity of Wattam Ontario Les images suivantes ont At* reproduites avac la plus grand soin. compte tenu de la condition at de la nattet* de l'exemplaire filmA, et en conformity avec les conditions du contrat de filmage. Les exemplalres originaux dont la couverture en papier est ImprimAe sont filmte en commencant par le premier plat et en terminant soit par 1^ dernlAre page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par le second plat, salon le cas. Tous les autres exemplalres originaux sont filmte en commen9ant par la premidre page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par la derniAre page qui comporte une telle empreinte. Un des symboles sufvants appara?tra sur la derniAre image de cheque microfiche, selon le cas: le symbols —^ signifie "A SUIVRE", le symbols V signifie "FIN". Maps, plates, charts, etc.. may be filmed at different reduction ratios. Those too large to be entirely included in one exposure are filmed beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to right and top to bottom, as many frames as required. Tne following diagrams illustrate the method: Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent Atre filmAs A des taux de reduction diff Arenu. Lorsque le document est trop grand pour Atre reproduit en un seul clichA, il est film* A partir de Tangle supArieur gauche, de gauche A droite, et de haut en bas. en prenant le nombre d'images nAcessaire. Les diagrammes suivants iilustrent la mAthode. rata D laiure. lA J 32X 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 m^. ITIK IJHRAKY ^V3 ^^ INIVFR^ITY OF W? Wl STKRN ONTARIO §r? WES^ ^^ m S2 ^^- THK I. I). HARNETT TKXT-HOOK ( Ul.l.iaiiv.-N nse in Public aa^l High Schooli. By I Plant Flrmino, M. a., B.C.L. ; with Examination University of Western Ontario LIBRARY LONDON . CANADA Class LTVDOA 1 .!, NEW PUBLICATIONS. Canadian Spelling Blanks, In Three Nnm- bert,-No. 1, Wonla ; No. 2, Words and Dtffiiii- tions ; No. 3, Words, Dotiiiiiions and SeiitoncM. '* They cannot fail to tupply a want long felt bv many of our best tuacliers. UusiduA serving as Sih)!- ling HiM>ks, the use of Nos. 2 anells.""Wx. Suott, B.A., Uead Master^ Model SelnHtl^ Tor*mi^. 0/^ftiz^^ ^^^^^ ^ them." — 11. liuBBAKU, F.S. InapteUtr^ Ht. FrwkcU^ Quebec. *' The manner in which these, as well as the Spelling ItiiitkN, are uot up is very ingenious, and the wliM4>t iiHiMt pDivo extremely UAeful."-'//o/»«. " i liuve ri>ciMiiiiifiMlehation of edMc>iti>rn tliriMi^rhont the Dominion.** — Tuomai llK>ii»KK.Ho>, huit*cU*r /'arM H%MicSehooU. , THE LIBRARY UNIVIR'^I FY OF WKSTKRN ONTARIO /^tiT^^ TUf ^^^ ^H^^ ml WW 9 y •r- t IL ase ia Public sui>.\ High Schools. ^^ Flrmixo, M.A., B.C. L.; with Examination I University of Western Ontario LIBRARY LONDON . CANADA Class LTVDOV \ ^ I I NEW PUBLICATIONS. Canadian Spelling Blanks, in Three ynm- ben,-No. 1, WonU ; No. 2, Words and DeAiii- tions; No. 3, WonU, DetiiiiiioiiA and Sentuiicet. '* They cannot fail to supply a want long felt bv many of our best teachers. Besides serving as Spel- ling Books, the use of Nos. 2 antl li will train the pupil in an essential part of ooniiHMition, and will enctblo him to test his knowledge of the meaning and use of each word he 8|>ells."'WM. Scott, B.A., Head Master^ Mudd SduHtl^ Torimio. " I thuik them admirably adapted to assist the teacher in giving the pupil a thorough drill in 8pel> ling, DetiningnndSentence-uiaking-t7.A. Mi'Louuu* LIN, P.S. InsitteUrr^ IHstriet of UetlJ'ord^ Qndme. '* Such Exercise B(N>ksas the Canadian Si>elling Blanks, and Hughes' Coni|)«isiti«>n Books were nt^- ed, and these are well adapted to serve the pur|Nise for which they have been prepared.** — Ukv. Uubt. To&KANCC, P. a. Jiuper.t4tr, (Sitelph, The Complete Composition Exercise Books, in Three Numbers, for Junior and Senior ClaHxes ; by Ja.mkh Uugbeb, Inspector of INibJic Sclirn tlinMi}rhout the Dominioiu** — TbouaM llKNtiKKMo.%, hui}M>xUfr t'arxt P%M%eSeKooU. J' ! I i ) < 2:-vi f^^- oc N o ^ •V V V.1 \. I UJ CO X K- c^ < < :r3 3: CD C^ UJ Oi uu :s uu UJ ^ :c UJ ;< (X UJ -J c^ -J <• . Uj UJ X K o o O CD in v£> to ^ vj V \ ^ \ \ L LIBRARIES THE UNIVERSITY OF WESTERN ONTARIO LONDON CANADA LS-4>0135 CANADIAN OOPTBIQ&T BDXTI0K8. HAMIBLIN SMITH'S STATICS, With Appendix bu Tho$. Kirkland, M.A., Svimf Matter Normal School, Toronto. Price 00 cents. Hamblin Smith's IlydrosUtics 76 cents. " There are few boolca in elementary mathematical science that I can more confidently reuommend. The arranig^ement of the " book work" is admirable, its treatment clear, and the subject made as elementary as it can be, consistent with a scientific treat- ment of it. In such a study, the working of problems will excite the same pleaxure and impart to the subject the same interest that the conduotin(f of experiments does in chemistry. The ex- amples at the end of each chapter are well selected- simple at the bevinnintf, projrressive, and ending with problems of sufficient difficulty. The appendix lends an additional interest to the Cana- dian edition. Alprbu Barrr, B.A., "Math. Tutor, Univ. College, Toronto." r » ■ > CANADIAN C0F7RI0HT EDITIONt HAMBLIN SMITH'S QEOMSTBT (Schooled.) With Examination Papers by Thot. Kirkland, M.A. Price 90 cento. Hamblin Smith's Geometry, Books 1 and 2, with exun. paper8..30c. II 11 II a 2 and 3, •• " •• ..30c. " I have examined Uambli.s Smith's Oiombtrt, and consider it, for private study, invaluable, and for class work, inferior to none. Tlie demonstrations in their conciseness and the symbols employed are modelx which any student would do well to imi- tate ; while the modiflcations in the order and method of demon- Btratiou constitute a happy step in the ri^ht direction. '•WM. R. RiDDKLIi, B.A., B. So., " Math. Master OtUwa Normal School." Hamblin Smith's Algebra, 75 cts., with Appendix by Alfred Baker, B.A., Math. Tutor University College, Toronto. * » TRB .«. KNGUSH LANGUAGE ■ Second Canadian Copyright Edition, ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE PART I. GRAMMAR. PART II. ETYMOI-OGICAL DERIVATIONS. PART III. PRAXIS. eONTAININO (i) A SYSTEMATIC COURSE OF EXAMINATION-QUESTIONS: (il) ALL THE QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR AND ETYMOLOCY PROPOSED AT THE WOOLWICH COMPETITIVE EXAiMI- NATIONS FROM 1864 TO 1869 ; (Hi) THE PAPERS SET AT THE OXFORD AND CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS FOR SEVERAL YEARS. o r QQ tlv "S 8 PM H 39 •>« ^ ."* 4J ~i.'. M ® L^- > l*J •sb •^ s oi • ^ ■t- ■** R (—T h-? ?^ 1 Sn ^.^ o ?) »4 Pl o u a ■u « a •F^ B 4J QQ '2 >> o W ^ ••"• as ■•J A C -^ 4) e«H H O (U S SJD 91 2 G 33 9 U m U efl 'ffenus'ot these definitions, and selecting one more suitable and more exact. Such a ' genus ' is found in the expression grammatical form. It is sufficiently comprehensive to embrace the peculiarities above-mentioned, whether of number, or gender, or case, indicated as they may be by variation of termination, by change of form, by compounds, or by grammatical rela- tion. It will enable us also with more propriety to make use of certain classical terms which we cannot altogether afford to dispense with. Dr. Angus has a very appropriate remark on tliis subject, he says: — ' Strictly speaking, therefore. Number, Case, Gender are, as applied to words, grammatical forms expressive of the number, the condition, or relation to something else named in the sentence, and the sex of the tilings to which the words, whether nouns, pronouns, adjectives, or verbs, are applied.' — Handbook of the English 2'ongue, p. 148. CHAPTER II. § 1. INTKODTJCTOEY. 1. Languagk is the expression of Thought. 2. Thk Expression of a single Thought is called a Word; of incomplete thought, a Phrase; of complete thought, a Skntenck. 3. The Principles by which Language is guided form tiie Science of Grammar. As an Art, Grammar is concerned with tiie riglit application (in speech and writing) of Rules deduced from tliese Principles. 4. The difference between an Art and a Science is this: — A Science concerns itself with Principles alone. To an Art three things are requisite, (i) Principles ; (ii) Rules deduced from these Principles ; (iii) Production. Hence an Art is defined to be an Applied Science. \ jr- 10 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 5. Grammar is divided into three parts* (i) Etymology, (ii) Syn- tax, (iii) Prosody. (i) Etymology is that part of Grammar vvliicli treats of the true matter or meaning and form of words, (ii) Syntax is that part of Grammar which treats of the right arrangement of words in a sentence, (iii) Prosody is tliat part of Grammar whicli treats o{ Accent^ Afetre, Rhyme, and Rhythm, * § 2. WORD ACCORDING TO FORM AND MEANING. Word according to Form. 1. A Word, according to its form, is either simple or compound. 2. A Simple Word possesses a distinct meaning, and consists of one or more syllables. A Compound Word is a combination of two or more simple words. ii. A Syllable consists of one or more letters possessing one vowel sound. A Monosyllable is a word of one syllable. A Dissyllable „ two syllables. A Trisyllable „ three syllables. A Polysyllable „ more than three syllables. 4. A Letter is the symbol of a sound. Letters are divided into 2 classes ; Vowels and Consonants. (i) A Vowel is a full, open sound. The vowels are 5, a, e, 7, 0, u. ' (ii) A Consonant is a letter which cannot be sounded with- out the aid of a vowel, (iii) The Consonants are divided into: (a) Liquids, so called because they most easily combine with other letters : I, m, n, r. (b) Mutes, because they cannot be sounded at all without a vowel. (iv) W, Y are called Semivowels; X, J, double Consonants. (v) W and Y are called Conso.xants when they precede a vowel in the same syllal)le ; as in wine, twine, yet, INTKODUCTOJtY. 11 o — "-« % r o 03 Eh « bo a o Q « O o « o bo fl •^^ ♦J OS fl 8 O C3 > Ml H -►J (in <1 P o O *d ' t, .s o 1-3 t> bo a ►J CO o " 0) ^ s •^ a o u a. — o tJ i s s % Cf-I O •F-4 OQ c o 09 K W a. -XL c. w ° e Hi en 9} Q 00 — O CO o .H Hi 0} W3 -H U Q §■ I on f 12 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. youth: in all other cases these letters luc vowels ; us in Ystadt, newly^ dewy. (vi) DiiMiTiioNos consist of two vowels sounded to^jetiier. Generally, the sound is that of a single vowel, but iu some cases they have a sound of their own; as House, new. TUeae i\n^ called 2)roperdij)hthoii(/s. When only one of the vowels is sounded, the diphthong is culled improper; as, oa in loaf, eo \n people. The diphthongH in English are 2!) ; embracing all but Oof thn JJo possible combinations of two vowels. The six rejected are U, iu, iw, iy, uu, uw. I'en of tliese diphthongs being variously sounded may be either pro'per or improper : to wit, ay, ie, oi, ou, ow, ua, ue, ui, uo, uy. The proper diphthongs appear to be 13 : ay, iti, ie, io, oi, ou, o>o, oy, ua, uc, ui, uo, uy, of which combinations only 6, ui, io, and oy are invariably of this class. (vii) Triphtuonqs consist of three vowels sounded together, as buoyant. When all the vowels are sounded the triphthong is called proper ; as uoy in buoy. When only one or two of the vowels are sounded ♦'le triph- thong is called improper; as, eau in beauty. The only proper triphthong in English is 'mf, as in buoy, buoyant, unless uoi in quoit may be considered a parallol instance. The improper triphthongs are 16. 5. The whole system of Letters may be thus represented in tabular form : LETTERS Vowels Consonants Full (a, e, i, 0, u) Semi {w,y) Mutes Liquids (/, m, n, r) TjAbials Dentals (Jitturals {b,p,v,f) {d, t, 8) "•, g, g, k) jl — is simply a breathing, possessing no articulate .sound of its own. ^^.^in^4*is««tSft9l«£:ii.^!ir;..:„„^ INTKOUUCTUUY. 18 in i\r r) \ \ Observations on the Letters. 6. Lahiai.s aio those loiters we proiioimco vvitli tlie MipH;' Dkn- TAi.s — with tlio 'teeth ;' Guttuuals — with the 'throat.' 7. (i) c in soft like s bi'foro e, i\ y, as cell, civil, cynihul ; excopt in sceptiCyCymry (|iroiiouiicecl Cuniru). id hard like A; before a, o, w, r, /, t. It has the sound of sh in some wordd ; as, socud. (ii) F is pioiioiinced uniformly, except in o/ and its conipound^, when it is pronounced like v. (iii) a is soft before c, «, y ; hard before a, o, m, »j, /, r. (iv) s is sometimes sharp, as in siug ; flat, as in raisin ; zh, or sh, as m pleasure ; silent, as in island. (v) TH has two sounds: sharp, as in thin — flat, as in these. These two sounds were represented by tlie symbols |) — th, and is — dh, in Anglo-Saxon. (vi) X has the sound of A;.?, as in exercise, gs as \\\ "xcrtion, z as in Xenophon» (vii) z has the sound of flat s, as in zebra: of flat sh, as in azure, 8. There are 4 2 elementary sounds in the Englivsh Alphabet, and 2(1 letters. A perfect alphabet requires: — (i) A single sign for every simple sound. (ii) JVb sound should have more than one sign. (iii) No sign should represent more than one sound. (iv) Similar sounds should be represented by similar signs. 9. Viewed by these tests the English alphabet is uncertain, incon- sistent, erroneous^ deficient, redundant. 10. These defects are remedied by various exjiedients, such as: (i) Lengthening a voivel by adding a final e mute, as lAt, bite. (ii) Shortening a voivtl by doubling tlie next cunsonant, as carry. (iii) Additig h to mark the ai^pi rates of/), t, s. I 14 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISU LANGUAGE. O § 3. Spelling. 1. Spkllino is the arrangement of letters in a word. 2. Orthoqrapuy is the art of correct spelling. 3. The anomalies of English spelling are influenced by : (i) The deficiencies and uncertain sounds of our alphabet. (il) The variety and copiousness of our words taken from various sources, and necessarilj' connected by their spell- ing with their roots. (iii) The necessity of distinguishing loords of like sound, but of different meaning. 4. Rules for Spelling : (i) Vowels. yft (a) Final E. Words ending in e mute generally — — retain it before additions that begin with a conso- nant ; as, paleness. Exc. : Awfal^ duly, truly, wholly. — omit it before additions that begin with a vowel ; as, curable, Exc: After v, c, and G soft it is retained; as, changeable. After dg it is generally omitted ; aa, judg- ment. Before ous it becomes i; as, gracious. (b) Diphthongal sounds of e are spelt ei in derivatives from capio; as, receive: otherwise in ie; as, believe. (c) Final Y — remains unchanged before additions : — in simple words preceded by a vowel, — in true compounds, except before ing and ish; as, joyful, ladyship. — is changed into i before additions: — when preceded by a vowel. — when the compound word is made one ; as, hayidiwork, daily. The words laid, paid, said, staid are accounted for by the participial suffix ed. 'L ;? II- o{ 1 u INTRODUCTORY. 15 (ii) Consonants. (a) Monosyllables ending in '/ /, s, preceded by a short vowel, double the final letter; as, well, mill, pass, staff. JLxcept As, gas, his, this, thus, us, yes, was, clef, if, of. (b) Monosyllables ending in any other letter than/ / s keep the ^na^ consonant single; as, son, cup. Except: Add, butt, buzz, ebb, egg, err, inn, odd. - '^pTunds^ ' '^ ^^''''"^' *° monosyllables and their cora- (c) Final c and c;?;. Monosyllables and English verbs end m ck, other words in c, as public. Except : lac, soc, zinc, disc, talc. (iii) Double Letters; (a) Words ending with a double letter retain both be- , fore addition, if these do not begin with the same letter • as, agreeable, successful, ' If the same letter follows, one is omitted; as, hilly. (iv) Compound and Derived Words. Words ending with a double letter preserve it double mall derivatives formed hyprefxes; as, call, recall, fall befall. ' "^ ' Exc. : Enrol, fulfil, hefel. (v) Monosyllables. Words ending in single I; words accented on the final syllable when the voioel is short, double the final consonant before additions ; as, thinner, acquittal, grovelling, (b) If the accent is thrown back the final letter is not generally doubled ; as, refer, reference. (vi) IzE, iSE. Causative verbs end in izc: monosyllables (and where ise is not a distinct part of the root) in ise • as, in advise, rise, surjjrise. ' 5. Dividing Syllables. As a general rule subordinate to etymological propriety . each separate syllable should, as far as possible, begin with a consonant : as, re-pre-hen-si-hle. -t p . 1 »i n. i m > i 1 ' ■■ iwp 16 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. § 4. Accent. 1. Orthoepy is the art of correct pronunciation. Emphasis is tlie stress laid on a word in a sentence. AccKNT is the stress hiid on a syllable in a word. Quantity is the length or brevity of a vowel sound. 2. Accent in English is entirely distinct from quantity. Thus, August, august have each one long syllable (aw), but we accent either syllable. .S. Accent as a rule is on the root, not on the prefix, nor on the suffix. 4. One great use of accent is to distinguish words alike in form, according to this general rule. The verb moves the accent to the right from the adjective and noun ; the adjective moves it to the right from the noun.* Thus : — I. II. III. Noun. verb. adj. verb. noun. adj. Desert desert Attribute attribute frequent frequent absent absent compact compact minute miniite Accent accent &c. present present &c. Expert expert &c. 5. English words are accented on any of the last four syllables. Tlie favourite place in words that admit of it is the antepenult ; and words imported into English have a tendency to shift their accent in accordance with this law ; as, TheatriB has become Theatre Academy has become Academy Revenue „ Revenue Samaria „ Samaria Fanatic ,, Fanatic Sennacherib ,, Sennacherib Orator „ O'rator &c. kc. Senator ,, Senator >» " There are some exceptions of course; as Invalid (noun), InvAlid (nAj.) The qnos- tion arises wliellier the former should not be Invalid. ) I l\ \ INTRODUCTORY. 17 it § 5. Word according to Meaning. i ' 1. Etymology has a threefold province: — (i) It treats of the classijication of words. (ii) It treats of the composition and derivation of words. (iii) It treats of the inflexions of words. 2. All words may be classified, or arranged under certain heads. 3. The classes into which all words may be divided are termed Parts op Speech. 4. The classification of words is exceedingly diverse. Four prin- cipal schemes are given : (1) according to Morell ; (2) according to the suggestions of Home Tooke ; (3) according to LatJiam\ and (4) from Angus. 5. Preference is given to the views of Dr. Angus, because they a|)pear to he most logical and most universal in application. (>. Words are divided into those, 1. Which give tuimes io persons and things — Appellative. 2. TVhich ascribe attributes to persons and things — Attri- butive. 3. Which express relations between other words — Rela- tional. 4. Which express /ee/in^r rather than thought — Emotional. 7. 1. Appellative words are Nouns and Personal Pro- nouns. s. Attributives are — (i) Adjectives which append a quality to a Noun without formally asserting it. (ii) Verbs which assert the qualities or acts; or (iii) Adverbs which append qualities either to Adjec- tives or Verbs. 3. Relational or Interrelating Words are — (i) Prepositions, which express the relation between one word and another. (ii) Conjunctions, which express the relation between one assertion and another. 4. Emotional arc called Intkrjections. 18 WORDS ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. Tabid of Words. I. Give nameH to persons or j 1. Noun. things (Appeli^th^) j 2. Personal Pkonoun. '3. Adjective = Simple attribute. II. Ascribe attributes to persons or things (Attributive) i' III. Express relations between words (Relational) 4. Verb = Attribute + Assertion. 6. Adverb = Attribute of another attribute. '6 Preposition, relates notions. 7. CoNJUNCTiON,relate8 sentences. IV. Expffess feeling rather than j-. ivTEiLTPrTiov ^AoM^Ai (Emotional) Y' interjection. It^* I^'or the schemes of Morell, Horno Tooke, Latham, see Tables 2, 3, 4. 5. Thus we mny enumerate the Parts of Speech as eighty which we proceed to discuss separately, exhibiting the classifi- cation, structure, and inflexions of each. This will render our analysis of Etymology complete. tS^ Though the method pursued in this analysis is in exact accordance with the tabular division of the subject of Lan- guage given at the commencement, it may be useful to state that it is applied unifoi-mly thus :— (i) Definition ; (ii) Divi- sion, or Classification (according to the general principles. Meaning and Structure) ; (iii) Explanations and Relations of this Classifi^saiion ; (iv) Accidents; (v) General remarks. Subject-matter which cannot be well introduced without a sacrifice of perspicuity or method will be. found in the Appendices. 1', ■ THE NOUN. 19 CHAPTER III. THE NOUN. §1- 1. Definition. A Noun is the name of any object of sense or subject of tliought. 2. CLASSIFICATION. (i) Strictly so. as .... mjh^^ (ii) In transition state . . . Cjesar (i) Class names . \ J^^nsible, as knife / Rational... conqueror (ii) Collective names \ J^^^^ular, as mob • ••x XT « Nounofmultitude..clere-v 111) Names of mnforinla „» "*«'. ^lergy . yard • sleeper • death . thinking . goodness excess —■-S Meaning • -ai o O (iii) Names of materials, as (iv) Names of quantity I. (v) Names of agents (i) Names of states, as (ii) Names of acts (iii) Names of qualities (iv) Names of degree -2 —? Structure-/—^ I —Patronymics —AugmentaUvea ■Diminutives ^—Propriate {Office State < Profession I Condition {, &c. t 08 20 ANALYSIS OF THE KNGLISH LANGUAGP:. § 2. Nouns according to Meaning. 1. A Propkr Noun is tlie name of any individual person, place, or thing; as, London, Philip, Hero. 2. A Common Noun is a name common to all individuals of the same class ; as, tree, bird, flower, dog. Liogically we may define a comtnon noun to be the name of a distributive conception. A term is said to be 'distributed' wlien it is taken for all and for each of the things signified h-j it. 3. A CoLLECTivpj Noun is the name of a collective conception, i.e. of a cl.Tss viewed as a unit, and is* of two kinds: (i) The singular noun, in which the idea of unity is promi nent; as, mob, crowd. (ii) The noun of multitude, in which the idea of number is prominent; as, clergy, nobility. 4. An Abstract Noun is the name of anything which we only conceive of in our minds as having a real independent existence; as, wisdom, prudence, sleep. § 3. Nouns according to Structure. 1. When a word can be reduced to no simpler form, it ist called a root. 2. A word derived from a simple word or root by a radical change, is called a strong derivative; as, bless, bliss; sing, song; feed, food; choose, choice. 3. A word derived from another by the addition of a suffix is called a loeak derivative ; as, lance, lancet ; stream, streamlet. 4. Djcrivativks formed direct from the root are called primary derivatives ; derivatives formed from other derivatives — secondary derivatives. 5. Words formed by the addition of two or more words, each re- taining its own signification, are called compounds. ■ 6. Nouns are either — " THE NOUN. •',, ' f ^ ■» (i) Orif/iudl Hoots. (ii) Strung or weak Derivatives. (iii) Compounds. (i) Primitive Nouns are chiefly monosyllubic and Anglo- Saxon. They embrace the names of all the common objects of nature and human life around us, the winds, passions, &c. ; as, brother^ sister, sun, earth, fear, wife, roof. (ii) Strong Derivatives are also, with few ex'^eptions, Anglo-Saxon. (iii) Weak Derivatives may be divided into four classes. (a) Pkopriate Nouns {propriuvi) which express some special notion or char.actor (such as, state, condition, form, profession, office, ') %tliesuffixe»or»-„, ;i„ ; . , '•• A favourite termination ofH , f' "' ''"'™''- ^'"'-''-• «. -d of A.-Saxon nusj "'"""' °' ^-'•^--'' -'"-was »o>vprevai,,would„at„ra ;beacl„ :rw/ .f""' "'''""' ^''-'^ W Nouns ending in c/i soft .j ivv" consonants or t double .„' ' '' ''' '' "'"' g™^^''"/ i" 7<^ed b, a consonant, r"ternT"'-'''r '" " "'" ^ ^- ■"to i before es ; as, /y.^fe ' '"""' ' * ^'''""S''^ . (0) Oti,er nouns endingin 1 w7 '" "'""'^ '" ^• '" and y preceded by a vowef f, rm tl o'" T' T"'""""' " '"■•^ol-iei; proo^ roof; rept" \; 'f "^^''''= '^-^'''ef, hoof, plurals both ways- as \1' /^''f^ ""-^ dwarf form their l'; ihe following thirteen »;,„„i '"""'A dwarves. rals :_ ^ '" "'"?'« """n^ I'ave strong ph,. Man— Men r>„ „ Woman W ^'oose— Geese woman— Women Foot— Feet Child-Children Tooth-Teeth Brother— Brethren r t Jireiiiien Louse— Lice ^x — Uxen n,r Mouse— Mice Other words, as sheep, oroui^ h„ u changed forn,. ^' ^ '' *'- '"'^ »"-ong plurals of „n 6- Some n/yams have l.nti, „ ., I>ie— Dice Pennj^Pence Pea— Pease. f* f. Sing. Penny Pea THE NOUN. Weak Plural. Pennies Peas 26 Strong Plural. Ptjnce Pease Since plurals in en are estimated strong, to tliese we may add Brother Brothers Brethren 7. Nouns which have two plurals with totally different meanings : Sing. Plu. 1. Plu. 2. Cloth Cloths Clothes Die Dies Dice Genius Index Geniuses Indexes Genii Indices 8. Nouns which* have different meanings in the singular and plural: *' Sing. : Metal Plu. : Manacles, &c. Iron Content Domino Good Salt Vesper Spectacle Volume — A mask — An adjective — A condiment — Evening — . A sight — Subject-matter of a book A game Property " ' • A medicine Evening prayers Glasses to see with Under this class we may place the names of materials which in the plural indicate varieties ; as, mnea, sugars, &c. 9. Nouns which have two meanings in the singular and one in the plural Sing, Meaning. Plural. Meaning. Horse — Cavalry; animal Horses — Animals Foot — Infantry; part of the body Feet — Parts of the body Powder — For guns ; mixture Powders — Mixtures Light — Of a lamp; a lamp Lights — Lamps Compass — Circuit ; mariner's compass Compasses — For measuring 1 0. Nouns which have two meanings in the plural and one in the singular : Sing. Meaning. Plural. Meaning. Pain — SufiFering Pains — SulFering, troubles Custom — Habit Customs — Habits, revenue duties 26 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 11. The nonn * letter* has two meanings m the singular, alphabet- letter, and epistle; and three in the plural, viz. alphabet-letter, literature, epistles. 12, Nouns which have no singular. (a) Hiose which express dual conceptions ; as, Bellows Scissors Spectacles Troasers Pincers Shears Tongs Pliers Snuffers Tweezers (b) Those, which express things plural by nature or art, or are plurals in the languages from which they are derived ; such a», Antipodes Bowels Hustings Nuptials Annals Calends Ides Oats Archives Credentials Lees Obsequies Assets Dregs Matins Odds Aborigines Entrails Measles Premises Banns Filings Nones Thanks Tidings Trappings Victuals Vitals 13. Nouns which have no plural: — Names of objects, &c., which from their nature cannot be counted, have no plurals ; such as, (a) Names of materials; as, gold, pitch, &c. (b) Names of abstract and moral qualities; as, hardness^ prudence, pride. 14. Collectiveness is shown m three yr&ya : — (a) By the collective noun ; as, mob, crowd, (b) By the strong plural ; as, mouse, mice. (c) By the suffix ry; as. Cavalry = a collection of * caballi,* or steeds Yeomanry = „ yeomen Artillery = „ bows and arrows [arcus, telum) Eyrie = eggery . . eggs Jewry =; Jews, i. e. Judaea jfcc. , &ic. THE NOUN. 27 w hich \rdness, ilum) 15. Words imported from forei.j.i lauguugcs form tlieir plurals according Lo the law of the language whcne they are derived; as, (Hebrew) (Greek) (Latin) ^French) (Italian) &c. 16. Several of these foreign words have a tendency to form their plurals according to English rule; as, Crocuses, formulas, frustums, mernorandums, &c. Wiieu this takes place the word may be said to be naturalised. 17. We have now t< discuss the following words: — (i) Means Cherub Cherubim Criterion Criteria Formula FormuliB Beau Beaux Bandit Banditti &c. &c. / > j Ethics ^ ' I Metaphysics [b) Chickens Children Ferns Swine Kino Pullen News u («) (0 (g) (1') (k) (I) (-•) (0) (P) (RKN. Tliis is an instance of a double plural from child-er-en ; er and en being plural suffixes; so lumhren. — Wickliff. ( 1) Fkrns. According to Wallis (to quote Latham) this is another instance of a double plural {fer-en-es) fere being the singular. This is doubtful, as the A.-S. form is /ear/i. (e) Swine (A.-S.) Swin, (Danish) Swyn, Swine is singular, also plural and collective. * As a jewel of gold m aswine^s snout. — Prov. xi. 22. 'And there was an herd of many swine feeding.* — St. Luke viii, 32. (f) KiXE. *Kine is the plural we have adopted from Cotven. Analogy seems to point to sow-en^ the plural of sow^ as the origin of swine^ by dropping the o in pronunciation.' — Dr, liichardson. Referring to what has just been said about kine, we may add that there is a word Al/e, used in Scotland for cows, with which it may also be connected. (g) PuLLEN (poultry). 'The en is no more a sign of a plural than es m riches. The proper form is am, or eyn, pullain.^ — Latham.- (h) ' News is in respect to its original form plural : in re- spect to its meaning, either singular or plural, most frequently the former.' — Latham. The same remark applies to — (i) (k) (1) Means, Pains, Amends. All were plurals origin- ally, and now are used as singulars. (m) Riches is a true singular derived from the N.-Prench richesse. A plural, richesses, is however met with in Chaucer and Wickliff. (n) Alms is also a true singular, derived from the Greek kXerfnoovvT], or A.-Saxon ^Imesse, 0. English almesse and almes. A plural olmesses is met with in Chaucer. (o) Folk and Polks used indiscnminately; but the plural termination is superfluous, as the won\folk implies plurality. :-^. THE NOUN. 29 chicken rularly. il from irtihren. ) this is ing the ingular, d from of SOWj ciation.' we may s, with ^n of a I or eyUj in re- [quently origm- [Prench Jhaucer Greek $56 and phiral lihtv. (p) Wages now singular but formerly jiilaral; lieiice the word wage. Its singular use is exemplified in the verse, * The wages of sin is death.' (q) TuANKS. A singular to this did exist, as in tlie phrase, 'What thank have ye?' (r) Welkin is an adjective meaning rolling^ used substan- tively to denote the sky ; hence singular, and never plural. 18. In forming the plurals of Proper names we retain the spell- ing unchanged ; as, the three Marys, unless they have become, through frequent usage, CImss or Common names ; as, the Ptolemies. 19. In Compound nouns the substantive part takes the plural suffix; as, courts martial, Knights Templar, aides-de-camp. So also we say the Misses Thompson. 20. National names compounded with man make the plural in men; as. Frenchman, Frenchmen. Exception, Norman. 21. The following words are not compounds of man, and there- fore form their plurals by adding s; German* Mussulman, Brah- man, Ottoman, Turcoman, Talisman, Caiman, Firman. § 5. Gender. 1. Definition. Gender is a grammatical form expressive of class or sex. 'Though gender is more applied to class than to sex, in English the two are co-cxtensive ; and thus in Gender our language is more philosophic and effective than the classic languages.' 2. Gender is of three kinds, masculine, feminine, neuter. In English gender is determined by sex alone ; the name of everything of the male sex is called masculine, the name of everything of the female sex is called feminine, and of neither sex, neuter. 3. In some grammars a fourfold division is given, viz. masculine, feminine, neuter, and common. Such words as parent, child, &c. * The etymology of * German ' is much disputed. The most reasonable one seems to be (Celtic) • galrmean ' = * one who cries out.'— Taylor, Words and Places, p. 65. At all events the word does not seem to be a compound of ' man.^ III! I J_J-l,i.. .* M |i 30 ANALYSIS OF TllK ENCJLIHII LANOUAaiS. are given as instances of tlie Inst. This division is an instance of a logical fault, ciilleil 'cross division.' It is evident 'parent,' &c. must be either masculine or ft'/nininc, and therefore cannot represe'it another sort of gender. 4. Gkndku of nouns is shown in three ways: — (i) By a prefix; as, liegoat^ she-goat. (ii) ByasufBx; as, shephei'd, shepherdess. (iii) By a total change of word; as, bidl, cow. 5. In A.-Saxon the syllable ere, now er, was a masc— suffix. The male agent ia shown by this termination or its variations, ar, or, yor ; as, heggar, sailor, lawyer. The feminine suffix was estre, or istre, now ster ; as, spinster. 6. In N.-French the feminine suffix was ess, derived from Lat. ix ; as, empress. 7. 'All males are not of the masculine gender.* Gender in its general definition cannot be limited to sex. (i) In Latin the fem. termination a is found in many mascu- line words; as, nauta, poeta, &c. (ii) In French we have une sentinelle, a sentinel, /em. (iii) In English such words as tapster, maltster, &c. are masc.y though ster is & feminine suffix as above stated. The cause of this was, that the operations indicated by the terms, tapster^ maltster, &c., were formerly performed by women. 8. The termination ster is found in otlier combinations; as, youngster, punster, &c. Hoie this fem. suffix is employed as a diminutive of depreciation. On the oth^r hand the augmentative suffix ard is used to denote the 7iiasc. gender in the words wizard and mallard. 9. As a rule the feminine is formed from the masc; but, m the words drake, widower, gander, hridegroom, the reverse is the case. (a) Drakk is an example of a Scandinavian masc. ending. Tiie word is Ant-rnkko ; ant, meaning ^ swimmer,^ lias been lost. Duck, chiedy used as feminine, is really the generic term, and therefore is, according to circumstances, of either gender. THE NOUN. 31 masc.f the [ed by , a^ as a itative tjizard \n the case. hding. been term, jnder. (b) WiDowKR. The A.-S. was vdduwa (luasc.) and widuwe (feni.). In O. E. widow was applied to both sexes, and er, the common A.-S masc. suffix was ultimately added to distin- guish them. (c) Gander, from gans = a goose, is a similar example. (d) Brideoboom ought to be hridegoom; from A.-S. gyman^ to attend. 10. To explain the following words: lordj lady, man, woman^ nep/ieWf niece, Iieroine, vixen, sultana, girl, slut, seamstress. (a) Lord, either hlaf-ord, A. -S.= loaf-giver, or from hlaf= lofty, and ord=ortus, (uat.) born; so lord=:lofty born. (b) Lady (hlaf-d-ig); ig means add; as if to say, 'add a raised condition.' (c) Nephew. (Fr.) neveu, (Lat.) nepos. (d) Niece. (LaL) neptis. (e) Man, a generic term, (A.-S.) m/igan, to be powerful. , * (f) WoMAN=wif-man, i. e. 'the r^an that weaves.' (g) Heroine is an example of a fem. suffix form in many languages, Lat., Gr., German. (h) Vixen. A.-S. /cm. fixen; (fix = a fox.) (k) Sultana, a Turkish feminine. (1) Girl, an abbreviation from ceorlen, cirlen, (A.-S.), a little churl; originally of either gender. It is now appropri- ated as a feminine. (m) Slut, etymologically the same as sloven, from slow. In Old Englisli, of either gender, now used as a feminine. (n) Seamstress, Songstress. Compound feminines, seamr str-ess, or seam-ster-ess. The A.-S. suffix ster, aud N.-French ess, are here both combined. 11. The following words are feminine without any corresponding masculine form : — « Amazon Milliner Termagant Brunette Seamstress Virago Dowager Shrew Virgin Jointress Siren 32 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 11 I' 12. The third loay of showing gender of nouns is hy a total change of word. The following is a list of nouns that have a separate word for male and female : — Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. Bachelor Maid Dog Bitch King Queen Ram Ewe Beau Belle Drake Duck Lad Lass Sire Dam Boy Girl Earl Countess Lord Lady Sir Madam Bride- Bride Father Mother Male Female Sloven Slut groom Gaffer Gammer Man Woman Son Daughter Brother Sister Gander Goose Master Mistress Stag Hind Buck Doe Gentle- Lady Milter Spawner Steer Heifer Boar Sow man Monk Nun Swain Nymph Bull Cow Hart Roe Nephew Niece Uncle Aunt Cock Hen Horse Mare Papa Mama Wizard Witch Colt Filly Husband Wife Rake Jilt ^-t^israe'^ 13. We assign gender to the inanimate objects or qualities which nouns represent on three principles: (i) Ancient Mythology, or classic usage, (ii) A natural principle of Personification, which teaches us to group under the masculine things remarkable for strength^ courage^ majesty y dignity, permanence, &c., and generally those which would range under cav^e, whilst the feminine gender embraces those which specify gentleness, fruitfulnesSf beauty, weak- ness, clvange, volatility, inferiority, and those which would come under * effect.^ Thus^re in Lat. and French is mobsc, but the '■flame ' proceeding from it yem.; 'water* in both languages, yem.; ^cedifi- cium,' Lat. (generic term) neuter; *8edes*=temple for worship, masc. 'domus'= habitation (changeable) fem.; so door, window, chair, &c., in Lat. and French, fem.; &ic. &c. (iii) Cobbett notices a third principle. He tells us the country people speak of things closely identified with themselves as she; of things that pass from hand to hand as he. The shovel and prong are masculine, the scythe and plough, feminine. -fW*e, — sUt THE NOUN. 38 § 6. Case. 1. Definition. Case is a gnnnmatical form expressive of relation. In English we have three cuaes, Nominative^ Possessive, Objective ; or, as the form for the nominative and objective is now always the same, it is sometimes said Hhat we have two cases expressing three relations;^ as, king, king (nominative and objective), dnd king's (possessive). 2. In Latin, Gr., and A.-Saxon there were five or six cases : nominative, genitive, dative, accnsative, vocative, ablative; and these terms arc frequently used in English. 3. The explanation of such case-endings as remain to us will be better understood after an inspection of the following table of A.-S. declensions; the critical terminations, of which traces remain, being marked. Anglo-Saxon Inflexions. First Declension. \ Sing. Plur. Mas. Fern. Neu. Steorra Tunge Eage SteorraTi Tungan Eagan, Steorran Tungan Eagan Steorran Tungan Eage Nom. Oen. Dat. O '-3 o u o Formation and Meaning -SiHaple —Common —Proper —Numeral —Pronominal —Participial . —Compound . — Meaning —Definitive i: —General Particular —Qualitative , —Privative . —Diminutive —Augmentative —Positive —Causative . —Potential . ,, white as good, bad ,, American ,, three, four ,, all, each ,, amusing .. four-footed as a, an „ the ,, sleepless ,, childish ,, truthful ,, learned ,, terrific ,, pleasurable -Quantitative —Definite — —Indefinite . —Distributive —Cardinal —Ordinal —Multipli- cative two, first, double as few, many ,, each, every )less lish ful ed fie urable I two, 1 first, 1 double many I, every THE ADJECTIVE 87 § 2. Adjective according to Meaning. 1. Adjectives whicli distinguish a class, or a noun from its class, arc caiiod definitive. These adjectives are of two kinds ; general and particular. 2. The general definitive or distinctive adjective is a or an, and the particular distinctive adjective is the. 3. These words, owing to the frequency of their use and strongly inseparable character, have been differently classed, and called Arti- cles, the former, indefinite ; the latter, definite. 4. Article from articulus a joint — *a small part or portion of the entire limb;' hence metaphorically, a small, but critical part of the entire signification. Since these adjectives limit the significations of nouns, we shall not be wrong in defining them according to our classi- tication as ^definitive or distinctive adjectives.^ 5. Upon no subject has there been so much difference of opinion as the nature and classification of these two small words. By some grammarians they are regarded as adj'ectives ; by others as pronouns ; by others again as forming a distinct class of themselves. The question seems to be easily settled by refetence to the definitions of an adj'ective and of a pronoun. (i) An adjective is a word added to a noun, dtc. (ii) A pronoun is a word used instead of a noun. It is the characteristic of the latter that it can he used by itself. Therefore, in the case of these words, a and the, it is evident that as they can never be used instead of others, but, on the contrary, must always be added to others; they are adjectives and not pronouns. In this respect they differ completely from any, this, that, with which they are sometimes erroneously classed. 6. The logical force of these articles is this : A or An (= one) indicates a common noun. The reduces the ' common ' noun to a ^ singular.^ 7. An is used before vowels and silent h; as, an apple, an ugly tree, an heir. 38 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANOUAGj!:. 8. The words in tlie following list, though beginning with vowels, require a before them : union unity usage usurious yell uniform universe usual yaclit yellow unicorn universal usurper yard yoke unison use usurping yawn youth unit useful usurer year youthful 9. The following words beginning with an li aspirate, but having the accent on the second syllable, require the article an before them : habitual hardngue harmonic harmonious heraldic herbaceous hereditary heretical heroic hexameter. hexagonal hist6rian historical horizon hostility hyp6crisy hypothesis hysterical I'^'^i N. B. — It will he noticed that the substantives belonging to these adjec- tives take ' a ' before them. 10. The applies to either number; a, to the singular number only, except when it gives a collective meaning to an expression con- sisting of an adjective and plural noun ; as, a few days, a hundred pounds. Prefixed to adjectives, the marks a class ; as, the righteoics, the wicked. 11. In phrases like three times a year, *a' = each, every, and is distributive. 12. Sometimes a means any; as, *Ifa man keep my saying,* i.e. ^any man.' 13. Adjectives which mark the peculiarities of a thing by a re- ference to its qualities, or supposed qualities, are called quali- tative. 14. Qualitative adjectives are of six kinds — positive and privative, which signify the possession of, or absence of, a quality ; diminutive and augmentative, which weaken or intensify the meaning ; causa' tive and potential, which impart or excite a quality. « ._4 )welfl, 'ul luiving the in : J is il 86 adjee- number ion con- lundred ■>us^ the and is mying' THE ADJECTIVE. 39 15. Adjkctives which distinguish things according to their num- ber are called quantitative. 16. Quantitative adjectives are of three kinds — definite^ rs ten ; indefinite^ as few ; and distributive^ as eac/j, every. 17. Definite Numeral Adjectives are divided into three classes — (i) Cardinal^ (ii) Ordinal^ (iii) Multiplicative. (i) A CARDINAL numeral shows the number of things taken ; as ten J twenty^ &c. (ii) An ORDINAL numeral shows in what order they are taken ; as, first, fourth^ &c. (iii) A MULTIPLICATIVE numeral shows how many times one thing exceeds another; rs, single^ double, treble, &c., twofold, threefo'd, &c. For derivation and explanation of these numerals, vide Etym. Deriv. chap. I. § 2, 6. 1 8. The following nouns are employed as collective numerals : pair, brace, couple, gross, dozen, score, stone, &c. ' 19. The compounds of one are, only = one-like; atone^ i.e. to be at-one; alone = all one; 'none = no-one. |^~ Distinguish ]}etween ' one ' the noun (homo) and ' one' the adjec- tive (an). 20. Indefinite Numeral Adjectives are such as, all, few, many, certain, divers, several, &c. 21. Distributive Adjectives denote objects one, tvo, or more taken separately ; as, each, every, &c. ky a re- QUALI- ivativey \inutive causa' § 3. Adjectives according to Formation and Meaning. 1. Possibly this classification is more grammatical, though less logical: according to it we divide adjectives into six classes, which are thus briefly explained. (i) A Common Adjective is any ordinary epithet or adjec- tive denoting quality or situatfon ; as, good, bad. i 40 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. (ii) A PitorKR Adjkctivk is an adjective formed from a proper noun : as, English^ American. (iii) A NuMKUAL Adjkctivk is an adjective tliat expresses a definite number; as, owe, two^ three. (iv) A PuoNOMiNAL Adjkctivk is 0116 that may eitlier accom* puny its noun, or represent it understood ; as, all. (v) A Participial Adjkctivk is a participle used us an adjec- tive, i. e. without tlio notion of time ; as, amusing, dying, (vi) A Compound Adjkctivk is one that consists of two or more words joined together ; as, surefooted. B^* This classification will be found very useful in parsing. § 4. Adjectives accordin|^ to Structure. 1. Like nouns, adjectives are either simple^ derived^ or compound. 2. Simple Adjectives are A.-Saxon. 3. Derived Adjectives may be divided into strong and weak, or primary and secondary. 4. Primary derivatives are A.-Saxon. They are derived from verbs and nouns; as, wit, wise ; pride, proud; fill, full. 5. Secondary derivatives are derived from verbs, nouns, adjectives, either Saxon or Latin or Greek, by the addition of various prefixes and suffixes derived from these languages, for which see Etym, Deriv. chap. L § 2. 6. Compound Adjectives are formed by combining — (i) Nouns with adjectives, imperfect participles, and perfect participles ; as, sea-green, heart-breaking, moth-eaten. (ii) Adverbs with participles, perfect nnd imperfect; as, well- favoured, ill-looking. (iii) By adding a suffix, as ' ed, ' to some of these compounds ; as, grey-lieaded, long-legged. --4 THE ADJECTIVE. 41 7. In compound ordinal nnmerah tlie last only assumes the ordi- nal forin ; as, twenty-third, one-hundred nd ninety-Jifth, &c. For derivation, compoHition, and explanation of the nunieralii, vide Etym. JJeriv. chap. I. § 2, (J. § 5. Comparison. 1. The Accidknts of an Adjective are Nuvibery Getuler, Case, and Comparison. 2. Tiie English adjective does not exhibit, by inflexional changes, the accidents of Gender, Number ^ Case, which it has in common with tlie noun which it qualifies, and with which it is snid to agree. 3. The only striking peculiarity of the English adjective, as com- pared with the same part of speech in other languages, is its invari- ability, or its want of distinct forms for different cases, genders, and numbers. The irreconcilability of the Norman and Saxo, modes of inflecting adjectives compelled the English to discaid them both ; but the Saxon endings of number were not given up till the fifteenth century, and some of them held out longer. Hooker uses my deare for my dears, where a modern preacher would have said my dear hearers. — Marsh's Lectures on Eng. Lang. 4. Definition. Comparison of adjectives and adverbs means a variation in them to express quality in different degrees. 6. There are three degrees of comparison : the positive, the com- parative, and the superlative. (i) The Positive Degree. An adjective is said to be in the positive degree when it is in its simple state; as, white, fierce, hard, &c. (ii) The Comparative Degree. An adjective is said to be in the comparative degree when, on comparing two objects or classes, it expresses relatively an increase or diminution of the quality; as, higher, fiercer, lower, more hard, less feeble. (iii) The Superlative Degree. An adjective is said to be in the superlative degree when, on comparing more than two objects or classes, it expresses relatively the limit '% UgL-ll. ! . . ! ' . f . * W*yi P'' '4 ■■i old authors: as, 'Our worser thoughts Heaven mend.' Skakspeare. (ii) LiTTLK is a diminutive form. iiiUiiMH ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. (iii) Farther, Further. Far means distant, and we use farther wlien speaking of the relative position of bodies; as, 'The sun is fartlier from tlie earth than tlie moon.' Further is the comparative of forth^ from foris, out o/, or beyond. It is used when motion is implied ; as, 'Pie threw the ball further (i.e. more beyond) tiian you.' The th in farther is an instance of Epenthesis, which inserts a letter or syllable in the middle of a word in this instance, to prevent the collision of two r's, as, farrer. (iv) Much applies to quality, as well as to quantity. Many to quantity only. (v) Few, Many. Few is used with a plural noun, and yet admits before it the indefinite article. Few :=zh\\t few, if any. A /eM;=:some, thougli not many. Many is said by some to be a substantive in its origin, from (N.-Fr.) mesiiie, a multitude. Plence we say a great many* i.e. a great multitude. So also many a man, q.d. many of men. Others take it from A.-S. manig, a diminutive joined to a plural noun, and (with a inter- vening), to a singular one, as above. Thongli the latter derivation seems more correct, it leaves us witlioitt any explanation of this singular use of the word.* (vi) Later, latest, refer to time. Latter ^ last, reiar m place, (vii) Elder applies to persona ; older to dbjeets, ammate oimT inanimate. (viii) Th.5 word chief, which denotes head or Jirst, eanuot strictly have a superlative; we find chiefest however, in St. Mark x. 44, in Milton, and elsewhere. For complete explanation, derivation, &c. of these words, vide Etyni. Deriv. chap. 1. § 2, 5. * See Syntax, chap. VTI. § ft. Many. i .wti i i >i I 1 WO use )f bodies; le moon.' is, out of, ' as, *£Ie you.' inserts a stance, to Many and yet THE PRONOUN. 45 ! origin, e sav n y a man, , m>anig, a inter- tigh the witlioitt L* ) pkce> ate iMiiJ eanuot owever, is, vide CHAPTER V. § 1. PBONOUN. 1. Definition. A Pronoun is a word used instead of a noun. 2. CLASSIFICATION. I -Compound -Structure . -Derived '-Simple 1^ O 'A o be o o u — Meaning -Adjective . - -Possessive . . -Demonstrative -Relative . . -Interrogative . -Reflective . . -Reciprocal . . -Distribuiive . ■Indefinite . . my, mine, thy, thine, his, hers, &c. this, that who, which, what, that, &c. who, which, what, &c. self, own each other, one another each, every, either, neither any, such, some '-Substantive- -Personal . . I, tnou, ho, she, it, &c. -Reflective . . self -Indefinite . . aught, naught. one W BS iH * . -*' *' V f i. - g. r '^''Ir h 46 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. § 2. Pronoun according to Meaning. 1. Pronouns according to meaning are divided into pronouns substantive and pronouns adjective. 2. Pronoun Substantives are used instead of nouns, and are of three kinds — (i) Personaly (ii) Ee/lective, (iii) Indefinite. (i) Personal pronouns are simple substitutes for the names of persons and things. The PERSONAL pronouns are /, thou, he, she, it, and their plurals, (ii) When the thing or person spoken of is the same as the thing or person denoted by the noun or pronoun, the pronoun is called reflective. The reflective pronoun is self, originally an adjective, but used sometimes as a noun, meaning person or indi- viduality. (iii) An indefinite pronoun repre^piits a noun without spe- cifying any individual. Tiio iii'lcfinite pronouns are onCf aught, naught. 3. Pronouns Adjective are so called because, though all of l.hem can be used without a noun, they yet have the qualifying force of adjectives. 4. Under Pronouns Adjective we enumerate eight classes — (i) Possessive, (ii) Demonstrative, (iii) Relative, (iv) Interrogative, (v) Reflective, (vi) Reciprocal, (vii) Distributive, (viii) Indefinite. (i) Possessive pronouns are substitutes for the possessive cases of the personal jyronouns. The possessive pro- nouns are my, mine; thy, thine; his, hers, its; our, ours; your, yours ; their, theirs. (ii) Demonstrative pronouns are used to point out the object to which they refer. The demonstrative pronouns are this, that; plural, iliesc, those. TxIE PKONOUN. 4T ronouna 1 are of e names [id their ! as the Dun, the •live J but or t'wrfi- ut spe- Inns are of them Iforce of fses — (i) tive, (v) ie. [ssessive ive pro- |s; ouVf )ut the tJiese, (ill) Relative pronoiina are those which, in addition to being substitutes for the names of persons or things, refer to something which has gone before in the sentence, and so connect the parts of the sentence togetlier. The word referred to is caded the antecedent. The RELATIVE PRONOUNS are who^ whichf what^ and tJuit. Besides these, the particles but and as are sometimes employed as relatives. (iv) Interrogative pronouns are those used in asking ques- tions. They are whoy which, wJiat, and whether. 1^ The last is obsolete as an adjective, and nearly so as an interro- gatite. (v) Reflective pronouns adjective are se{/*and own. For an explanation of these pronouns see below. (vi) Reciprocal pronouns, which express mutual feehng and action are each other, one another, (vii) A Distributive pronoun represents a noun, and at the same time more than one individual of the class. Such pronouns are each, every, either, neither. (viii) The Indefinite pronouns adjective are any, other, some. 5. Having thus explained and defined those various classes we proceed to make some observations on those that especially call for it. * (i) Rejiectives, 'self and 'own.' (ii) Relatives. (iii) Reciprocal pronouns. 1. Self, (a) The anomalies of the construction of self have given rise to much difference of opinion. According to some, self is a •iuhatantive, and means person, or individuality. In the nom. my- self means mea or mei persona, and the construction is that of an adjective or genitive preceding a noun. He himself. They them- selves, can only be accounted for by supposing m euphonic, to avoid the repetition of ss in hisself: a word sometimes met with in vulgar use. In the oblique cases, himself, themselves, are instances of n(Mms him, them, in apposition with 'selves.' -■"X^'j^imf- 48 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. ! i! i r (b) This is Latham's explanation of tlie anomaly. It dues not seem to be correct. In the first place jn A.-S. sylf, or self, is an adjective and not a noun, like avrhg- in Greek and meme in French. In the next place, whilst it is usnally added to the personal pronoun in the same case and gender; as, ic ^ylfi '-^ ('^iy)s6lf,' the dative of the personal pronoun is also sometimes prefixed j as, ic com me sylf, ' I myself came ;' himsylf \*aer getuihte, ' himself there taught.' (c) From this it appears that he himself is perfectly correct, and a construction bequeathed to us from A.— Saxon. It is far more reasonable to suppose with the evidence before us, that the true construction is meself, theeself, and not myself^ thyself. We meet with an analogous construction in French — c^est nioimeme. (d) The conclusion to which we must come is this: that as myself thyself &c. are established in the language, self must be regarded in such cases as a noun. In himself &c. we have the true original construction, where self is an adjective and him a dative governed by it. 2. Own is an adjective, and is used with the genitive or possessive case, his, my, &c. Self is used with both the genitive and objective cases. (i) Kelatives. (a) Who is a definitive relative used when the antecedent is a rational being, or personified agent. (b) Which is an indefinite relative used for animate beings and inanimate objects ; as, * Our Father, which art,' &c. The common supposition that which is the neuter of who (which is an error) has now caused its relation to be restricted to neuter objects. (c) What is the neuter of who, and refers to inanimate objects. It is sometimes called a comjjound relative, because 11= that which. (d) That, really li demonstrative, is used as a general relative THE PRONOUN. 49 for any kind of antecedent, but especially when the antecedent is indefinite or a class; as, the cities that escaped destruction^ the nations that were civilised. (e)"BuT is used as a relative -wh^n it follows a negative. Its force is then = who + not ; as, there was no one hut saw him, i. e. ^who did not see him.' (f) *As' is used as a relative after such, so much, same. These words are sometimes called ^correlatives' from the fact of their inseparability. (g) The compound relatives are whoever, whosoever, &c. (ii) Reciprocal Pronouns. Each other refers to two ; one another to. more than two. In the sentence, ' They liked one another,' one is the nominative in opposition to the pronoun one — the other. In the sentences, 'They liked each other,' 'They were kind to each other,' we should interpret strictly in accordance with Grammar, * They each liked the other,' * They were kind each to the other.' § 3. Fronouns according to Structure. 1. Pronouns are divided according to structure into (i) Simple^ (ii) Derived, (iii) Compound, 2. All are of Saxon origin except one, the derivative of on^ homme, homo. 3. The primitive or simple pronouns are I, me; loe, us; thou; ye, you; he, she, it, they ; who; self. 8^" ffe, she, it, they, were not originally personal pronouns, but demonstratives, like hie and ille in Latin. 4. The derived pronouns are, Thee Him Her Them My objective form from dative fem. dative ,, dative A.-S. Thou He Heo, That possessive case ,, Me £ 60 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAQE. P i Thy Mine, thine Our, i.e. we-er Your Their Hers His Ours, yours, theirs Its (about 1640) Whom, whose What Which = who-like Such = so-like Each = one-like possessive case from possessive forms Thou My and thy We You They Her* His, he Our, your, their It objective and possessive forms Who neuter form Who I* •* $» >> 5. Compound pronouns are formed by combinations of the personalf possessive, and relative pronouns with self, own, and ever, 6. The following adverbs are derived from the pronouns He, The, Who ;— Table of Pronominal Adverbs. Proa. Gen. Form Dat. Form Ace. Form Abl. Form Comp. Form He The Who Hence Thence Whence Here There Where j Then { Than When How Thus Why Hither Thither Whither § 4. Accidents. 1. The Accidents of a pronoun are Number, Gender, Person. Case. Definition. Person is a grammatical form expressive of dis- tinctive relation, i. e. distinguishes the speaker, the hearer, and person or thing spoken of. These are called respectively the first, second, and third persons. 2. The pronoun of the third person has in the singular three ^genders, but in the plural we have only one set of forms for all genders. 3. The following is a complete declension of the | ersonal pro- nouns. V, THE PUONOUN. in md tLy lie your, tlidir e per so naif 3 He, The, rap. Form [ither liither liitlier \on. Case. of dt's- |d person )erso7is. ^r three for all lal pro- O o o o w I CO a" s 00 0) a CD a •1 -H ID l-H Ph • i-H 01 CO -. a 1-3 p.' i o 52; O CO CO ^ > o» '3 2 to a as m .a a O) V CO CO to 0> d 'i^ ^ > i^ > > I— I ^ P— I l-H CU O 0> 01 01 o o CO ^1 hi ^ ^^ ^ o o O o c c o o a o a 0) O o o CO Si 2 • S 00 0) ■S •73 B i i 1 Ji 62 ANALYSIS OF THE ENQLISII LANGUAGE. Observations. 1. T, MK. Me lj.18 notliiiig to do witli /. It lias been regarded as an inde))endent 7i07n. form. Hence tlie phrase, It is me, is less unexceptionable than it is him; for while there may be doubt about mCj there is none about him, which is an objective case. Compare however the French idiom cW moi, which is similar, and seems to warrant the use of the dative. In the verbs methinks, me- seems, melists, me is a dative form. 2. My, mink, thy, think. My, thy are used when the noun is expressed and with it. Mine and thine are used as predicates, or when the noun is understood, or when it begins with a vowel or h mute; as, 'This book is mine,' * Haat thou found me, mine enemy?' 3. Tiiou, YOU, YK. Thou is generally expressive ot familiarity or contempt, except in addressing God. You was first used as a sin- gular in the 13th century. Old English writers treated ye as a nominative and you as an accusative ; as, 'I know you not, whehce ye are.' 4. TiiKiR, YOUR, are generally used as Possessive Pronouns. Sometimes they express origin, the true meaning of the genitive; as, their terror (I Pet. iii. 16), your rejoicing (1 Cor. xv. 31). 5. Its is a word of recent introduction (about 1640) after the completion of the authorised version of the Scriptures, in which it is not found once,* and where his did duty for it; as, *If the salt have lost his savour;' 'the fruit tree yielding fruit after his kind.' 6. One derived from Fr. on (Lat. homo), is an indefinite pronoun corresponding to the German man, French on; men, people, they, are used in this general indefinite sense. 7. Any (an-iV/^add one) means any single one, an indefinite pronoun. 8. Aught, naught. These indefinite pronouns are compounded of a-whit=:a bit, and no-whitz=no bit. 9. Other, properly an A.-S. form for second, means ^ one of two. ^ * It does occur in Levit. xxv. 5, but this is said to be due to the correction of some modern printer. THE VEUB. 58 1. Definition. sentence. CHAPTER VI. THE VEBB. §1- A Vkhr Is the 2)7' hici'jHil or asserting ivord in a 2. CLASSIFICATION. VERB el aceraent of an action, or a change of state. Those of classical origin end in esce ; as, effervesce. 13. According to origin verbs are (i) Primitive. (ii) Derived, (i) Primitive Verbs are chiefly Saxon, monosyllabic, and strong. (ii) Derived Verbs are all weak. They may be divided into four classes : (a) Verbs derived from strong verbs; .is, drench, from drink. (b) Verbs derived from nouns and adjectives, by prefix or suffix en ; as, enslave, soften. (c) A erbs derived from nouns and adjectives, by change of accent; as, decent, accent; frequent, frequent; or from (d) Nouns hy change of quantity ; as, use, use; clbth^ clothe. Classes (a) (b) have been shown above to be causative. in I 1 ^,$^'^ l ^'y^*&'^t^ifc*-^^^ r"-'.:'r: -^ ":afe^ lMiiiiug ri .T-w?7^"7r;*(T 58 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. i ii'^; § 3. Conjugation. 1. Definition. The Conjugation of a verb is a connected view of its inflexions. 2. In English we have two conjugations : — (i) 0/ the weak or regular verb. (ii) Of the strong or irregular verb. 3. The Accidents of a verb are Fbice, Mood, Tense., Person, and Number. 4. In English we have no real form for the Passive Voice. * Pas- sives have grown out of Reflectives ; and, as we have no special form for reflectives, so we have no special form for passives.'' — Adams' Eng. Lang. Instead, we use tenses compounded of the perfect par- ticiple and tlie verb 'To be.' 5. Some compound tenses are formed by the various parts of the verb To have, others by the aid of the verb To he. The simple principle for this seems to be — Flave is used when the action concerns the ohject with which the participle ought to agree ; hence the verb must be transitive; as, *I have written the letter' {^Habeo epistolam scriptam^). Be is used when the action concerns the subject; hence it will be used to form the compound tenses of in- transitive, reflective, and passive verbs; as, 'He is come,' 'He is arrived.' . 6. Nevertheless, convention has established the forms — * He has come,' 'He has arrived.* Without inquiring how far these arc right or wrong, we must discriminate between the expressions by saying that in the phrases — 'He is come,' ' He is arrived, ' we refer to thd subject of tlie verb; in the phrases — -^ He has come,^ ^ He has ar- rived,^ to the fact of his coming, or of his arrival. 7. The Moons, which grammatically express the manner of an action, are four : Indicative, Imperative, Subjunctive, and Infinitive. (i) The Indicative mood asserts absolutely. (ii) The Imperatin mood commands, enjoins, exhorts, en- treats. ^\ THE VERB. 59 (iii) The Subjunctive mood expresses contingency, futurity, and genertilly dependence upon some previous verb. (iv) The Infinitive mood (or Indefinite mood) expresses the act without reference to time or agent. 8. Definition. Tknse is a grammatical form expressive of tlie time of an action. 9. Tlie Tenses are three : Present, Past, and Future, witli five modifications of each. 10. (i) Indefinite tenses refer strictly to a point of time, and to single acts or habits without regard to duration. (ii) Incomplete '•efer to the unfinishedness or imperfection of the act. (iii) Complete refer to the perfection of the act. (iv) Continuous describe relation to time. 11. (i) The present indefinite is used to express general truths, (ii) The present and past indefinite are used to express habit; as, 'She writes well.' 12. The present indefinite is used for — (i) Description of past events, to give animation to narrative; as, 'Caesar marches to the Rhine,' this is called the '■historical present.^ (\'\) A future indefinite; as, 'Duncan comes to night,' i.e. will come.* (iii) A complete future; as, 'When he .arrives he will tell you,' i. e. ^ shall Jiave arrived.' ♦ This arises from tho fact of the A.-S. verb posaessing no form for tho future. 118 i ri u IV 'ij ''I n I I ili 60 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. § 4. Active Voice. 1. The following is a Complete Conjugation of a Verb Active. TO SEND. Indicative Mood. Tense Present Past Future Iiideflnite Incomplete Complete I am sending I send I sent I shall send I was send- ing I shall be sending I have sent I had sent I shall have sent Continaona Emphatic I have been sending I had been sending I shall be sending I do send I did send I will send Presen< Past Future I send I sent I shoul d send Subjunctive Mood I be sending I were send- ing should sending ing I should be I have sent I had sent I should have sent I have been sending I liad been sending I should have been sending I do send I did send I would send Imperative Mood. Present] Future Send thou Thou shalt send send ye he shall send you shall send| they shall send Infinitive Mood. Indefinite To send Incomplete to be sending Complete to have sent Participles. I sending having sent Continaona to have been sending having been sending Gerund. To send; (for) to send: sending. 1 '■». THE VERB. ei send 2. The mode of conjugating the Indicative and Subjunctive moods differs in the following respects: — (i) The Subjunctive Mood has no inflexions; as, Indicative. . Subjunctive. {If) I send I send Thou sendest He sends We send You send They send Thou send He send We send You send They send lit^" ' Wert' is not a subjunctive form. (ii) Am, art, is, are, are changed in the subjunctive to * be ' Was is changed „ „ were Shall „ „ „ should Will „ „ „ would Hast, hath, has, are changed „ „ have 3. In conjugating the future tenses it must be remembered that shall in the first person goes with will in the second and third ; vjill in the first person goes with shall in the second and third • thus — Future Indefinite. I sJiall send Thou wilt send He will send We shall send You will send They will send Interrogatively thus — Shall I? Shalt thou ? Will he ? Future Emphatic. I will send Thou shalt send He shall send We will send You shall send They shall send Shall we ? Shall you? Will they? 4. Some grammarians have given additional forms, called Inten- tional, of the three tenses. This seems to be merely m notion bor- rowed from the Greek Paulopost future. ' I have been going to send,' is a very composite tense indeed I 5. Participles. — A participle is a verbal adjective — verbal as govern; (ig an object, if derived from a transitive verb; adjective as 1 62 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. ill ill agreeing with its substantive, and yet differing from an adjective in the following respects : — (i) It attributes action to a noun without any indication of time, therefore we speak of the participles as 'indefi- nite ' or 'imperfect,' ' complete ' or ' perfect,' and 'con- tinuous,' not as is sometimes the case, as 'present,' 'past,' &c. (ii) It expresses the same modijlcations of the action as the infinitive. G. Gerunds are verbal nouns capable of being the objects or sab- jects of sentences. The forms of the infinitive which are gerundial, are 'to hunt,' 'for to hunt,' hunting,' and 'a-hunting.' When these forms follow intransitive verbs, adjectives, or nouns, they exipress purpose or Jitness ; as, Fools who came to scoff remained to pray ;_' ' Apt to teach ;' ' A house to let ;' ' A time ^ build.* It;^" For origin, explanation, &c. vide Etym. Derivations, chap. I. § 4, 2. ■THfrmu«i.-^^5ir-?»ar::*>«ii THE VERB. 63 § 5. FasBlve Voice. 1. Subject to the remarks made in § 3, 4, the following is a tabu- lar view of the conjugation of a Verb Passive. TO BE SENT. Indicative Mood. Tense Present Past Future Indefinite I am sent I was sent I shall be sent Incomplete I am being sent I was being sent Complete Continuous Emphatic I have been sent I ,had been sent I shall have I will be been sent sent Subjunctive Mood. 4,2. m Present PaU Future I be sent I were sent I should be sent I am being sent I were being sent I have been sent I had been sent I should have been sent I would be sent Imperative Mood. Present Be senfc Be sent You shall ) ,, , „„. . They shall )■ ^'^ «^"* Infinitive Mood. Indefinite To be sent Being sent Incomplete Complete Continaoua I To have been I sent Participles. Having been sent ■ ( '"ihfirtniM *1ffiiriM^^I'i^^M^'^^^'i ]^^]|2l!!££E!^SS£*S5 G4 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. § 6. Auxiliary Verbs. )'i \> I. Definition. An auxiliary voices, moods, or tenses of other verb is one that helps to form the verbs. 2. Auxiliary Verbs are diviJetl variously. (i) Thky are divided into simple, as 'I shall;* compound^ » ' I sluill have been.' (ii) They are divided into — (a) Auxiliaries of voice ; *am,' 'be,' 'was.' (&) Auxiliaries of mood ; 'may,' 'can,' 'must.' (c) Auxiliaries of tense ; 'have,' 'will.' {d) Auxiliaries of emphasis ; 'do,' 'will,' &c. (iii) Again, Auxiliaries may be divided into — (a) Those which possess inflexional power. (&) Those which cfo no^ ; as, 'do,' 'can,' 'must,' 'let.' XW By this is meant that, in other languages, many of these auxiliaries are expressed by inflexions ; as, ' I shall write ' (' scribaw'). Others are interpreted by idiomatic phrases; as, ' I must walk * (' ambulandum est mihi; ' ' Ilfaut queje me promene'). (iv) Auxiliaries are again divided into — (r/) Those which can be used as main or principal- verbs. (h) Those which cannot be so used. In the former class are such verbs as do, have, &c. ; in the latter, must, can, may, &c. I THE VKRB. 65 Conjugation of the Verb * To Be.' TO BE. Tens>e Indnflnito Preaent Pad Future I am I was I sliall be Indioative Mood. Incomplete Complete Continuous Emphatic I have been I had been I shall have I will be been Present Pant Future I be I were I should be Subjunctive Mood. W) I have been 1 had been I should have been I would be Imperative Mood. Present Future Be thou Thou shalt be Be ye He shall be You shall be Infinitive. To be To have been *, Participles. Being Been Having been Gerund. To Be, Being. They shall be 6. The following is a list of Auxiliary and Defective verbs with such parts as are in use. JI^For their origin, &c. vide Etym. Derimtions, chap. I. § 4, 8,9. 66 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. Verbs ' I i -i I :! Havk Shall Will May Can Must Do Parts in list), &c. (Pn^sent) ' have,' (past and per- fect participle) * had.' (Past tense) 'should ;' no par- ticiples; defective, means 'to owe.' (Past tense) 'would,' (present participle)'willing,' used only as an adjective. There is a past tpnso ' willed,' with a different nieaniuff. (Past tense) 'might;' no partici- ples; means literally 'to be able;' it expresses 'liberty,' and ' permission,' also ' possi- bility. ' When before its sub- ject it expresses a wish. (Past tense) 'could,' (participle) 'cunning;' now used as an adjective. The verb literally means 'to know.' (Present) 'must,' (past) 'must;' in: ])articiples. This verb is a strong form of * may.' (Present) ' do,' (past indicative) 'did,' (participles) ' done. ' doing, Hoiiiiuka Conjugated after proper form in all tenses. From partici- ple 'hav'd,' comes 'haft,' — Ilorne Tooke. The present and past tenses only in use. The present and past tenses only in use. ([[^"The main difference be- tween ' shall ' and ' will ' is this:— ' Shall ' expresses ' the idea of the future, depending upon what is external :' 'Wiirexpresses*thei(?eao/the future depending upon what is internal, i.e. 'volition.' These tenses only in use. The present and past tenses only in use. The past tense ' could,' properly ' c o u d,' or 'couth,' is formed by a false analogy like ' should,' ' would.' !!;:^The difference between ' may' and ' can ' is this: — ' May ' expresses ' the idea of p(?icer,depending upon what is external :' ' Can ' expresses the * idea of power, depending upon what is internal,' i.e. ' resolve.' These parts only in use. Conjugated after proper form. There are two verbs 'do,' between which it is neces- sary to distinguish: (i) Active, with the meaning ' to make. ' (ii) Neuter, wit'i the meaning '-^ THE VERH. 07 Verbs PartH ill use, Ac. Dauk Owe Mare Go WiTE WiLNE Quoth Worth List 1 (PrcHf^nt) 'dare,' (past indica- tive^ 'durst,' (imperfect par- ticiple) ' daring,' used as an adjective, (perfect participle) •durst.' (Present) 'owe,' (past) 'ought,' (imperfect participle) 'owing,' used as an adj«'ctive, (perfect participle) 'ought.' Origi- nally moans ' to have.' (Present indicative) 'make,' (past indicative) ' made,' (im- perfect participle) 'making,' (perfect artici pie) 'made.* (Present ib native) 'go,' (past indicative) 'went,' (imper- fect participle) ' going,' (per- fect) ' gone.' (Infinitive) 'to wit,' i.e. 'to know,' (second singular indic- ative present) ' wist,' (past) 'wot,' (participle) 'witting,' used as an adjective. Meaning ' to desire,' is a deriv- ative from • will.' Used only in the third person. Found only in the third person singular; means, 'to be,' 'to become.' Only used in third singular, ])ersonal and impersonal: as, ' me lists,' ' it listeth;' means, ' to please.' Komtirk8 'to avail,' 'to thrive.' Hoth are found in the idiom, ' IIow do you do ?' i.e. 'How make you youTAoU to thiivef The form ' did ' is said to be an instance of r(Mluplication. Conjugated after j)roper form. Used only in these tenses, though it may bo conjuga- ted after proper form. It has the meaning also of ' to be due;' hence the imper- sonal 'him ought,' 'us ought.' Tho word 'own' may be supposed originally a participle of this verb; and the word ' odd * a cor- ruption of another partici- ple 'ow'd.' An irregular verb, conjugated after proper form. An instance of a defective verb, borrowing its past tense from the verb ' to wend.' Conjugated after pro])er form. Obsolete. Obsolete. Derived from ' quod.' Hence the verbs 'quote,' 'be- queath.' 'Quoth' always precedes its nominative. Obsolete. An obsolete verb, same root comes From the lust.' r IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 I.I U£|28 |2^ *ii lii 12.2 12.0 ■ 40 11.25 il.4 11.6 ^^ 7. Photographic Sciences Corporation 33 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. USSO (716) •72-4503 '^ o^ ^ 68 ANALYSIS OF THE ENQLISU LANGUAGE. § 7. Oeneral Remarks. 1. Grammars differ very widely as to the structure of tlie English verb. Some following a classical model present us with a mere translation of the Latin or Greek verb. Others rush to the opposite extreme, and forgetting that English is not Anglo-Saxon, conjugate the verb as if the reverse were the case. The principle which ought to guide us lies between the two extremes. Our language is com- posite, and derived /rom Norman-French as well &a/roin A.-Saocon, It seems only reasonable to consider both these elements in our calculation. Hence, in addition to the simple tenses, only those formed by the auxiliaries * have ' and ' be ' ought to be admitted. 2. At first sight an exception seems to meet us in the use of 'shall ' and ' will.' This is more apparent than real. The future tense in Latin, French, and English also, is not a simple tense, but one com- pounded of the verb to /tave and the infinitive mood. Thus (Lat.) amabo= amare habeo= French, j'aimerai, i.e. j'ai-aimer=I have to love, t. e. I shall love. Now shall originally means to owey and owe (from Goth, 'aigan') mean.'i to have or Jwld ; hence, 'I shall love * is exactly like the corresponding tense in Lat. or French, and means / have to love. 3. Exception also may be taken to the emphatic forma^ as intro- ducing another auxiliary, ^do.^ The fact is, we have an em.phatic future *willf^ and thus we are led to ask. Why not an empliatic past and an emphatic present ? Rigidly ^ ofcourse^ they should he excluded^ if the principle above laid dovm be adopted. Otherwise there will be no limit to the number of possible tenses ; and all our auxiliary verbs ought to be enlisted in the conjugation of a single verb. * Paulopoat future ' forms have been given by some grammarians,* and, besides the indicative and subjunctive moods which we certainly possess, we are sometimes favoured with -a potential mood (where wo * Wo might as reasonnbly expect to find in the conjugation of a French verb the *Unset,^ 'jo vais 6crlre,' 'je viens d'6crire' I i THE VERB. 69 get it from is a mystery). Why not an optative mood — a permissive mood — a compulsory mood ? 4. Strong verbs have a tendency to become weak. "Where the strong and weak forms coexist, the verb is in a state of transition. As we have remarked, ' all derived verbs take the weaK torm ; ' so also do new verbs, and verbs derived from classical origin 5. The present tendency of the language is to reject the distincuun of the subjunctive mood. Some grammarians assert, facts noiwith' standing, that we have no subjunctive mood ! I i ^. 70 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. CHAPTER VII. THE ADYEBB. §•• 1. Definition. 'An Adverb is a word joined to a verb, or any attributive, to denote some modification, degree, or circumstance of the expressed attribute.' 2. CLASSIFICATION. -Primitive bo — Origin . — Derived -Compound -Time . 00 00 P4 —Meaning en o < -Place Quantity or Degree -Quality -Periodal . (when ?) now, then, presently -Continuous (now long ?) always, ever, aye -Repetitive . (how often ?) once, twice, weekly, &c. •-Relative . (how soon ?) then, meanwhile, afterwards —Positional . (where?) here, there, above, below, &c. -Amotional . (whence?) hence.thence.'vway -Admotional (whither?) hither, thither, aloft, down ■ -Ordinal . (whereabouts ?) firstly, lastly, &c. ^-Positive . ^ how, ever so, &c. -Expletive . « g'^^ much, too, very great- S=§g ly, &c. -Adequate . « | S a exactly , enough ,equal- 1=^11 ly, &c. -Defective . g^Kpq little, less, hardly, al- ** most -Modal . (how?) well, ill, thus, name- ly, &c. -Inferential . therefore, wherefore,&c. -Catee-orical i a^rmative ) yes, no, verily, -categorical | negative \ &c. -Contingent . perhaps, possibly, &c. — Connection i -Conjunctional Simply attributive THE ADVERB. 71 § 2. Adverb according to Meaning. 1 . Adverbs are classified according to (i) Meaning ; (ii) ConneC' tion; (iii) Structure or Origin. 2. Adverbs according to meaning express (i) Time; (ii) Place; (iii) Degree or Quantity; (iv) Quality. 3. Adverbs of Time are those which answer the qtiestions, (i) when f (periodal), i. e. a fixed point of time^ past, pre- sent, future, indefinite. (ii) liow long ? (continuous), the duration of time ; as, always^ ever, never. (iii) how often? (repetitive), the repetition of time; as, once, twice, often. (iv) how soon f (relative), to some other event ; as, then, mean- while, before, &c. 4. Adverbs of Place are those which answer to the questions, (i) where? (positional), rest in or at a place; as, here, there, above, &c. (ii) whsnce ? (amotional), motion from a place ; as hence, thence, aiuay, &c. (iii) whither? (adnjotional), motion to a place; as, hither, thither, down, ike. (iv) whereabouts? (ordinal), in what order; B.a firstly, lastly, &c. 6. Adverbs of Degree or Quantity are those which answer to the questions how much? how little? or to the idea of more or less. These adverbs express degree without comparison (positive) ; as, however, so. or, „ abundance (expletive) ; as, much, too, very. tf »> sufficiency (adequate) ; as, enough, equally, exactly. )i „ deficiency (defective) ; as, less, hardly, &c. 6. Adverbs of Quality answer the question how? or express affirmation, negation, uncertainty. n ANALYSIS OP THE ENaLISH LANGUAGE. 7. Adverbs that relate to time, place, and manner are gene- rally coniiected with verba or participles. Adverbs that relate to degree with adjectives or adverbs. § 3. Adverb according to Connection and Btructore. 1. Adverbs according to their Connection are (i) simplt/ attribu- tive, i. e. qualify verbs, adjectives, and o^Aer adverbs; or, in addition to this, (ii) have a conjunctional force. The latter connect clauses ; they are often adverbs of cause; as, why, wherefore: relative forms, as, where, when: pronominal compound adverbs j as, wlierewithf hereafter, &c. than, so, as, 2. Adverbs according to Structure are simple, derived, compound. (i) Simple Adverbs are monosyllabic and Saxon ; such as, now, oft, aye, ill, well, (ii) Adverbs are derived, (a) From nouns: — old genitives ; as, needs, unawares, eftsoons, once, twice, thrice, &c. old datives; as, seldom, whilom. by suffix ling ; as, darkling, with diminutive force, by four prefixes, a, al, be, to, a as aboard, (d „ always, be „ besides. to »» to-day. (b) from adjectives and nouns : — by four suffixes, ly, wise, ways, wards. ly as lively, wise „ likewise, ways „ sideways. * wards ,, homewards. (c) from the pronouns he. the, who. THE ADVERB. 73 Go iiive Form D:ltiV0 Form , Aocii'^iitive Form AMutivo Form Compariitive borm From IIo M The „ Who lience thence whence here there where then, or than when how thus why hither thither whitlier (iii) Many Adverbs are compoutid words and phrases; as, peradventurCy of course^ nevertJieless. § 4. Comparison of Adverbs, &c. 1. In Anglo-Saxon there were two forms for the comparative and superlative degrees, one in re and este; tlie other in or and ost respectively. Now the first of these was tiie form taken by adjec- tives ; as, se scearpe sweord, se scearjjeste sweord ; t/te sharper sword f the sharpest »word. The second, on the other hand, was taken by adverbs; as, se sweord scyr^ scearpor or scearpost, i. e. the sword cuts sJtarper or sharpest. — LatJtam, vol. ii. p. 184. 2. These Jidverbial comparative and superlative endings in or and ost have disappeared, except in such words as hind-m-ost up-nv-ost* he. 3. When the adverb ends in Zy, the comparison is formed by more and most. 4. 1^** To explain certain phrases as, clean gone, to stick fast, lo'ud and long, fie rode hard, you did right, sore let and himlered, &c. In the Classic languages and in Anglo-Saxon the neuter adjective is used in the accusative adverbiallv. In Anglo-Saxon and Old English the adverb was oflen formed from the adjective by adding e; as, seft or soft (adjective), sefte or softe (adverb). The adjective was really the nominative or accu- sative case; the adverb in e, the ablative. T!ie two forms were easily confounded, especially when case endings were dropped. The words above, clean, fast, hard, right, loud, long, sore, &c., are in- stances of this confusion. 5. 'In many cases the adjective form is intended to express the * Soe p. 42. 10. I ; t !: f( 74 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANQUAQE. quality of the agent as seen in the act rather than the quahiy of the act itself. After verbs of being or seeming, for instance, or their equivalents, the adjective is constantly used ;* as, it looks beauti/ulf it sounds grand^ it feels hard, he arrived late, Iiow sweet it sleeps, &c.' — Angus, Handbook E. Tongue, p. 231. * It will be seen hereafter thnt a mle has been laid down: * Tran^Hvt rerbs take the adverb ; Intransitive verba, the acUective.* For exptaaation of the meaning and deriTattoa of adverbs, vide ^ym. Dthi9. eliup. ly. I THE rilEFOSlTION, 75 CHAPTER VIII. THE PBEFOBITIOir. §1- 1 . Definition. A pbeposition is a word connecting other worthy and expressing a relation between them. , ♦Prepositions relate notions to one another; conjtinctions sen- tences.' — Morell. 2. CLASSIFICATION. —Simple — Structure — —Compound B ^ —Verbal 1 o •8 — Position • pj Ai O 1 —Time • ' — Meaning 0) —Cause, Instrumentality, Agency 1 — Degree —Direction n ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. (f ' I h § 2. Preposition according to Meaning and Structure. 1. Prepositions are divided according to their meaning and nccording to their structure. 2. Prepositions according to their meaning. The relations which prepositions express are not easily classified. If we use Ihe terms in a metaphorical as well as a natural sense^ they may be possibly embraced by the division we have given; viz. position, time, cause, degree, and direction. 3. Prepositions according to their structure are divided into — (i) Simple ; monosyllabic ; such as, in, with, from, by, &c. (ii) Compound; such as, betweer., among, beside, &c. (iii) Verbal; such as, notwithstanding, pending, during, &c. 4. The Jii'st two classes are Anglo-Saxon, the third class is Classical: ihe j^rejiositions in this class are really participles, and with the words they govern ouglit to be interpreted as absolute constructions to which in other languages they are equivalent. 5. The following is a list of the Prepositions : — (i) Simple. At, by, down, ere, for, from, in, midat, of, off, on, out, round, through, to, up, with, since, till. (ii) Compound. About, above, across, aboard, after, against, along, amidsi, among, around, athwart, before, behind, below, beneath, beside or besides, between, betwixt, beyond, over, throughout, toward(8), under(neath), until, unto, into, upon, within, without. (iii) Verbal. Concerning, during, except(ing), notwithstand- ing, pending, regarding, respecting, save, touching. For explanation of the above, vide Etym. Deriv. chap. III. E. TUB CONJUNCTION. 77 Itructure. meaning and 'lie relations f we use the hey may be iriz. position, ided into — m, iy, &c. &c. uring, &c. uV(i c/a55 is 'ticfples, and as absolute ralent. Idat, of, off, till. ter, against, ore, behind, m, betwixt, ieath), until, )twithstand- ching. hap. III. ■O 'A If CHAPTER IX. THE CONJUNCTION. § •• 1. Deflnition. A Conjunction is a word connecting clauses or sentences. Where conjunctions seem to connect words it is been use of some ellipsis or abbreviation ; thus, He is good and wise = He is good and (he is) wise. 2. CLASSIFICATION. -Structure \ -Denv«d -Simple, such as but, if. or Denvud ,, nor, eitbei Compound I, althougli, bowb|)it / — OIIU } -Der <-Con nor, eitber. tban 55 O H O o -Meaning -Co-ordinate * ^-Copulative, as and, also -Negative ,, neitber, nor -Alternative ,, eitber, or -Adversative „ but, yet, still '--Illative M tbcrefurc, because i-Time . -Subordinate (refer to) -Plnce -Periodal, as as, as soon as, now that -Continuous ,, as long as, asj wbilst -Repetitive . ,, as oft as -llelatioual. ,, whenever, when # -Popitional . „ where, there •J -Ad motional ,, whither, thither * -Amotiunal . ,, whence, thence Manner or Degree -Modal . . ,, as, how. so -Positive . „ as-as -Comparative,, than, not, so as 00 -''ause 9 c? ^-Condition -Purpose -Reason . p. -Result ,, if.provided. except ,, that, in order that ,, inasmuch as, be- cause ,, although, and so 78 ANALYHIH OF THE KNOLISII LANGUAQE. h f li \ ii V § 2. Conjunction according to Meaning. 1. Conjunctions nro divided according to mmning^ and according to structure. 2. According to meaning, Conjunctions are co-ordinatk and SUnORDINATK. (i) Co-ORDINATK CONJUNCTIONS iinite Coordinate (or equipol- lent) statements, or join in construction co lid according DiNATK and ' (oreqnipol- cu*urdinnte 8 in such li )()Iication of I classes : (i) i dversative ; ind complex, d verbs into ly with the it IS com- ectivo jssive tional ential tive native rsative Minect both 7. DiSiUNOTivB Conjunctions are those whicli, while they conned the clause, disconnect the sense or meaning. 8. CoBRELATiVE CONJUNCTIONS are those which are used in pairs, so that one refers or answers to the other. (i) The Copulative conjunctions are; — and, as, both, becau.se, even, for, if, that, then, since, seeing, so, but. (ii) The Disjunctive conjunctions are ; — or, nor, either, neither, than, though, although, yet, but, except, whether, lest, unless, save, provided, notwithstanding, whereas. (iii) The Correlative conjunctions are; — As — as As — so Both — and Either — or 9. Of the above we have Connective or additive Concessive Conditional Inferential (i) cause Neither — nor So — as Though — yet Whether — or. — And, also, but, both. — Though, although, albeit, yet. — If, provided that, unless. — For, that, because, aince, whereas. (ii) consequence — Therefore, wherefore, then. Negative — Neither, nor. Alternative — Either, or. Adversative — But, however, notwithstanding, yet. § 3. Conjnnction according to Strncture. 1. Conjunctions according to structure are divided into (i) Simple ; (ii) Derived ; (iii) Compound. (i) The Simple conjunctions are Saxon and monosyllabic ; such as andy if, so, but, eke. (ii) The Derived conjunctions whether, since, seeing exc are such as nor, neither, than, ept, Sic. mill 80 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. (iii) Compound conjunctiuns are made up of two or more words; as, howheit, in as for as, inasmuch as, forasmuch as, nevertheless, whereas, although, &c. § 4. General Eemarks. 1. Several luords are used as adverbs, conjunctions, and prepo- sitions according to circumstances. The word hut, for instance, is used as a relative, a preposition, a conjunction, an adverb. (i) But, &. relative ^vi\iO + wot, and follows a negative; as, ' there was no one hut saw him ' = ' who did not see him.' . (ii) But, a conjunction = and ; as, * we ran hut he stopped,* i. e. we ran and he stopped : it has also an adversative force, (iii) But, a preposition = except; as, 'all fled hut John,* i. e. except John, (iv) But an adverb = only, and is placed next the verb; as, ' If he could hut know,' i. e. only know. 2. So after is an adjective ; as, * The after-part of a ship ' an adverb ; as, '^hey that come after.' li preposition ; as, 'After me the Deluge.' a conjunction ; as, *He called two days after I saw you.' 8. Tlien, with its double form then and than, is both a conjunction and adverb. For, a conjunction and preposition. Except, a preposition and conjunction. 4. When these words, which are used as prepositiond and c&n- jwnctions, are followed by that, they are best regarded as jJrepositionSy otherwise as conjunctions ; as, 'Before that certain came from James,' &c. 'After that I was turned, I repented.' — Jer. xxxi. 19. 'Since that I haVe told you.' 5. The ADVERB may generally he known by the fact of its being movable to any ^jar< of the sentence in which it occurs ; as, ' He THE CONJUNCTION. 81 v'o or more , forasmuch and prepo- instance, is ?gative ; as, did not "see he stopped,* adversative I John,' i. e. B verb ; as, hip' 5.' after I saw conjunction T'^ ''X I then altered his intention.' ' Then he altered his intention.' ' He altered his intention then,* When an adverb qualifies an adjec- tive^ or other adverb^ it is not movable ; but then its connection dis- covers it. 6. Prepositions are always attached to a noun, and cannot be re- moved from one part of the sentence to another without the noun to which they belong. 7. We have said, if the word is movable to any other part of the sentence it is an adverb. If it cannot be moved from the beginning without destroying the sense, it must be a Conjunction. 1^" 8. The Interjection has been defined to be a word expressing feeling and not thought. 'Almost all animals have some peculiar sound to express any sudden feeling they experience. The inter- jection is such a, sound as employed by man.' — Morell. It is speech which distinguishes man. Speech is the expression of thought, and, as interjections are not the expressions of thought, they are not properly classed as 9. part of speech. For explanation, derivation, &c. of the Conjunctions, vide Etym, Deriv. chap. II. yrio and cori- jJreposi lions. H k\. 19. of its being rs; as, 'He SYNTAX. i CHAPTKU I. PBOPOSITION ACGOBPINO TO LOGIC. 1. TiiERK are two ambiguous terms in general use: Proposition and Predicate. These terms are borrowed from logic, but in gram- mar they possess a different meaning. First, we shall explain the logical signification of these words, and then investigate their gram- matical import. 2. There are three mental operations, (i) Simple apprehension or conception, the expression of which in language is called a Term; (ii) Judgment, i. e. the comparison of two conceptions, and pronouncing upon their agreement or disagreement, the expression of which in language is called a Proposition; (iii) Reasoning, i. e. the comparison of two judgments and pronouncing upon their agree- ment or disagreement by means of a third, the expression of whicii in language is called a Syllogism. 3. A Proposition, then, is defined to be a. judgment expressed in words ; or, an indicative sentence (oratio indicativa). 4. Every Proposition is divided into three parts — subject, copula, predicate. (i) The subject is that of which something else is asserted. (ii) The predicate is that which is asserted of the subject. (iii) The copula expresses the agreement of subject and predi- cate ; hence tlie copula is affirmative, or negative — is, or, is not, &c. Thus, in the proposition. Sub. The Romans Cop. I Fred, are | brave,* Rouians=subject; are=copula; braver predicate. SYNTAX. 83 Sab. I Cop. * He walks,' i. e. ' He is lent expressed in —subject, copula. Pred. walkine.' ' Tliis author contradicts your assertion.' Sob. I Cop. This author is Pred. contradicting your assertion.' 5. Terms are so called because they are subjects or predicaU's, \. e. 'termini propositionis,' or 'extremes of a proposition.' Thfy are now generally used for words limited to a particular signification. 6. The subject may be (i) a noun, with or without adjuncts ; (ii) an infinitive mood; (iii) a setiience, 7. The predicate may be an adjective; (ii) a noun; (iii) an infinitive mood; (iv) a sentence, 8. There are many ways of considering the relation of subject and vredicate. The simplest method is, perhaps, to consider the predi- ''te as a whole, and the subject 9a a part. Thus, in the proposition, * All men are animals,' we imply that (the subject) 'men' is a part of the class 'anim.il' (predicate). 9. Propositions are divided according to their substance, quality, and quantity. The Sdbstance of a Proposition is the nature of its asser- tion. If we assert absolutely, i. e. without a condition, ihe proposition is called categorical ; if, with a condition, hypo- thetical; as, * Books I are [ instructive ' (categorical). * If books are instructive, they are useful ' (hypothetical). N. B. — AU hypotheticals may be reduced to eatcgoricals, by changing if, &c. into the ease of, as in the latter example : — Subject I Predicate ' The case of books-being-instructive is a case of their-being- I useful.' 10. The Quality of a proportion is the character of itJi asser- tion. This character is twofold; (i) essential; (ii) accidental. The g2 84 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANCiUAGE. !l il if! I I If I essential character is it8 heing affirmative or negative. The acct» dental character is its being true or false. 11. A TERM is said in logic to be distributed * when it is taken for all and each of the things signified by it ;' as, when we say, *All men are mortaV Here men is said to be distributed, for we predi- cate I .ortality of the whole class — maa, and of every individual com- posing it. 12. By the Quantity of a Proposition we mean the extent of its distribution. According to this division propositions are either universal^ particular^ singular^ or indefinite. Of these four kinds of propositions, singulars are regarded as UNiVERSALS, and indefinites are either unitersals or particu- lars, according to their matter^ i. e. the nature of the connection of the extremes. This matter is of three kinds — necessary^ impossible^ contingent. If the matter be necessary or impossible^ the proposition will be universal ; if contingent, particular ; as, * Snow is white ' (necessary), i. e. * All snow is white.' * Apples are ripe ' (contingent), i. e. * Some apples are ripe.* 13. Hence all propositions can be reduced to four kinds: — 1. All X is y, universal affirmative (A). 2. No X is y, universal negative (E). 8. Some X is y, particular affirmative (I). 4. Some X is not y, particular negative (0). 14. These four kinds of proposition are symbolised in logic by the letters A, E, /, 0. 15. A distributes its subject; J57 distributes both subject and p7'e- dicate ; I distributes neither; distributes the predicate. This is easily remembered by the rule : — Uhiversals distribute their subjects. Negatives „ ^ „ predicates. 1 6. The following diagrams will simply illustrate the meaning of this with reference to what has been S-iid about ilu; relation between subject and predicate : — SYNTAX. 85 X Y A. All men are animals, i. e. the whole class man i.s a ^)ar< o/* i i 111! If m\ >ii i| II It is evident that the noun sentence answers the question, whatf thus, in this instance, Nonn sentence. * What is not known?' Ans. 'Where Moses was buried.' ' After negative verbs, but that is sometimes used. (ii) The adjective sentence being equivalent to an ailjective^ may qualify any noun in the principal sentence. An adjective sentence is introduced by the relative pronouns, who, which, that, or by any equivalent to the relative, such aa hoWj why, when, wherefore, wherein, whither, (iii) Adverbial sentences are extensions or qualifications of the predicate, and answer the questions, when ? whither f 'u/hencef where? why? how? what for? owing to what? what of ? with what? in what degree? how often? how long ? 8. Compound Sentences consist of co-ordinate members or clauses, which are of four kinds, and aft known by the conjunctions which connect them. . - (i) Conjunctive, or copaUttive, connected by (ii) Disjunctive or negative »$ (iii) Adversative (iv) Illative >* (And, also, liketoise, aa j well as, however, further, further- more, both, and, also, not only, but. {Either, or; Neither, nor; Othertoise, else. 'But, on the oth^r Juind, only, nevertheless, however, notwith- standing, on the one h^nd, on the other liand, yet, still. f T/ierefore, thereupon, I wherefore, accord- f, -{ ingly, consequently, Jience, whence, than, so far. SYNTAX. CIIAFTER III. PAB8IN0. 1. Parsing a sentence, or a word, is an explanation of the sentence or word per se^ and relatively. It consists of ' (i) An analysis of the sentence. (ii) An explanation of each word, ^ersc; and in its relations to other words. '2. In analysing a simple sentence we select, (i) the subject ; (ii) the predicate; (iii) the complement of the predicate, if any; (iv) the extension of the predicate, it any; thus: • AflBicted with many troubles he forgave him readily.' Subject Predicate Complement of Predicate Extension of Predica»e He, Afflicted with many troubles forgave liim readily 3. 'In analysing a complex sentence mark the principal subject and predicate, and arrange under each the subordinate sentences which modify or enlarge them.' Ex. 1. ' Rain fertilises those fields which spread their bounty to God's creatures.' Principal sentence, (a) Subject . . . Rain (1>) Principal Predicate fertilises (t) Object . . . those fields' ((]) Extension of Predicate Adjective sentence to (b\ (i) SuiJtJECT . . %nhich (ii) Sub. -Predicate spread (iii) COMP. OP PuED. their bounty to God's creatures. Ex. 2. * Can the husbandman look forward with confidence to 90 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. I \ I : the increase, who has the promise of God that seed time and harvest shall not fail ? ' Prinoipal sentenee. Acyeotive lentenoe to (a). (a) Subject, The husband- i «2 c 2, 2 a bfio OQ fl iC 55 e o ««-i 3 el a I £3 OS 0) g od cr a 2 OS ^ o -s a o OS lat is evil.' ride Morell's > O 0) d -Si a a .3 >;' OS o a d o c^oa.ti - a bo- 9 03 4J I— I 3?<1 boo bo- 08 a p bo P i to cj '"^ o r* ^^ '■^ -i^ *^ '" +* 0) CO a o 5 g >t§ o O OS ,£3 bo C Pi to -. o > 1^ V $ a £ fe ^ (S 5 - ^ 00 « .5' •♦I 03 .. '-^ oi bo*,"* f^" I as bo bo <1 B o bo- • F* Cl-^ bo® <1 d o 0. H a «M O x> u > 03 -d a o CO a 03 oo > fl) "l-l g S ^ ■« 'd - ^ ^-' (13 -'^ fe.« c ^ •5 o d ® 2 S S bo ® ^ w-d >< 'd o *^ d (d v 'd o a) .-d © ^ ■M "d d «d « •d •♦J d dX) CO '21 ■^ © ^bO o d d d g d o © »-l c d O bo 5 ^ o © hi -tJ P-d 2- 5 B bO' CO o °3 d ©•X3 " o P4 lij d d ^a o d hi •d d d CO © d d § © CO ** d © © 'd p.§ bo.S g o'd . » « B-n fe-g-d 'd-S.S •^ to •1-1 .•> CO hi CLi'd ^ d *^ ® bo3. •r-< hi 1^ © s-a © hi o A-' H .^a © d •d bo hi © > © © hi d d © i- h< « 2 S? o o © d hi 7 03 if CO © 92 ANALYSIS OP THE ENQLISII LANGUAGE. CHAPTER IV. GENERAL LAWS OF SYNTAX. 1. Definition. Concord is the agreement of one word with another in gender, number, cftse, or person. 2. Government is the power one word has to regulate anotlier, 3. The fundamental laws of Syntax are Jive. (a) * The verb must agree witli its subject in number and person.* (b) ' Active verbs and prepositions take nouns or their eqiiivft' lents after tliem as their object.^ (c) * Evefy adjectivey or word so used, qualifies a noun ex- pressed or understood.' (d) * Adverbs modify the meaning of words v.lnch convey idea of action or attribute, but not existence.* (e) * Copulative and disjunctive jmrticles unite together no- tions and assertions which hold the same relation to any given sentence.* — Morell. CHAPTER V. SPECIAL BULES. 1. There are three Concords. • 1. The concord of verb and its subject, 8. The concord of adjective and noun. 8. The concord of relative and antecedent. 2. The verb agrees with its subject in vumher and person ; as, * The man speaks ;* ' They speak to him,' SYNTAX. noun ex- 3. If two or more notninatlves be connected coiijunctivelt/, the verb is [lut in llie plural; as, 'Andrew Jind he were sclioolfellovvs.' l^' Except thene nominatives refer to the same suhjeet, when the vorb in in the singular; as, ' Flesh and blood hath not revealed tu thuu. > 4. If two or rnorc singular nominatives be connected disjunc- tively, tlie verb is put in the singular; as, *Neitljer the man nor his wife was summoned.' 5. If one of the nominatives be in the plural, it must be placed next tlie verb, wliioh must also be in the plural; as, 'Neither the Emperor nor his generals were convinced.' 0. If the nominatives connected by or, or nor, be of different persons, the verb agrees with the nearest; as, 'Neither you nor I am concerned.* Since all nominatives that require different forms of tlie verb virtually produce separate clauses or ])ropo.sition8, it is better to complete the concord by expressing the verb or its auxiliary iu connection with each of them; as, • Either iAoM ari to blame, or /am.' 7. When two nominatives are connected, the one affirmative, the other negative, they make two propositions, and the verb agrees with tlie affirmative; as, • *Not a loud voice, but strong proofs, bring conviction.' 8. When two nominatives are connected by as well as, or but, they belong to diflFerent propositions ; as, 'Veracity, as well as justice, is to be our rule.' 9. * A collective noun (in which the idea of unity is prominent) tfikes the verb in the singular; as, 'The mob was riotouc' •Tho reanon for this seems very naturnl. Collective nouns have plurals; thuf, we suy tnob, mobs; crowd, crowds; army, armies, Ac. Therefore being singulars, as it were, they require the verb in the singular. Nouns of multitude, on the other hand, have no plural forms, because they 94 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 10. A noun of multitude (in which the idea of plurality is promi- nent) takes the verb in the plural; as, 'The nobihty were alarmed.' 11. Substantive verbs; passive verbs of calling^ naming; the verbs to seem, to appear j to grow, to look, to become; certain reflective verbs, and passive factitive verbs, take the same case after them a* before them; and these cases may be considered cases in apposition; as, * Welhngton was a general.' B^" The verb in such cases may agree either with the nominative before it or behind it. " 12. Tlie absolute construction, which is ablative in Latin, genitive in Greek, was dative in Anglo—Saxon and Early English, and is now nominative: thus we say, 'He alone excepted,' where formerly we should have said, ' Him alone excepted.' § 2. The Genitive or Possessive Case. Vide chap. III. § 6, 10, p. 34. 1. The Possessive case ('«) precedes the noun on which it depends; as, 'John's horse;' otherwise the noun refers to one o/ many ; as, 'The horse of John's,' i.e. 'Of John's horses.' 2. When tivo genitives are in apposition, the apostrophe is used with only one of them (the principal noun) ; as, * A book of Virgil's, the Roman poet.' 3. Several genitive relations expressed by of are appended to adjectives, such as mindful, desirous, certain, guilty, conscious, inno- cent, fearful, &c., to complete the sense. In Anglo-Saxon these adjectives governed a genitive. (Compare the Lat. rules.) 4. Certain verbs, also expressing accusation, acquittal, sham^, repent- ance, deprivation, emptying, &c., admit the same construction. 5. Vide § 5 note, with reference to the adjectives, worth, old, high, long, broad, &c. involve the notion « ^^ In such expressions as * two and two are four,' and has the force of with, and is prepositional. 2. If governs both the indicative and subjunctive. With the for- mer it means since; with the latter, supposing that. To ascertain the proper mood of the verb, insert immediately after the conjunc- tion one of the two following phrases : — (i) ^Asis tJie case f (ii) '■As may be the case.* When (i) is required, the verb should be in the indicative mood; when (ii) satisfies the expression, the verb must be in the subjunc- tive mood; as, *If (as is the case) he is gone, I must follow him.' *If (as may be the case) he be gone,»I must follow him.' 3. Although, though, also govern the indicative and subjunctive. 4.* Conjunctions that are intended to express uncertainty, whether of condition (if, unless, as, though), of concession (tfiough, however), of purpose {in order that, lest) ; or of time, place, manner (wherever, whenever, until), govern the subjunctive ; as, 'Though He slay me, yet will I trust in Him.' — A. * See §9, 4. SYNTAX. 106 are some- 5. Than is a conjunction^ and takes the same case (ejusdem ge« neris) after it as be/ore it. 6. When conjunctions are used to connect clauses, eacli clause m\i8t moke complete grammatical sense ; as, *He was more beloved (add, than), but not so much admired, as Cinthio.' 7. OeneraUy, prepositions stand before the words they govern. They never stand before the relative Uhat'; when the sentence is interrogative, or the relative is omitted, they are placed after the verb; as, 'What did he do it for?' 8. The word or phrase which belongs to the governed word should always be so placed that the connection may be clear; as, 'Errors are committed by the most distinguished writers [with respect to shall and will ']. This should be written thus : — 'Errors with respect to shall and will are committed,' &c. |I|^"For Prepositional Constructions, see Hiley's English Orammar. 9. Adverbs qualify verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs. When they stand alone, as, yes, no, certainly, they stand for a whole sen- tence. Sometimes they seem to qualify prepositions, nouns, or words belonging to other parts of speech ; as, * I hear the far-oS curfew bell ! ' — Milton. 10. In Anglo— Saxon, and in Greek and French, two negatives strengthen the negation. In English and Latin they destroy one another. 1 1. Ever ana never are otten confounded. Never is an adverb of time; as, ^Seldom or never has such misfortune happened, Uver'xs an adverb both of time and degree; as, '■Ever witii thee,' ^ Ever so good.' 'Charm he ever so wisely ' is better than 'never so wisely,' though this last is admissible. lOG ANALVeiS OF THE ENQLISH LANGUAGE. If" ! »tf« 12. When tlje word not comes between an indicative^ imperative, or subjunctive mood, and an wjinitive verb^ it is uhuoat always taken * witli the word it follows. 13. From the time of Wycliffe to the time of Sir Thomas More, tnero was a minute distinction between yea, nay, and yes, no. Yea and nay answered affirmative questions ; as, ♦Will become?' Ans. ' Yea,' or ' Nay.' Yes and no answered negative questions ; as, ♦ Will he not come? ' Answ. * Yes,' or ^ No.' CHAPTER VI. FIGTJBES OF SPEECH. 1. Definition. Fiqurks of Speech are peculiar forms of ex- pression — recognised deviations from the ordinary forms, grammat- ical constructions, and literal meanings n words and phrases. 2. According to this definitiou we ought to divide Figures of Speech into Figures of Orthography, Figures of Syntax, and Figures of Rhetoric. For general purposes it will be better to consider the last two divisions as one, so as to have but two classes, (i) Gram- matical or Etymological Figures; (ii) Figures of Speech. 3. Etymological Figures are modes wherebj words undergo change, especially in process of formation or derivation. 4. These Figures are — (i) Syncope, whereby a word is abbreviated; as, lord for hlaford. (ii) Metathesis, whereby letters in the same word are inter- changed ; as, nostrils for nose-thirles ; brunt, for. burnt; brid for bird. SYNTAX. 107 5. Three are Additivk:— (i) Prothesis^ wliereby a letter or syllable is added to the beginning of a word; as, espy for spy. (ii) Epenthcsis, whereby tlie insertion of a letter or letters, or a syllable, is made in the middle of a word; as, far- th-er for far-rer. (iii) Paragoge, whereby an addiMon of a letter or le*, ers is made to the end of a word ; as, soun-d from son. 6. Three are Subtbactive : — 1. AphoerestSf whereby a letter or syllable is taken from the beginning of a word ; as, uncle from av-uncle. 8. Elision, whereby a withdrawal is made from the middle of a word ; as, muster from mo-n-strare. 8. Apocope, whereby a letter or syllable is taken from the end of a word ; as, sue from suivre. 7. Pig ures of Speech are peculiar forms of expression. (i) Pleonasm is redundancy of expression ; as, ' I know thee, stranger, who thou art.' (ii) Ellipsis is deficiency of expression ; as, 'She went to St. Paul's,' i. e. 'cathedral.' (iii) Personification is a figure of speech whereby we clothe qualities or inanimate objects with the attributes of life; as, 'Hope spread her wings, and flew away.' (iv) Simile is the comparison of two ideas, and corresponds to a ratio; as, * Youth is like the spring.* (v) ilfetop^or (transference of ideas) is the comparison of ratios or relations of ideas, and corresponds to a 2>'roportion; as, ' Youth is the spring of life ;' drawn out thus : — Youth : life : : spring : year. 108 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. tli 4 Sometimes the combination of the extremes gives us one metaphor, and the combination of the 'means another; thus, we talk of the 'spring of hfe,' and of the 'youth of the year.' (vi) Si/necdochej whereby we use part for the whole, and vice versd; as, * Ten sail appeared off our port.' Here sail is used for ships. (vii) MetoTwmy is the use of cause for effect, or vice versd; or the symbol for the thing signified; ae^ 'Flee the bottle,' i. e. 'the contents thereof* (viii) Hyperbole is exaggeration ; as, 'They built a tower to reach up to Heaven I ' i. e. 'very high.' (ix) Meiosis is lessening or weakening the force of an expres- sion; as, 'George is not very industrious,' i. e. 'he is very idle.' (x) Antithesis compares things contrary or different ; as, ' Though deep, yet clear.' 8. Besides these, Latham gives two more, which he calls conver- tibility and zeugma. 1. Convertibility is the use of one part of speech for another, and is either, (a) Etymological, or permanent; as, seldom, now always an adverb, formerly an old dative. (b) Syntactical, or temporary; as, the use of the infinitive for the noun. 2. Zeugma, whereby a verb, &c., applicable to only one clause, does duty for two ; as, 'They wear a garment like the Scythians, but a language peculiar to themselves.' — Sir J. Mandeville. |^"If this were tolerated, much bad grammar would find shelter under Zeugma 1 il SYNTAX, 109 CHAPTER VII. CBITICISMS AND CAUTIONS. § 1. Usage. The subject-matter of the following chapter is chiefly based on Dr. Crombie's English Etymology and Syntax, and on the works of Dr. Angus, of Mr. Washington Moon, and of Archbishop Trench. References made to these authors are characterised by the letters Cr., A., M., Tr. 1. Language is antecedent to Grammar. Law and general principles are necessary before rules can be deduced from them. To deduce these rules is the province of the grammarian, and the law of a language to which he must make his appeal is usage. 2. The usage which gives law to a language, and which is gene- rally denominated good usage, must be reputable, national, and present. . 3. The following Canons are laid down to guide us in retaining or preferring certain words or phrases : — Canon I. When the usage is divided as to any particular words or phrases, and when one of the expressions is susceptible of a different meaniifig, while the other ad- mits only one signification, the expression which is strictly univocal should be preferred. Examples. — Aught for * anything ' is preferable to ought. Scarcely, as an adverb, is better than scarce. Canon II. In doubtful cases, a/nahgy should be regarded. Example. — Contemporary is better than cotemporary. Canon III. When expressions are in other respects equal, that should be preferred which is most agreeable to the ear. no ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. nil i i t: i' Canon IV. When none of the preceding rules takes place, regard should be had to simplicity; thus, to accept, approve, admit, are preferable to accept of, approve of, admit of. 4. The following Canons regulate the decisions of grammar with reference to the rejection of phraseology which may be deemed ob- jectionable : — Canon I. All words and phrases particularly harsh, and not absolutely necessary, should be dismissed ; as, shame' facedness, uns access fulness, wrongheadedness. Canon II. When the etymology plainly points to a different signification from what the word bears, propriety and simplicity require its dismissal. For example, the word beholden taken for obliged, and unloose for untie, should be rejected. Canon III. When words become obsolete, or are never used but in particular phrases, they should be repudiated, as they give the style the air of vulgarity and cant, and their general disuse renders them obscure. Example. — By dint of argument; I had as lief go; a moot point, &c. Canon IV. All words and phrases which, analysed gram- matically, inclndG, a. solecism, should he disnv.iaed; as, / had rather go; which should be, / would rather go. Canon V. All expressions which, according to the estab- lished rules of the language, either have no meaning, or involve a contradiction, or according to the fair con- struction of the words convey a meaning different from the intention of the speaker, should be dismissed ; such as, he sings a good song, i, e. he sings well. 5. These Canons taken from Campbell on Rhetoric, Dr. Crombio has fully explained in his excellent work. If SYNTAX. Ill § 2. Orammatical Purity. 1. To write any language with grammatical ^wriVy implies three things: 1. That the words be all of that language. 2. That they may be construed and arranged according to the rules of syntax in that language. 8. That they be employed in that sense which usage nas annexed to them. 2. Grammatical purity may therefore be violated in three ways. 1. The words may not be English. This error is called a Barbarism. 2. Their construction may be contrary to English idiom. This error is called a Solecism. * 3. They may be nsed in a sense different from their estab- lished acceptation. T!»is error is termed an Impro- priety. — Crombie, Etym. Syntax. 3. If we analyse grammatical errors more minutely, we find that they arise from the following causes : — (i) Faulty definition — misconception of the meaning of words. (ii) Faulty classification — confusing words belonging to dif- ferent parts of speech. (iii) Faulty ellipsis. (iv) Redundancy. (v) Faulty concord and government. (vi) Faulty arrangement or collocation of words. 4t. Of these errors the principal illustrations occur in (i) Mistaking the adverb for the adjective. (ii) Misgovernment and false concord oi pronouns ; especially (iii) The false concord ->f relative and antecedent. (iv) Tlie ellipsis of the article, (v) The erroneous collocation of words ; especially m<5/??aciw5' the adverb^ and violating the arrangement of correla- iivcc in till! corresjwndinj clauses of a sentence. A, .1 112 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH L..NGUAGE. 5. We now proceed to give a list of general rules and cautions bearing upon these points ; a selection of such words in common use as are Hable to misconception; a list of words and phrases alpha* betically arranged, which suggest criticism or require explanation. §'^- CAUTIONS, CRITICAL REMARKS, ETC. I. Adverb. 1. Adverbs are often made adjectives or nouns, though not ele- gantly; as, 'The then ministry.' ^ • 'Very God of very God.' ' It is a long while ago.' — A» 1^^ 2. Adverbs in * ly ' from adjectives in * \y ' should be avoided; as, * That we may godly serve Thee.' 3. When adverbs are found in the same clause with several words, they must be closely connected with the words to which they belong. They are generally placed before adjectives, after verbs, and between the auxiliary and the participle. 4. Such adverbs as totally, supremely, absolutely, universally, &c., are not to be qualified by so, more, most, or by any word implying comparison, — M, 5. When the verb is intransitive, the adjective must be used ; as, *She looks cold.* When the verb is transitive, the adverb is to be used ; as, * She looks coldly on him.' 6. The verb To Be in all its moods and tenses, generally requires the word immediately connected with it to be an adjective, and not an adverb ; and consequently, when this verb can be substituted for any other without varying the sense or construction, that other verb must be connected with an adjective; as, 'The rose smells sweet,* not sweetly; for, if we substitute is for smells, we have * The rose is sweet,' 7. The misuse of the adverb for the adjective is a common blunder^ as, SYNTAX. 113 common ' They could easier get them hy heart ;' say, more easily/. 'Use a httle wme for tliy stomach's sake and thine often in- firmities.' Often is an adverb, and therefore wrong: we should say, % frequent infirmities. II. Adjective. 1. When adjectives, or their equivalents, deny equality, or affirm inequality, neither term of the comparison should ever include the other; as, ' I know none so happy in his metaphors as Addison.' Addison is included in none, and therefore is not so happy as him- self. — A. 2. When a comparative is used with than, the thing compared must always be excluded from the class of things compared ; as, 'Jacob loved Joseph more than all his children;' corrected, 'all his (o^Aer) children.'-— ^. K^" 3. Avoid the common blunder of confounding thejirst two with the two first, the last two with the two last. III. Article. iW 1. If diferent persons or objects are referred to, the article must be repeated with each; as, * TAe wooden and iron bridge '= one bridge. ' The wooden and the iron bridge '=two bridges. 2. The article is never used in English before virtues, vices, arts, and sciences; abstract quantities defined not otherwise par- ticularly; h, islands, take q/* after them Rivers are not followed by of. VIII. Collocation of Words, &o. These rules are of frequent use and great value. 1. Words that express things connected in thought should be placed as near to each other as possible, unless another arrangement be required by the emphasis. 2. Where words or clauses are so placed as to be susceptible of a double reference, the construction (called 'construction louclie ') must be chanaed. i\. Use as few stops as poosible ; depend upon the careful arrange- ment of words for a clear expression of meaning. 4. When different things have an obvious relatifjfi to each other in respect to the order of nature or time, that order should be re- garded in assigning them their places in the sentence, unless tlie scope of the passages require it to be varied. — I.tnc/hy Murray, quoted by Moon. ■' 118 ANALYSIS OF THE ENOLISII LASdUAGE, U'B § 4. Proper Usage of certain Words. Aught. — Anything (A.-Sax. awiht), should be so spelt, not ought. All, Whole. All is plural and collqctive. Whole refers to the component parts of a single body, and is singular. KiAj^ Evkry. All is collective. Every is distributive. Amid, Amidst, Among, Amongst. Among originally signified one out of many ; amid and amidst, in the middle of. Hence, then, among and amongst always imply number ; amid and amidst, generally quantity: thus, ^ among, not amidst, these books I cannot find the one I want;' but not, *Iwas out among snow and rain.' In this last case, amidst would be the correct expression. Amid and amidst also indicate that the thing specified is of a different class from those around it. While, among, and amongst are oftener applied to objects surrounded by those of the same class. We are said to be ^ among friends, but amidst enemies.' Authentic, Genuine. A genuine book is that which was written by the author whose name it bears. An authentic book relates matters of fact as they really happened. Between, Among. Between_\3 used when we speak of two : among, when we speak of more than two. By, With, Through. Nearness, oneness, throughness are the ideas suggested by these words. By belongs to the agent; wifh, to the instrument. W^en they both express means only, and not origiTial agency, by implies that the means are neces- sary ; with, that they are auxiliary only. Through implies that the means used form the appointed channel for the con- veyance of the object named. — A. By the BYE, By and by, Good bye. In the phrase By and by, we have two 7?r<7;o5?7«ow.s connected by a conjunction ; consequently, as prepositions express the relation between words, and con- junctions connect clauses, we have an ellipsis, which seems to be something of this kind : (Passing) ^By (this time) and by (that time),' i. e. ' omitting present and immediate consideration,' i. e, presently. SYNTAX. 119 ot ought. 8 to tlie signified Hence, mid and 1st, tliese was out d be the jcified is ong, and those of t amidst written h relates )f two : are the agent; us only, neces- implies le con- hy, we juently, nd cow- ems to and hy iration,* By the hye is a phrase totally dlfTerent. The first hy is a preposition; the second J?/e means * a town/ * a particular lo- cality,' found in the affix hy, as in Derby; also in tlie phrase, hye-laWf or local law, and bycioord, i. e. town^s talk. The phrase therefore means, 'whilst passing by this place;' tantamount to saying, ' digressing from the general subject,' this particular topic (rd7rof=: place) suggests a similar idea. Good hye is a corruption of the words God he with you. Betwixt, Bktvvken. Betwixt is ordinarily confined to places; be- tween has a much more extended signification. We speak of 'what may happen between morning and evening,' of 'hesita- ting between opposite courses ' ; we could not use betwixt in tliese senses; but ^betiuixt the chair and the table,' ^betwixt the road and the mountain,' would be quite correct. In poetry, however, these words are used indifferently. Besides, Also, Too, Likewise. Too is a slighter and a more familiar expression than also, which has something in it more specified TCCidi formal. ' \ Likewise has a rather different meaning. Originally it meant in like manner. It implies some connection or agreement be- tween the words it unites. We may say, ' He is a poet, likewise a musician,^ but not 'He is a prince, likewise a musician,' . because there is no natural connection between the functions. Also implies merely addition. Besides is used rather when some additional circumstance is npmed after others as a kind of afterthought, and generally to usher in some n fw clause of a sentence ; as, ^Besides what has been said, this must be considered,' &c. — 7V. Because, Since, Inasmuch as, For, As. These are all causal par- ticles, i. e. they indicate a proposition fro77i which something follows; they correspond conversely to the illative, which point out that which does follow. Because (by cause) is now used in answer to why? — 1st, as indicating physical sequence, 'from what cause?' 2ndly, by logical sequence, 'how is it proved?' 3rdly, 'for what purpose ? ' 120 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. li UiV:. {! ) Since is less formal than because; it also generally begins a sentence, or is understood at the beginning. Inasmuch as has something of a qualifying power which the others do not possess. It is merely the same as in as far. As is more incidental than since, and seems to take for granted what is stated. As seems to suppose its correspond- ing word so to follow ; but unless some strict comparison is intended, it is generally omitted. For is a slighter because. — Tr. Completely, Entirely. Completely, like almost, is used in ques- tions o( degree; entirely in those of ^uan^t .. ( Only. This adverb should generally be placed after the verb^ not before i<; otherwise the grammatical effect is to make onli/ apply to the verb instead of to what follows the verb.^ — M. Thus it is better to combine onli/ when, only that, only in, only thus, only as;^ ex.: * It is said that this can only be filled in thus.'' Corrected: * It is said that this can be filled in only thus.'' Where only occurs in connection with one, the words should not be separated. Otheu than, Otherwise than. These are thus distinguished : (Adjective) * He had no expectations other than good.' (Adverb) * He never wrote otherwise than clearly.' Properly. * The colon may be properly applied in the tliree following cases : ' Corrected : * May properly he applied.^ Whether the adverb is placed before the auxiliary, or be tween the auxiliary and participle, depends upon the meaning we wish to express. If we mean that it is proper that certain rules should be written ; our words may be arranged thus : ' The rules should properly he written.' If we wish to say that they should be written in a proper manner, then we must say, * The rules should be properly written.^ The same remark will apply to many other adverbs. Rather, when followed by than, should not be separated from it. * This mode of expression rather suits familiar than grave style.' , Say: * Suits a familiar rather than a grave style.' Soon. In Shakspere's age soon meant ad primam vesperam; and this reference to the evening we find in the phrase, going soon SYNTAX. 127 to hed. Quickly was then the positive of sooner and soonest.^ Mai'sh, Quantity is often erroneously used for number ; as, * a quantity of windows ' for a ' number of windows.' Tomorrow is sometimes used as a noun. ' Tomorrow will suit me equally well.' Say, * The morrow.* Few, a Few. Few, written without the article, signifies something quite different from what it does when written with it ; as, * Few persons really believe it ; ' it is incredible. ' A few persons really believe it ; ' it is not incredible. — M. Little, A Little. ' He thought little about it ; ' i. e. it was a matter of indif- ference to him. ' He thought a little about it ; ' i. e. it was not a matter of indifference to him. — M. A Many, Many a. * Though we say a multitude, which means many, we never say a many.* — Moon. One is tempted to ask, why not? Mr. Moon continues : ' ? et, by a strange caprice of idiom, we say, a great many^ ' Many,' says Lowth, * is chiefly used with the word great before it.' G. Douglas uses the expression, a few menye. The confusion about this word seems to* have arisen from its disputed etymology. Some derive it from N.-French, mesnie-=. a mixed multitude, a company, a household; others from A.- Saxon, manig (adjective). It does not seem to have occurred to grammarians that both derivations are correct, and that we possess in reality two distinct words, which have accidentally assumed the same form ; the one many, a noun from mesnie ; the other many, an adjective from the Saxon manig. Hence when we say, a great many, wo mean a great multitude, and many is the noun. If this explanation be borne out by fact, as a reference to the history of the word will prove, what error can there be in saying a many ? * Full many a flower is born to blush unseen.' .•I I! 128 ANALYSIS OP TfiE ENGLISH LANGtJAGfi. The expression, many a flower^ presents greater difficulties. To arrive at an explanation of the phrase, we must appeal to the meanings which a possesses when similarly situated. The special meanings of a when not an article are, Of as now-a-days = now-of-days.* On „ he went-a-hunting = on hunting. Each „ three times a-year = each year. Any „ * If a man love me ' = if any man love me. Every „ * It is good that a man should both hope, and quietly wait for the salvation of the Lord,' i. e. every man. To interpret the phrase many a man, Home Tooke suggests that a means of, and many is the noim ; thus, according to him, many a man is a corruption of many of men. Archbishop Trench favours this explanation, t Although, with the exception of the word nowadays, we cannot find any instance of a used for of, the use of a for on is clear ; and it is not imcommon, at the present time, to meet with the use of on for of in vulgar phraseology ; as, ' I am glad on it,' for ' I am glad of it',' 'He did half on it,' for ' He did half of it,' &c. &c. This will help us to understand how the cor- ruption would naturally take place. Learn, in the Psalms, means teach ; as, learn me, i. e. teach me. Prevent, in the Collect, ' Prevent us, O Lord,' &c., means go be- fore; * Our most religious and gracious queen;' religious means here, sacred in person. (ii) Phrases. ft am I. * The wages of sin is death J Sometimes the noun following a neuter or passive verb is re- garded as the nominative; and with it the verb is made to agree; As, in interrogatives, ' Who art thou?'' And in Old English, '/< am /,' * It ben the sherrefes men.' Chaucer. * This is regarded by some as corrupted from ' now-on-days," i.e. ' now in these days.' t In A.-S. the adjective manig agreed with its noun in the singular ; as, manig man. It seems probable that the guttural sound of the i^ gave rise to tho sound of a which follows many. STNTAi. m i.e. 'now in *His pavilion were dark waters.' — Ps. xviii. 11. * The wages of sin is death.' In the last example, wages may be a singular. Dr. Richard- son's Study of Language. It is me. It is hirriy vide cLi»:'. V. § 4, 2. T. . T ^ 1 / command "I li 18 /, your master, who | ^^^,,,„^^, j ycu. The question is whether the verb should be command or commands, i. e. what is the antecedent to * who ' ? In the iSrst place, there ought to be no ambiguity, and the construction should be altered. In the next place, according to rule, the relative agrees with the nearest antecedent, i. e. master, therefore, the verb should be commands. If it is said, your master is in apposition to /, put it in a parenthesis, and avoid all difficulty : thus, It is I (your master) who command you. Of this expression, Latham says : * This brings us to the following question : With which of the two antecedents does the relative agree ? with /, or with master ? ' This may be answered by the two following rules :— Rule 1. When the two antecedents are in the 8am£ pro- position, the relative agrees with the first ; thus, 1. It is I, your master, 2. who command you. Rule 2. When the two antecedents are in different pro- positions, the relative agrees with the second ; thus, 1. It is I, 2. your master, who commands you. This position of the antecedent is determined by the con- nection or want of connection, between the substantive anteoe- dent and the verb governed by the relative. n ; ty ■ ^ If 130 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. In the expression, the word * master ' is logically connected with the word ^ command \! and this fact makes the expression, * It is I, your master, who commands you,' the better of the two. — E. Language, vol. ii. p. 376. Three times three s *^ ? nine. * Plurality being evidently implied, the plural verb seems more consonant with our natural con- ception of numbers, as well as the idiom of our language.' — Cr. Fare thee well. This familiar expression, which has the authority of Byron, is wrong. We should say, * Fare thou well.' The words are < ^ ,, ' > Crombie, Morell, Allen, and others favour the form as follow, on the ground that as is a relative, and therefore the verb must be plural. Angus says the expres- sion as follows is preferable, for admitting that, if as follow is used, as is a relative, he observes it is not so used in English in any other case ; the expression is now adverbial, like as regards, or so far as concerns. Try and think. This common expression should evidently be, try to think. ' Satan than whom none higher sat.'' This quotation from Milton has given occasion to some controversy. Latham observes with respect to it, ' The following is a practical rule for determining doubtful constructions : — (a) * Reduce the sentence to the several propositions (which are never less than two) which it contains. (b) ' Replace the relative by its equivalent personal or de- monstrative pronoun, or by its equivalent substantive. (c) * The case of the demonstrative or substantive is the case of the relative also.' Thus we have : * Satan spake ; none sat higher than he sat.' * Satan spake ; none sat higher than Satan sat.' Hence the expression should be— ' Satan than who None higher sat.' .... SYNTAX. 181 ly connected 5 expression, r of the two. itly implied, latural con- guage.' — Cr, he authority rell.' , and others is a relative, 3 the expres- as follow is id in English bial, like as tly be, try to from Milton bserves with determining propositions ^ntains. mal or de- ibstantive. Lntive is the This also coincides with the rule given respecting than after a comparative, q.v. in respect to. In respect of. Avoid the latter expression. Marsh says, * Old writers sometimes say respectively to. This- is now disused ; but relatively to is by no means unfrequent, and in respect of, used in this sense, is just as gross a violation of English grammar as to write relatively of or in reference of.^ — Lectures on E. Lang. * Thou canst not tell whence it cometh, < I whither it goeth.* * We will not serve thy gods, nor worship the golden image.^ — ^Dan. iii. 18. There is a dispute among grammarians concerning the adop- tion of or or nor, when any other negative than neither or nor occurs in the preceding clause or phrase, and Goold Brown cites a goodly array of authors who advocate contradictory opinions. Dr. Angus says, * During a considerable period in the history of our language, double negatives with a negative sense were common.' . . . ^ If the fivo negatives belong to different clauses, we may use them both.' Or can be used in such cases, and the negative will then extend over both clauses. The dispute seems to rest ultimately upon the definition of a conjunction. Those who define a conjunction as a ' word con- necting clauses,' must of course defend the use of nor. Thoae who assert that ' a conjunction connects words as well as clauses,^ are justified in using or. Bat; xS ^ i m ANALYSIS OF THE ENCrLISH LANGI^AOlB. APPENDIX I. List of Strong Verbs. Strong Verbs may be divided into three classes. (i) Those which have one form to express the present^ past tense, and perfect participle. (ii) Those which have two forms to express these three parts. (iii) Those which have three forms to express these three parts. Class 1 . Those which have the same form for present and past tenses anc perfect participle. Present. Past. P. Participle. Present. Past. P. Participle Beset Beset Beset Bid Bid Bid Burst Burst Burst Set Set Set Bestead Bestead Bestead Shed Shed Shed Cast Cast Cast Shut Shut Shut Cost Cost Cost Shred Shread Shread Cut Cut Cut Slit Slit Slit Hit Hit Hit Spread Spread Spread Hurt Hurt Hurt Split Split Split Let Let Let Thrust Thrust Thrust Put Put Put Sweat Sweat Sweat Class 2. Those which have two different forms to express the present tense, past tense, and perfect participle. Present. Past. P. Participle. I^esent. Past. P. Participle. Abide Abode Abode Bleed Bled Bled Awake Awaked or Awaked Breed Bred Bred awoke Cling Clung Clung Beat Beat Beaten Come Came Come Bend Bent Bent (O.-E. Curse Cursed or Cursed or bended curst curst Bind Bound Bound Dig Dug Dug UST OP STRONG VERBS. 133 the present, these three these three sent and past p. Participle Bid Set Shed Shut Shread Slit Spread SpUt Thrust Sweat express the p. Partie^le. Bled Bred Olnng Come Cursed or curst Dug fiftttnt^ Past. P. Pariioiple. Preaent. Past. P. PatHeipU, Feed Fed Fed Meet Met Met Fight Fought Fought Bead Bead Bead Find Found Found Bun Ban Bun Flee Fled Fled Shine Shone Shone Fling Flung Flung Shoot Shot Shot aet Got Got Sit Sat Sat Grind Ground Ground Slide Slid Slid Hang Hanged or Hanged or Sling Slung Slung or hung hung Hlang Hold Held Held Speed Sped Sped Keep Kept Kept Stand Stood Stood Knit Knitted or Knitted or Stick Stuck Stuck knit knit Sting Stung Stung Load Led Led Swing Swung Swung Lend Lent Lent Wind Wound Wound Make Made Made Wring Wrung Wrung Class 3. Those which have three different forms for the three principal parts of the verb. (With these verbs some are classed that have weak preterites.) Preset^t. Past. P. Participle. Present. Past. P. Participle. Arise Arose Arisen Draw Drew Drawn Bear (to Bore or Borne Dress Dressed Drest carry) bare Drink Drank Drunk Bear (to Bore or Bom Drive Drove Driven bring forth) bare Eat Ate Eaten Bdgin Began Begun Fall Fell Fallen Bid Bade Bidden Fly Flew Flown Bite Bit Bitten or Forsake Forsook Forsaken bit Freeze Froze Frozen Blow Blew Blown Freight Freighted Freighted or Break Broke Broken fraught Chide Chid Chidden Give Gave Given Choose Chose Chosen Grave Graved Graven Cleave (to Clave or Cleaved Grow Grew Grown cleave to) cleaved Hew Hewed Hewn Cleave (to Clove or Cloven or Know Knew Known split) cleft cleft Load Loaded Loaded, Crow Crew Crowed loaden or Dare (to Durst or Dared laden venture) dared Lie Lay Lain t f i 134 AnALYSia OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. Present. Past. P. Participle. Present. Past. P. ParHeipU. Mow Mowed Mown Spin Span or spun Spun Kido Rode Ridden Spit Spat Spit Ring Rang Rung Spring Sprang Sprung Rise Rose Risen Steal Stole Stolen Rive Rived Riven Stink Stank or Stunk Seethe Seethed Sodden or Htunk seethed Stride Strode Stridden Sew Sewed Sewn Strive Strove Striven Shake Shook Shaken Strew, strow Strewed or Strewed or Shape Shaped Shapen strowed strown Shave Shaved Shaven Swear Swore or Sworn Shear Sheared Shorn or sware sheared Swell Swelled Swollen or Show Showed Shown Bwoln Shrink Shrank Shrunk or Swim Swam Swum shrunken Take Took Taken Sing Sang Sung Turive Throve Thriven Sink Sank Sunk Throw Threw Thrown Slay Slew Slain Tread Trod Trodden Slink Slank Slunk Wax Waxed Waxen Smite Smote Smitten Wear Wore Worn Sow Sowed Sown or Weave Wove Woven ■owed Writ© Wrote Written REDUNDANT VERBS. 135 p. PariitripU, ■ \ Spun 1 1 Spit 1 ' Sprung ■ - Stolen B . Stunk I APPENDIX II. ( Stridden 1 Reduudant Verbs. Striven H Strewed or ■ RiDUNDAMT Verbs axe those which have more than one form for Btrown ■ the past tenaej or perfect participle, or both. - .▼? Sworn H H Prestnt. Past. P. Participle. Present. Past. P. Participle. Swollen or H Bear (to Bore or bare Borne Load Loaded Loaded, i Bwoln K carry) loaden or 1 Swum ■ Bear (to Bore or bare Bom laden 1 Taken H bring forth) Saw Sawed Sawed or f Thriven H Bite Bit Bitten orbit sawn i Thrown H Cleave (to Clave or Cleaved Seethe Seethed Sodden or 1 Trodden V clin^ to) cleaved seethed Waxen ■ Cleave (to Cleft or Cleft or Shear Sheared Sheared or 1 Worn I split) clove cloven shorn Woven ■ Dare (to Durst or Dared Spin Span or Spun Written ■ venture) dared spun I Freight Freighted Freighted or fraught Stink Stank or stunk Stunk I Hang Hanged or Hanged or Strew Strewed or Strewed or ■ hung hung strowed strown I Hide Hid Hidden or hid Strike Struck Struck or stricken 1+ 1 ^ Knitted or knit Knitted or knit li 136 PART II. ETTMOLOOIGAL DERIVATIONS. 1(1 CHAPTER I. INFLEXIONS. § 1. NOTULS 1. Gases. Gen. IS or es; as, hinges horse, i.e. king^s horse (A.-S. es). Dat, OM, UM, m; as, whilom, him, them, whom (A.-S. um). [The m in this suffix, according to Richardson, is Hom-o"] 2. Gender. ER, AR, OR, signify male agent. (A.-S. wer, a man; or, ^Er, the front, the prime person, or agent.) See below er of the com- parative. STER, female agent, denotes guidance, direction, (A.-S. steoran, to guide or steer) ; used also as a dimiuutiye of depreciation and contempt ; as, youngster, punster. ESS (N.-F. fem. suffix from Lat. ix). EB, male agent (A.-S. corrupted from a or e): as, hante', now hunter. STRESS =ster-|-ess, double fem. termination (Sax andNur.); as, seamstress, songstress. INE, Greek fem. ; as, heroine ; en. Germ. fem. ; as, vixen, from fuchsen. ETYMOIiOGICAL DERIVATIONS. 137 ). steoran, to areciation and 3. Number. ^N (A.-S. an, pi. suffix) ; as, brethren ; reckoned strong. ER (A.-S. ru, now ry), a suffix implying collectiveness ; as, yeo- manry. ES (A.-S. as, pi. suffix; also, N.-F. in x); whence the general modem pi. suffix es, as suiting both languages. EL EH EN ER ET ix;k OW ING ULE, CULE as shovel, stream, chicken, splinter, lancet, hillock, shadow, farthing. , Uci( icicle (Lat.) . ICLE, J isK as asterisk (Gr.) 4. Diminntives. Other diminutive suffixes art formed by combinations of these elementary diminutives ; as, KiN=ock + en, as mannikin. LET=el-f et „ streamlet. REL— er + el „ pikerel. KLE=ock + el „ knuckle. ROCK=er-f-ock„ laverock =lark. LiNQ = el + ing „ duckling. 5. Augmentatives. ARD as drunkard l ^^ ^^^j^ ^^. .^ ^^ _jj ^ ^^^^^ ART „ braggart J DON „ balloon "^ ONE „ trombone > of Italian origin. ION „ stanchion J 6. Patronymics. ING as Harding, ing (A.-S.) denotes dos. endant, or son oK SON „ Johnson 1 /p . s „ Richards J ^ ^^'^ FiTZ „ Fitzroy (N.-Fr.) MAC „ Macdouald (Scotch Gaelic). „ O'Connor (Trisli). AP or p „ Priceac A]^iiee8=lr()iii iiee« (VV elsh). IT m -I 138 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 7. General Noun Terminations. ADE (A.-S. a'd, a pile), continuity ; as, arcade, balustrade. HEAD, HOOD (A.-S. hdd), persoH, form, quality, condition; as, child- hood. DOM (A.-S. dom.), doom, judgment ; as, wisdom. EE (derived from French past. part, in e'; as, assigne), impliws office ^ as, trustee. ING (A.-S. ung), denotes being-, as, evening, mx)rning. NESS (A.-S. naes), a nose, or promontory — prominent quality ; as, idleness. RED (A.-S. raBd), counsel, advice, whence society; as, kindred, RIG (A.-S. rice) ; kingdom, ; as, bishopric. SKIP \ (A.-S. scyppan), to fashion, ot form. SHIP r „ SCAPE ) >» „ as, friendship. „ as, la/ndscape. Y (x\.-S. e) signifies ^Zace ; as, smithe, now smithy. WICK (A.-S. wic, or wye), a village] as, bailiwick. 8. Classical and N.-French. AGE (Lat. age re), acf, .stoie, or condition; a«, bondage ACY (Lat. acia, from adjective in ax, acis), has the meaning of ac, or ic (add), signifies office ; as, magistracy. ARY, ORY (Lat. ar-is, arius, orius, urus, sai»» foi^ ^ er, q.v.)^ applied to person or place ; as, granary. lapida*-y. CE 1 ? (Lat. tia), abstract quality ; as. iicfijice. TY (Lat. tas), abstract quality ; as, liberty. TUDE (Lat. tudo), abstract quality ; a? magnf^t4e. IAN (Gr. koq), relating to, or belonging vy; ejigoisfies profession; as, musician. ST (Gt. iffrrii;), agent, or person; as, sophist. MEN ] (Lat. mens, mentum, moneoj, i (unifies meawm^, or mien^jow; MENT thus, testimony, testament, aliinony, aliment, differ merely in M0N>' j their application. Anything meant to testify, to nourish. ETYUOIiOGICAL DERIVATIONS. I3d TURE, SURE (Lat. ura), abstract quality ; as Uncture. OUR (N.-Fr. eur; Lat. or); oRy ardour. lOM (Lat. io), abstract idea ; as, action. § 2. A^eotives. 1. Terminations (Saxon). EN (A.-S. an, en), means one, or united to ; as, golden ring, gene- rally, made of. ED (A.-S. ad, od), means add, or join ; as, wooded=:aAd wood. T (A.-S. ig, from eacan, to add)=join'j as, woodi/=sadd wood. ERN (A.-S- asm, a place) ; as, southern. ERLY, contracted from emly, as, southemly ; ly=like. FOLD (A.-S. fealdan, to multiply, feald=many) ; as, manifold. FULL (A.-S. fyllan, to^ZZ); as,, faithful. ISH (A.-S. isc, or ics), denoting the external quality of a thing; as if from ic, es=add it. Also a national appellative term ; as, coldish, Irish. LESS (A.-S. leosan, to loose, to dismiss), means witkoit; as, sleep- less. LY (A.-S. lie or like) ; as, meanly. SOME (A.-S. sum, from somnian, to collect); as, winsome. WARD (A.-S. wardian=to look at); as, homeward. yrofession; as, 1 2. Ghief Classical Terminations. , from Lat. adjectives in 'alis; ' as, equalis. „ * ans,' ' ens ; ' as, elegans. AL ANT, ENT ABLE, IBLE FIC, FERGUS *0U8, OSE (full of) TORY, SCRY * bilis ; ' as, visihilis. * ficus,' * ferus ; ' as, horrifcus, pesti- ferus. * osus ; ' as, verhosus. 'torius,' 'sorius; ' as, migratorius. * o^rs in righteous is Saxon not Latin ; the word being corrupted from rigki- uiis ^right-wise. I MP mmmmmmmm 146 ANALTSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGB. IVE ft ' ivus ; * as, capttvus. m 91 * anus ; ' as, humanus m W * idus > * as, timidtu. PLE, BLE » ' plex ; * as triplex. QUE (Pr.) n ' quus ; ' as, obliquua. 3. Plurals. The plural suffix of adjectives was e in O. E. as allej pi. of all. Some assert that ihesef those, are such plural forms : these from this or thes. 4. Comparative and Superlative Affixes. ER (A.-S. i£r=front), signifies duality and prominence^ found in the wordh-er-o. SE, as in worse, less, Goth, comparative suffix, found only in these words. EST, superlative suffix; as if es-ed, which would mean add it. M0RE-\ possibly derived from mow (A.-S. md), a heap ; as harley- I mow. MOST r WM>re=m4-er, a bigger heap; and mos<=m4-est, biggest J heap. In Shakespeare and earlier writers more was written moe, 5. Irregular Comparisons. Po8. Com. Superl. Good (A.-S. god). [Bet] (A.-S. betan), to improve, better, bettest, or best. Bad (A.S. badian), ""«' ^"^ ("-i- ™p-). Little (A.-S. lit, small), { '"*^ (-*-"*• l^^ssa), 1 ,^^j, ^^^ _g ^^^^^ L lesSj lesser, j Late (A.-S. latian, to delay), later, latter, latest, last. r FoRE=/ron^, former=for-ema-er, for-m-ost, forest, first NiaH(A.-S. neah), nearer (A.-S. nearra), nearest^ nextj {A.-S. rnouli6i|. ETYMOLOGICAL DERIVATIONS. Uj fun (A.-S. feoTj aC a distance), far-th-er, far-th-est. Forth ( Lat. foris=Jc^ond), ftirther, furthest. Old "I/* Q (^\A—ane>t { ^^^^^* oldest. Eld J ^ eia-a^e;, ^ ^^^^^^ ^^ _g celdre), eldc^st, ealdest. Out (A.-S. ut), outer, utter, outermost, utmoot. [Rathe] (A.-S. rath), swifty early, rather [ratheat]. 6. Nnmerals. Cipher (Arabic, safira, empty). One (A.-S. dn). Two (A.-S. twd). Three (A.-S. thrl). Four (A.-S. feower). Five (A.-S. fif)- Six (Lat. sex). Seven (A.-S. seofon, Lat. septem). Eight (A.-S. eahta). Nine (A.-S. nigon). Ten (A.-S. tynan, to complete). Eleven (A.-S. endlufon=owe left). Twelve (A.-S. twalufon=o left). Half (A.-S. healf). Quarter (Lat. quartus). THiRTEEN=three-ten, i.e. ten added to three* Twenty =twain-tig, tighten times. Hundred (A.-S. hund=10) some syllable seems to be lost. Thousand (A.-S. fusend). The A.-S. J>usend is nothing but tin more complete Mseso-Goth. * tigos hund,' or * taihuns hurnJ ,* viz. ten times hundred. — Bosworth. Tithe (A.-S tith or tyth, a possession or holding). Riding =trithing, a third part. FARTHiNG=fourth-ing = little fourth part. TTTn-TTT l^(A..-S. feowertha), the suflix th in these words is in A.-S. ta or tha. Fifth / i ii- Both (A.-S. ba-twa or butu), ha=both, twfi= tivo=boih the two^ or by twos. ■■ 142 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. Once (A.-S. an-es), now an adverb, formerly an old genitive. TwiCE=twies (A.-S. twi), now an adverb, formerly an old genitive. Thrice =tlirie8 (A.-S. thri) „ „ Twain (A.-S. tw^gen). ONLT=onelike. Atone =to be at one. Alone = all one. One {adj.)j A.-S. an; (noun), Fr. on, Lat. home. f i.l il ! 11 § 3. Frononns I (A.-S. ic, Ger. ich). Thou (A.-S. thu), connected with two. He(A.-S. He). She (A.-S. seo and heo): the former gives she, the latter hoo; Lancash. dial, for she. It (A.-S. hyt), possibly from hcBt=icgan, higan. — ^osworth. ETYMOLOGICAL DERIVATIONS. 143 Own (A.-S. Agen), from dgan, to have or hold. Any (A.-S. an-ig = add one). Enodgh (A.-S. genogan), to satisfy. Some (A.-S. somnian), to collect. Divers (Lat. di versus), different. Each (A.-S. ea-ilk=07ie like); ilka means the same. Every (A.-S. cefre), always; y= ig=iadd. Such (A.-S. swa = «o + like). Aught (A.-S. a whit = a bit). Naught (A.-S. no whit or no bit). Either (A.-S. athor or auther = one of two). Wi the latter hoc; Pronominal Adverbs. NomlnatiTe Genitive Form Dative Form Acciisativo Foi-m Ablative Form Comporatire Form Hh Thk Who Hence Thence Whence Here There Where /Then \ ) Than / When How Thus [for thi] Why Hither 1 Thither Whither A.-S. r, ra, e, Bigmfy rest in; her =.here; \>sQr=there; hw8er = where. PER {motion to): hi- dex = hither; Tpi-dev = thither; hwi-der=: whither. — Vernon's Anglo-Saxon Guide. V 'i §4. The Verb. 1. Principal Prefixes. A, before verbs gives a transitive force ; as, await = wait on. A, gerundial prefix = on ; as, a-hunting — on-hunting. Be = by^ and gives a transitive or reflective force ; as, behave = be-have. For (Lat. foris, out of, or beyond) ; as, forget, forbid^ get forth, &c. And or An = against ; as, answer = swear against. Fore = before ; as, foretell = tell beforehand. En, prefix or suffix, has the force of to make ; as, enrich, lighten ; the "words enlighten^ enliven, enripen, engladden, enstrengthen^ endarken have both. 'm 144 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. ;■ ! En or Em (Lat.) for in = in or on; as, embark. Mis- (Goth.), to err, or stray from ; as, mislead ss: to lead wrong. With (A.-S.) in composition against ; as, withstand^ i.e. stand against. Be (Lat. back) ; as, retrace. 2. Inflexions. •ST (A.-S. ast, 0. Sax. is, Gr. elg, ag, c) ; Sanscrit si; may be a form of av, thou. -TH (A.-S. ath, O.-Sax. and Lat. t), may be a form of the, an old pronoun of the third person. -ING, participial suffix (A.-S. ende). -ING, gerund (A.-S. anne) ; as, writing = writanne = to write. ^ The infinitive to write (A.-S. an; as, writan) : the gerund to wriie (A.-S. anne; as, writanne). ED ; as in delighted. The force of this suffix is did ; thus, / loved — T love-did. 3. Diminutive Verbs are or were those ending in -M as seem. -EN (n, on) )) gladden, reckon. -EL, LE » struggle, kneel. -£R » glimmer. -ND » bind. -NG M swing. -NK » drink. -NT » stint. -UCK (CK, k) » pluck -UTCH (OTCH, ATCH) J> clutch. -USH (SH, ass) >> brush -OW » hallow. -OT, T, D )J blot. -AG, UG, AUGH, Y >> laugh. 4. Intensive. -STER as bluster. ETYMOLOGICAL DERIVATIONS. 145 5. Causative. -ER -EN -SE -ISH -T •-ATE -FY (Classical)^ -^^ -IZE -ER ^Classical) -ate as, » » »» linger. whiten. cleanse. burnish. worry. facilitate. terrify. expedite. tranquillize. 6. Frequentative. as, batter, clamber. „ agitate 7. Inceptive. -ESCE (Lat.) as, effervesce. 8. The Verb To Be. The Anglo-Saxon verb substantive is composed of several verbs. We can trace in its different inflexions no fewer than five, of which three now remain — Je, aw, was. 1 am, eom, eart, ys, synd, synd, synd. I was, I be. waes, W8Bre, wflBS, wceron. wflBron, beoth, weeron, beoth. beo, byst, byth, beoth. In these inflexions we may distinctly see five verbs whose conju- gations are intermixed : — 1. Eom, es, ys, are of one family, and resemble the Greek uni. 2. Ar, arth, am, are, proceed from another parent, like eram. 3. Sy, synd „ from another, and recall sum, stmt. 4. WiES, waere, weeron „ from another source, seen in A. -S. wesan. 5. Beon, bist, byth, beoth „ from another family, of which the infinitive been was kept in use, \ n 1 1 1 1 m 4 I:- 1 m' 1 "I mi 'I '1 146 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. We now trace the derivation of such parts as are bequeathed to us : then compare the French, Latin substantive verbs, Am, cognate with Gr. eifil = &ei fiotf life to me» Is If ti flQ = ac/) '(«)&i^ . 150 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. ; I CHAPTER III. PEEFOSITIONS. Above, a=on. (A.-S.) bufan=be-ufan; from ufa, lofty. About, (A.-S.) abutan=on boda=circum; 'boda= extremity. After, (A.-S.) sefter, comparative of aeft; (Dan.) efter, behind. Against, 'A.-S.) ongean, to meet. Among, (A.-S.) a = on, mcengan, or mengian, to mingle. Athwart, (A.-S.) thweorian (according to Home Tooke), to twisty to oppose- At, (A.-S.) 8Bt, at. BEKseiD, (A.-S.) bin dan. Bflow, (A.-S.) licjan, to lay or lie. Beneath, (A.-S.) neothan, beneath. Between, (A.-S.) be-twegsn, by twos. Beyond, (A.-S.) hi^^ond=^be passed] geondfromgangen, togo\ whence, yond^ yonder. BuT=&e outy (A.-S.) biitan, to bi out. Down, (A.-S.) dufan, to sink. Ere, Erst, (A.-S.) oer, er, before. For, (Goth.) fairina, cause. (A.-S.) for, on account of. Fore, (A.-S.) foran, before. From, (A.-S.) frum, the beginning. In, (A.-S.) in. Tooke says from inna=viscei*a? Midst, (A.-S.) mid. In composition = with (Lat.) medius. Or', (A.-S.) of; (Goth.) af-ara, posterity. Off, probably thfe same word as of with a different application. On, (Goth, ana ; A.-S. on), is of unsettl<^d etymology. Out, (A.-S.) ut, utan. Tooke derives it from a word outa=s^m ? Round, (A.-S.) rond= ftordcr; also (Lat.) rotundus. Over, (A.-S.) 6fer; Gr. vicip. Tooke supposes ufa means top or head. Through, (Goth.) dauro, a door or passage. (A.-S.) thurh. tremity. behind. IfffilrOLOmCAL DERIVATIONS. 151 To, (Germ, than), meas^ to do \ hence Tooke considers to equiva- lent to the end. Towards, (A.-S.) wardian. to look at ; as if, to looh to the end. Till, Until. While=a time. Till is a corruption of to-while=fo a time. Until means on till. Under. Tooke, resolves this into on ri^^\ nedeissinferior. , ' >(A.-S.) abufan. See above, upon. Upon, J Without, (A.-S.) withutan, to be out of. With, (A.-S.) withan, to bind. ), to twisty ren, to go: us. cation. ta=sA:m ? ans top or urh. CHAPTER rV. ADVEBBS, &o. 1. The four adverbial prefixes are a, al, be, to. The signification of these is a=on, al^s^all, be=^hy., to = the or this. The four ad- verbial suffixes are ly, wise, ways, wards. These mean respectively, ly = like, wise = manner, ways =^ direction, wards from ward=^ looking at. 2. Aboard, on board. Adrift, (A.-S.) drifan, to drive; on the drive. Aghast, (A.-S.) gast, geist; whence ghost, on the gaze. aloft, (A.-S.) luft=mr, on the air. Askew, (Dan.) skiaever, to twist. Askant, (Dutch), schuins, wry, oblique. Astound, (Fr.) e tenner, astonish. Asunder, (A.-S.) sundrian, to separate, whence * sand.' Away, (A.-S.) on-wseg, on the way. Awhile, (A.-S.), on a time. Awry, (A.-S.) writhan, to writhe. Atwist, (A.-S.) twisan, from twa two, to twist. Athwart, (A.-S.) thweorian, to twist. Already = all-ready, (A.-S.) radian, to prepare. Alone =a/^-o/i^^ 3 I * ■'■•, i i 11 M : Mli » i |i f i ' M I I ^'' i 11 ii 1< 1^ ''*')«l#%***wi,Mki«^'' 152 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. Anon=iw one, (instant^. But, as an adverb, means only. Enough, (A.-S.)genogan, to satisfy. Ever, (A.-S.) sdfTe=alwat/s. ¥Am=gladly, (A.-S.) fasgnian, to rejoice. Forthwith, forth. + with.=.without delay, foris=:ow< of. Instantly, (Lat.) in stare, urgently. Immediately, (Lat.) in=not, mediua=:middle, no middle thing intervening. YoviSOOTYL— utterly, sooth; i.e. true. Truth, what a man troweth ; sooth, what a man sayeth. Lief, (A.-S.) lufian, to love. Lo, (A.-S.) 14, whence vulgarly law and lawk. Merely, (Dutch) maar, but, only, no more than. Nay, (A.-S.) na, formerly answered affirmative questions; ab. Will he come ? — Ans. Yea or Nay. Never, (A.-S.) nsefre, na=wo^, gstre=ever. No, (A.-S.) no; (Sw.) nodig=ai;erse, answered negative ques- tions ; as. Will he not come ? — ^Ans. Yes or No. Now, (Goth., A.-S., Dan.), nu ; Lat. nunc; Gr. vvv^ written formerly nouthe. NowADAYs=woi« of days, or now on, i.e. in these days. Oft, (A.-S., Ger.) oft, possibly from ofeatan, to hasten. Often, „ „ „ „ Once, an old genitive form for on-es ; so twi-es, thri-es, &c. Only = one like. Perhaps, •per=thro2igh] haps=r c/mnces, from (A.-S.) habban. Q,ijiCKLY=:quick-like, (A.-S.) cwician, to make alive. Quite, from verb to quit, i.e. to leave quietly; Lat. quietus. Rather, comparative of (A.-S.) rathe, swift, early. Scarcely, (Dutch) skears, unfrequent. Soon, properly means ad priniam vesperam (A.-S.) sona. Stark, (Germ.), really means strong. Thus, possibly from (A.-S.) thses, gen. of thset. Too, strengthened form of to, q.v. To-MORROW, To-day =f//e morrow, this day ; morrow from(A.-S.) myrran, to dissipate {night). Mil I :\ I! ■ilil ii ETYMOLOGICAL DERIVATIONS. 153 liddle thing an troweth ; lestions; ab, 3gative ques- vvvy written isten. Ihri-es, &c. .) habban. [uietus. ona. Vert, (Fr.) vrai; (Lat.) verus, true. Yes, (A.-S.) geae, visibly. (Fr.) ayez. Yea. See above, Nay^ No. Yesterday, (A.-S.) gestrinan, to acquire^ and dseg, a day. .»^r from (A.-S.) CHAPTER V. ABSTBAGT DERIVED NOUNS. 1. The first class of these nouns ends in d or n. These, Home Tooke supposes to be really participles or adjectives. BRAND=brenn'd, i.e. burnt, from (A.-S.) byrnan, to hum. Blind =blinr»'d, from (A.-S.) blinnan, to stop, to cease. BREAD=brod, from (A.-S.) breowan, to brew. *CjWARD=cower'd, from to cower down. CuD=chew'd, from (A.-S.) ceo wan, to chew; hence cow and law. Dastard =dastr'd, from (A.-S.) dastrigan(?), to terrify. FiELD=felled, i.e. trees ; to fell, i.e. make to fall. Flood, LouD=flow'd and low'd ; ex. the ' lowing ' herd, Head=(A.-S.) heafod, hebban, to heave, or lift up. ODD=owedj i.e. one due, to make even. Shred, Sherd, i.e. (A.-S.) wcyrian, to sheer or cut. 'WiU)=iwilled, i.e. self-willed. Fiend =fiand, (A.-S.) fian, to hate. FRiEND=freond, (A.-S.) freon, to love. 'REi^'T=bended. Draught, (A.-S.) dragan, to draw. Gaunt, (A.-S.) gewanian, to wane. HAFT=haved=hav'd, from tc have or hold. Hilt, by which the sword is held. Malt, Mould, (Fr.) mouille, from mouiller, to moisten-, or (0. N.) maltr=ro«e/t. HmET^tied. * Wedgewood gives (Lat.) cauda, (Wallon) cow, the tail, possibly referring to the picture of a terrified animal crouching with his tail between his loga. ■>'^^Mflll>:,, «i| 154 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. T/LT, (A.-S.) tilian, to raise. Twist, (A.-S.) twynan, to twist. Want, Wane. See gaunt, «upra. Bacon, (A.-S.) bacan, to bake; possibly from buchen, or beechen, belonging to the beech tree. Barren.— ftarrefZ, or stopped up. BEARN=6orrt into life. Churn, (A.-S.) cj^ran, to turn ; whence also, according to Tooke, chair, car, chariot, &c. Craven =5we who has craved his life. Dawn, (A.-S.) dagian, to grow light. Heaven, (A.-S.) hebban, to lift up. Leaven, (Fr.) lever, to raise. S)TEH}^=:stirred part ; (A.-S.) styrian, to more. (A.-S.) stj^ran, to steer. Yarn, (A.-S.) gearwan, to prepare by spinning. BRAWN=boaren=macZe of pig. Taylor, in his Words and Places, derives the word from Braun, a German who lived but recently ! Tills derivation is disposed of by Ps. cxix. 70 : * Their heart is as fat as brawn.' 2. The second class of these abstract derived nouns consists of those which end in th. According to Tooke these are really third persons singular, present tense, of verbs. It should be observed, however, whether this be true or not, that such words as smith, youth, ^c. end in * th ' in A.-S. and are nouns in A.-S. ALE=aloth, it infiameih, (A.-S.) aelan, to inflame. Birth =beareth, (A.-S.) beran, to bear, BROTH=breweth, (A.-S.) breowan, to brew. Length =lengeth, (A.-S.) lengian, to prolong. Breadth =br8edeth, (A.-S) brsedan, to widen. Depth =dippeth, (A.-S.) dippan, to plunge. Height =heafeth, (A.-S.) hebban, to raise. Dearth =deareth, (A.-S.) derian, to hurt. Drought =drugoth, (A.-S.) dr^gan, toeojjpeZ, to dr^, whence drcme, drain. li]Aina=eareth, (A.-S.) erian, to plough. im EryMOLOGICAL DERIVATIONS. 155 Faith =fflBgeth, (A.-S.) fsegan, to fix. Filth =defileth, (A.-S.) fylan, to pollute. Girth =girdeth, (A.-S.) gyrdaii, to surround. Growth =groweth, (A.-S.) g rowan, to grow. HARM=harmeth, (A.-S.) ha^rman, to injure. HEALTH=heaIeth, (A.-S.) helan, to cover up. Knave =nafath, (A.-S.) nab ban, to have not. LiGHT=5lighteth, (A.-S.) leohtan, to lighten. MATH=inayeth, (A.-S.) magan, to he able. MiRTH=myrreth, (A.-S.) myrran, to dissipate. MuRTHEB ; from the same verb, also morning and morrow. MoNTH=mooneth. Mouth, Moth, (A.-S.) metian, to feed; whence also meat. RuTH=rueth, (A.-S.) hreowan, to bewail. SEEA.'TR^slieadeth= shadeth, (A.-S.) sceadan, to shade. SiGHT=seeth, (A.S.) aeon, Brunt, i.e. burnt mid-part Bronze Brand Auburn Brandy Daoian, to dawn Bay Daisys day's eye Dawn CeJLpian, to exchange, Cheap Chapman Deor, an animal De«T Durham Derby barter, or Chipping seU Chepstow DSAOAN, Draw Cheapside to drew Drag, dnggle Eastdieap | Dray 0] ft l :i 158 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. Saxon English Derivatl-ves Saxon English Derivativea Dredge Fetter Drain Fetlock Draught Fik, Foul Dkawian, Dew Fulsome to moisten Dough Filthy Drincan, Drink FUOEX, Fowl to drink Drench a bird Fowler Drown Fowling Drunkard Gast, Ghost, ghostly Dryoan Pry a spirit Ghastly Drought Aghast Drug \ Gas Drypan Drip Gykdan Yard Drop i Garden Dribble ' Girdle Droop Gird, girth Driblet God Good Drivel Gospel Dbman, Deem Gossip = god-sib = to Judge Doom akin to God Doomsday GOEST, Gorse Faran, Fare furze Gooaeberry = gorse- to go Farewell berry Ferry Graf AN, Grave Fed AN, to feed Food Feed to dig Groove Grove Graft Fodder Foster =foodster Grub FlAN, Fiend Grapian Grapple to hate Geipan Gripe Fenqan, or Fangs Geopian Grope FoN, to catch Finger Group Grapnel Grape Fboh, Fee Grovel cattle, money Feudal Habban Have Fle6gan, Flee, fly, flighty Haft to fly Fledge Hap Fleet Happy Flit, Flutter Behave Fluster Perhaps Flurry 1 Helan, Heal i£6f Foot ! to cove':' up Hale 1 p' "? ftTYMOT-OnirAT, DRRTVATI0N8. isO ti«t.xon l.iijjlu'i . crlviu i\i Hoalth Hail Holy Hallow Hall Hold Hole Hell Hull Whole Hi.M, Home a dwelling Hamlet Westerham, &c. Hangian Hang, hinge Hbaldan Hold Behold Halt Halter Hilt TTkfan, Heave to lift wp Heaven Heavy Head Hat Hut Haven Hlidan, Lit to cover up Lot Blot=be-hlot Cloud =ge-hlot HSABHIAK, Eeady to hasten Eathe, rather lt^S)LA Lead Leader Lad Lass=ladd6S8 Ladder Loadstone LSTIN, Let to hinder Latun, Late to delay Lattei 1 Last Siixon English Derivatives LlCUAN Lie Lay Lair Law Lea Ledge Lodger Low Lower Maoan, May to be able Might Dismay . Man? Main Ter-magant MiENGAN, Among to mix Mongrel P^DH Path Paddle Footpad PiCAN, Pick Pic, Peak a point Beak Pike Pitch Pyndan, Pen to enclose Penfold Pound Reafian Rob Bereave Rover , Robber Raveu Recan, Reck, reckless to heed Reckon SCAPAN, Shape to shape Friendship Landscape SCEADAN, Shade, shadow to cover Shed Sheathe Scatter I I * i 01 II I ''»'l I il 1*1 i I if 160 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANOUAGB. Saxon English DenrativeB Saxon EnglJflh DerivatiT« SCEOTAN, Shoot, shot St^pan, Step to shoot Shout to raise Steep Shuttle Steeple Shutter Sheet STiaAN, Stick to stick Stitch SCEEAN, OP Scar Stake SCYBAN, Scarf Stock to divide Score Stockade Share Steak Sharp Stocks Shroud Shears Stioan, Stage Sheer to mount Stair Shire, sheriff Stye Shore Storey Short, i.e. shor'd Stirrup =6tig-rap. Shred mounting rope Stoc, > Stow, \ Stow SCUFAN, Shove, shovel Bestow to shove Shuffle a place Steward, i.e. stow- Scuffle JT ward Scoop Stykan, Stem SCYiAN, Scale to move, or Starboard to divide SheU govern Stores Scalp Stir Scallop Shale TiLlAN, Till Skill to raise or Toll Skull lift up Toil „, .„. 1 according Tynak, Tiller Ten J Tooke to enclose Town Slawian, Slow Tunnel to be slow Sloth Wanian, Wane • Slug to lessen Wan Sluggard Want Slack , Gaunt Snican, Sneak Wauian, Aware to creep Snake to beware Beware JL Snail = snae-gel, dim. Wary Wardian SOTH, Sooth Guardian true Soothsayer Warden Spinnan Spin Warder Spindle Wardrobe Spider Wax, sword ETTMOLOOICAL DERIVATIONS. 161 Saxon English DerlTatives Saxon Engllah DeriratlTM Warrant WiTAN, Wizard Warn to know Witnesi Wit Wbfaw Weave Wistful Woof Wife Woman = woof-man, Wbecan, Wreak to punish Wreck Wrack weaving-man Wretched, wretch Wbo, Way WuiNOAN, Wring, wrong a way Waggle to ivring, Wrench strain, press Wrangle Wegan, to hear, to weigh Waggon Wain Weigh (anchor) Wtlbn, a slave Villain Wave Wbithan, Wreathe Awkward = away- to twist Writhe ward Wroth Wrath WiSSIAN Wise, wisdom Wry CHAPTER VII. SOVBGES OF WOBDS. 1. The iio.ds of our language may be conveniently divided into three classes : (i) primary ; (ii) secondary ; (iii) tertiary. 2. .Primary words are mostly Anglo-Saxon. They express the most simple ideas, the most common natural objects, all ordinary actions, the fundamental necessities of a people, the designations of kindred, the ordinary terms of traffic, the strongest natural feelings and emotions. From this source are derived the names of the winds, the seasons, and divisions of time ; the pronouns, numerals, preposi- tions, conjunctions, adverbs, auxiliary verbs, and almost all words in our national proverbs. 3. The secondary words are mostly of N. -French origin. To this class belong those words that express not things necessary^ but those that are ben^cial ; that appertain to dignity and minister to luoaury; 'k 4* '% 1 i! I ^ Ji :. 1^1 Ml IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 1^ 11.25 i^yjg |Z5 m JJHi J 2.2 *• 1. 1.4 11.6 Photographic Sdences Corporation 23 WfST MAIN STMIT WnSTIR.N.Y. MSM (716)«72-4S03 •^ \ iV ^. -r'-. <^ 4R> ;\ «>. ^0 f Cv ^ 162 AKALTBIS 09 tHE ENOLISH LAKOVAOB. w . abstreict and general tetTns; those especially which belong tt; i&u classes — laiOj warj chivalry^ and the chase. 4. To the tertiary division belong words pertaining to art, science, philosophy, and theology ; all scientific and technical terms. These are directly classical, and mainly of Latin origin. 5. Of words in Modern English about five-eighths are Anglo- Saxonj and two-eighths Latin^ direct or indirect^ through Norman- French. 6. The occupation of Britain by various races will be shown he re- ader by the prefixes and afiixes, &c. of the geographical terms we employ. In addition, we have a few words bequeathed to us by the first Roman occupation^ a.d. 43 to a.d. 418 ; a group of Latin eccle- siastical terms, introduced by Roman worship subsequent to the mission of Augustine ; a small Celtic element ; and, finally, words imported from the languages of every nation with which we have been brought into connection by war, commerce, or any historical circumstances. 7. Celtic Words. The following words^ as being most familiar to us, are taken firom a longer list given by Mr. Gamett, in vol. {.'Proceedings of the Phil. Society : — EngUih Wdah TtngHah Wdah TfnglUli Wetah Basket basgawd MXIOOT mwygl Bachkb rhasg BCTTOK botwn Fbibzb firis Rde rhim Balokb-I DASH J baldorddus Fumnu. Griddlb fi^el greidell Bug Knock rhnwch cnocs rap Bran bran Obubi. grual FUSOB < ixi%—decep- BUOBBAB bwg FUUTNEL gwlanen Hon Cabin caban Goww gwn Whd gweddu Cu>UT olwt Housing hws Wain gwain Cbookkbt Cockboat rcrochan, a cwcLfttboat Kn.N Lath Mattock cylyn liath matog Waxx WlCKBT gwall= rampart gwioea = a f daataeth=> Mop mop iUOedoor Daimtt < ehoiee Task tasg Tbtjdob tioddi I morul Pan pan 1 Dabm dam Pkk peg ETYMOLOGICAL DERIVATIONS. 16b 8. The few words bequeathed to us from the Roman occupatioii, AJ> 43 to A.D 418, are chiefly geographical names : — Lancaster, Chester, Exeter, &c., castra, a camp. Street, Stratton, Btr&t&j a paved way, Pontefract, pons, a bridge, Lincoln, colonia, a colony, Portsmouth, portus, a harbour, FossBURT, fossa, a ditch, Bailet, Bailiff, vallum, a rampart. 9. Words derived from Latin, relating to church ritesj ceremo- nies, offices, &c. were introduced during the four centuries subse- quent to the mission of Augustine. — Vide Ecclesiastical TermSf chap. XVIL 10. Nautical terms are chiejly Danish and Dutch ; such as, Block Bowsprit Skates Spoor Veer Boom Reef (verb) Sloop Shiver Wear (ship) Boor Schooner Smuggle Taffirail Yacht (Dan.) 11. Italian words chiefly relate to banking and the fine arts : — Balustrade Banditti Bravado Bravo Bust Canto Caricature Carnival Charlatan Cupola Ditto Dilettante Farrago Folio Gazette Gondola Grotto Harlequin Improvisatore Regatta Influenza Scaramouch Lava Manifesto Motto Opera Pantaloon Piazza Portico Sketch Soprano Stanza Stiletto Stucco Studio Tenor Terracotta Torso Umbrella Virtuoso Vista Volcano Zany 12. Frenoh words chiefly refer to military matters ; besides which we have such as Beau Billet-doux Belle Bon-mot Belles-lettres Bouquet 13. Spanish:— Alligator Armada Armadillo Barricade Cambist Carbonade Owbine Cargo Chocolate Cigar Creole Desperado Don Duenna D^enner Depot Eclat Embargo Flotilla Gala Grandee Grenade Jennet Ennui Envelope Environs Musquito Mulatto Negro OUo Paroquet Platina ii2 Penchant Soiree Trousseau Poncho Punctilio Savannah Sherry Tornado Verandah 164 ANALYSIS Of THE ENGLISH LANGFAGE. 14. Portognese: — Ayah Caste Commodore Fetish Port wine Cash Cocoa Compound Mandarin Palaver 15. Arabic: — Admiral Camphor Fakir Mohair Scullion Alchemy Carat Firman Monsoon Shrub Alcohol Caravan Gazelle Moslem Sirocco Alcove Caravanserai Giraffe Mosque Sofa Alembic Cipher Harem Mufti Sultan Algebra Civet Hazard Mummy Slyrup Tabor Alkali Coffee Jar Nabob Almanac Cotton Lake Nadir Talisman Altar (?) Crimson Lemon • Naphtha Tamarind Amber Damask (?^ Damson (?) Lime Nard Tambourine Ambergris Lute Opium Tariff Arrack Divan Magazine Ottoman Vizir Azimnth Eli-nr Mameluke Saffron Zenith Cadi Mattress Salaam Zero Caliph Emir Minaret 16. TnrkiBh :— Bey Chouse Kiosk Tulip Chibouk Janissary Sash Seraglio 17. Persian:— Azure Chess Jackal Pasha Sherbet Balcony Dervise Jasmin Pawn (in chess) Simoon Barbican Emerald Kaffir Saraband Taffeta Bashaw Hookah Lilac Scimitar Tiffin Bazaar Howdah Musk Sepoy Turban Check(mate) Indigo Orange (?) Shawl 18. Hebrew:— Abbey Cabal Halleltyah Manna Shibboleth Abbot Cherub Hosanna Sabbaoth Talmud Amen Ephod Jubilee Sabbath Babbi Behemoth Gehenna Leviathan Seraph 19. Hindustani:— Banian Calico Lac Palanquin Bupee Batta Coolie Loot Pariah Sandal (wood) Betel Cowrie MuUagatawny Punch Sugar Buggy Dimity Muslin Pundit Suttee Bungalow Jungle Pagoda Bi^ah Toddy BTYMOLOGICAL DERIVATIONS. 20. Halay:— 165 A-muek Bamboo Bantam Caddj Caoutchouc Curry Ciii^ta Gamboge Cockatoo Godo^ Cre«Be Gtong Gutto percha Orang-outang Junk Mango 21. Ghineie:— Bohea Congou HjBon Nankeen 22. American: — Cadque Calumet Condor Lama Ifaice Moccasin Pampas Pemmican 23. Peruvian:— 24. Polynesian:— Tattoo 25. Caribbean:— Pekoe Satin Potato Squaw Wigwam Tobacco (W. I.) Battan Sago Spj Tea Tomahawk Tomata Hurricane (West Indian) Charki -;«•*«? meat 26. Anoient Carian :— Anoitot Hnbian :— Ancient Egyptian : Ancient Syrian : Ancient Lydian : Ancient Penian: — Taboo Hammock Mausoleum Bfjrbarous Ammonia Cyder Mseauder Kangaroo Paradise The abore are chiefly taken from Adams' English Lanyu^ i: 166 ANALTBIS OF THB BNGLIBH LAITGUAOB. CHAPTER Vni. aiOORAPHIOAL W0SO8. § 1. Roman. The Roman occupation of Britain, from a.d. 43 to a.d. 418, bequeathed to us five or six terms : — Gastra, a camp Strata, a paved road CoLONiA, a colony PoRTUs, a harbour Pons, a bridge Fossa, a ditch Vallum, a rampart These, in various forms, will be found as below, in names of places. 1. Gastra; as, caster: Ex. Dcmcaster^ Lancaster j Caaterton t* l> It n » }) Castor Caistor „ cester Chester » )) » cister ETER n Castor Caistor Jilt;, Oloucester Chester, Winchester Bedcister Exeter y formerly Excestre, i.e. Camj on the Exe. 2. Strata; as. Street: Ex. Watling Street^ Streetthorpe Strat it ft ii Stret Streat „ Stratford „ Stretford „ Streatham Stradbroke, 1* n n n „ • „ Strad 8. Colonia; as,C0LN: Ex. Lincoln. 4. PoRTus „ Portsmouth^ Porchester, Port$ea^ 6. Pons „ Pontefract. 6. Fossa „ Fossway, Fossbridge, 7. Vallum „ Wallbury. BTTMOLOaiCAL DBBIYATIONB. 167 { 2. Saxon. SUOB. Ash mwmng aah as, Ashford Beck block „ Wansbeck BOTL dwelling „ Harhottle Bero hill „ Iceberg Borough, Burt a fortified town „ St. EdtnoruTa Bury Croft a email enclosed fielc I „ Woodcraft Ea a stream „ Chelsea Et an island „ Jersey— CcBBar' 8 laL Feld a field Fen a marsh „ Fenchurch Fleet ariyer „ Purfieet Ford ' Forth Firth . sFiORD anarmof the sea „ Carlingford Frith ^ Ham a dwelling „ Nottingham Hamoei t a meadow „ Westemhanger Hlaws a LAW a rising ground „ Bermck-law Holt a wood „ Neville-holt Htrne a comer (also Danish) Hurst a copse „ Penshurst r a low shore or land- \ ing-place for ships } HiTHE „ Hythey Rotherhithe f a water-channel with t raised banks } • Lode „ Evenlode Lea, L] ET a meadow „ Madingley Mere a lake „ Windermere Mersh a marsh „ Mickelmersh Mos a swamp „ Chatmoa Mtln a mill „ Milnthorpe ^ Ness a promontory „ Dungeneas Ofer ashore „ Wendover Seta r a settlement „ Dorset Shade 8 portion cut off „ Whipsnade i I '9 [■4 I 168 ANALYSIS OF THB ENGLISH LANGUAGE. Sazoii. Stead Stoo, Stoke Stow Ton Weald, Wold WiC, WiCJH (Lat viouB) Worth Thorp Den Odtio. AUGHIN Ard, Aird Bal Ben or Pen Blair Bottom Brae Cairn Caer Comb COMP Craig Carrick Crick CUL Dun Glen Cl= Kin Kiir Chin } Meaning. a place a place a place a town a forest a town land, a close a village a valley, a receptacle as, Hampstead „ Basingstoke „ Chepstow „ Wigton „ Weald of Kent „ Oreenwioh „ Tamworth „ Milnthorpe „ Marden. as, Auchinleck Ardnamuchan »> § 8. Geltio. Itaning. afield a hill, a promontory a village a head, a mountain a field clear of wood a valley or low ground „ Bottomley J a rough hiUy piece of ) I ground \»Brmmr a heap of stones „ Cairngorm „ Balvwral „ Ben Nevis, Penrith „ Blair Athol } a fort or hill )) Carlisle, Caerleon the low partof the valley „ Compton a craggy hill the back or hind part a hill or fort on a hill a narrow valley chapel I- a cape Craigmillar . „. Carrickfergus Crick Howell „ Dumbarton^Huntingdon „ Glen.Tilt jClosebum s Chapel of "I Osborne a cape or comer u Kent ETTMOLOGICAL DERIVATIONS. 160 CMtfe. Meuiliig. 1 1 Inch Ennis > an island as, Inchcape Sock 1 TwVRR a mouth of a river ), Inverness Abkb (North of Ghrampians, In- var ; south of ditto, Aber) „ Aberwickf i.e. Berwick iLaunceston— Church oj " t St. Stephen \ Llan a chtirch Lm a deep pool „ Linlithgow yKing'sLi/nn i Tbi a town (Oswestry = town of St. * "t Oswald Ro8 a promontory „ Rostrevor • Strath a broad valley „ StrathjUldsaye. j i § 4. Soft&dinavian. 1 fttandliiATiM. MeMilng. 1 1 1 Ark a temple or altar as, Arkholm Aroh „ „ „ Orimsargh \ Beck a brook „ Caldbeck j Brek a steep „ Norhrek Brik „ „ Killhricks BoL a dwelling „ Thorhol Bt a town „ Orimsby Dal a valley „ Dalby Dale „ „ Scarsdale Dan 1 ^ Dank) ^^^^ „ Danby Et an island „ Orkney At »» „ Calvay \ A ») „ Qrimsa Fell a rocky hill „ Scawfell I FisKEH fish ,1 Fiskerton Ford 1 \ ■ . / ; Firth Forth an inlet (fiord) „ Seaforth Frith Fob CK a waterfall „ Micklejorce 170 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANOUAOS. ^M Hn 1 HoMnHiuTian. Umaiag. I nn ' r^ > An enclosure as, Fishguard Wtw Guard/ H 0|I| Gate a way m Sandgate H llHi Gill a valley „ Ormesgill ■ WaM Hag high pasture land „ Hag-gaU H Hi.. Haio „ H ||||i Hadoh „ „ Philip-haugh H ljl|l 4 Hoc a hill „ Langenhoc H P* Holm an island „ Langholm H 1 Kell a spring „ Kellhy H 1 * Kirk a church „ Ormakirk H 1 Orme a demigod or hero „ Orme^a head 1 a river „ Thurso ■ \ A „ • „ Skeba I Scar a steep rock „ Scarborough I \ ScAW a wood „ Scawby 1 ! ^^^^ \ a ship „ Skipwith. ; ; Ship J 1 llll Ster a place „ Ulster 1 IE ; SUTHER . j^^^B ||l Sutter south „ Sutherland ^B II Souther H II I SODOR „ Sodor and Man H III 1 < Tarn a mountain lake „ Tamsyke 1 1 I'i ■ iE"'™ a place of meeting ) y^ „ I 1 1 Ting {meeting = mote-thmg) ) H 1 ', Ding „ » u Dingwall i H 1 Thorpe) „ Milnthorpe • ^H il Throp a village ' H \ Drop „ Staindrop H 1 11 Toft a small field „ Lowes-toft H ; HI'i Vat a lake „ Tanvats 1 \ l|l:i Wig 1 11 ^j^i^ j a creek or bay „ Wigtoft ^ 1 1 11;, With a wood „ Langwith. 1 1 - ■■i-f ■■ STTHOLOOICAL DSEIVATIONS. Itl § 5. Namei of Plaoei ihowing Honnan Ooonpation. ASHBT DE LA ZOUGH, Leioestershire. Braulieu, Hampshire. Beaumaris, Anglesey. Beaumont, Oxford. Grace Dieu, Leicestershire. HURSTOOURTRAY, Sussex. HURSTMONCEAUX, Sussex. HURSTPIERPOINT, Sussex. Malpas, guards the valley of the Doe. MoNTACUTE Hill, Somerset. MONTFORD, Shropshire. MONTGOMERT, Welsh border. MiNSHULL Vernon, Cheshire. Plesht, Essex. Richmond, Yorkshire. RiEVAUX, 1 JORYBAUX, J Yorkshire. Stoke Mandsville, Bucks. in CHAPTER IX. NAMES 07 COLONIES, FOBEION PLACES, fto. § 1. Albemarle Sound, named after Monk, Duke of Albemarle, temp. Charles II. Albion, from either * Alp ' or * Alb ' (albus), * the snowy range.' Aristotle was the first to write of Britain under this name. Alleghany, derived from the name of an Indian tiibe rapidly be- coming extinct. America, from Amerigo Yespucd, a Florentine traveller, who is said to have inserted the words ' Tierra de Amerigo ' in a map published by him early in the 16th century. Its AITALTSIB OF THE ENGLISH LARObAOS. U AsanmoN Iolaiid, named after Aacension Day, the day of dJ§- coTCjy. AzoRis, 'the ialand of hawks;' acorshawk; e«=iBland (Porta- guese). Bab-el-makdeb, 'the gate of hell.' Bermudas, discovered 1522, by a Spaniard, Juan Bermudez, who happened to be wrecked on them. Baltimore, named after Lord Baltimore, the patentee of the colony of Maryland; founded 1745. Bombay (Port). Jiona Bahiazst^ the good bay.' Brisbane, founded 1828, named after a governor of this Australian colony. Britain, possibly from ' Bri-etan-ia ; ' ttan signifies country.— 71 Canada (Indian). Kanatass* a cluster of wigwams.' Ganabt, from a peculiar race of large d&gs found there; cant«=dog, and y= island. Carolina, dates from the Restoration (Charles II.; . Charleston, „ „ Columbia, named after Christopher Columbus, ceded to^ United States Government by Maryland and Virginia, 1790. Connecticut (1665), derived from Indian. Dampier Archipelago ; from William Dampier, the navigator, who discovered it August 31, 1699. Davis Strait, discovered by Captain John Davis, August 11, 1585, during his first voyage in quest of the North-west Passage. Detroit, means * narrow passage ' between Lake St. Clair and Lake Erie. Dominica, Isle of, discovered on a Sunday (dies Dominica), Nov. 2, 1493, by Christopher Columbus. Elizabeth Countt (America), so-called in honour of the mother of Prince Rupert. England, i.e. ' Angle-land :' land of the Angles. Faroe Isles (Norse), /aar =sheep, oe=isIand. Formosa (Port.)=' beautiful.' Fort Orange, formerly Dutch, now called Albany, so named after James £[., Duke of York and Albany, when the Dutch were expelled. Fukdsbicsburo, after Frederic, Prince of Wales, son of (it»cige 11. RTTMOLOGICAL DERTVATI0N8. 178 Geneva =c«nn a/on (Celtic), ' tho head of the river.' Gibraltar, yebel-al-Tarick=* the mountain of Tarik.' Good Hope (Cape of), called, by Bartholomew Diaz, Capo Tormen- toaa, the Cape of Storms, changed into itH present name by King John of Portugal. Hatti (Indian), ' a mountainous country.' Heligolamds' holy island land.' HiUALATA (Sans.), * perpetual abode of snow.' Jersey, ' Cassar's island.' JuAM Fernandez, so called from the Spanish navigator who dis- covered it. Lancaster Sound, from Sir John Lancaster, who heln^d to fit out Baffin's expedition. LiBERiAa' land of freedom.' Louisiana, so called from Louis XIY. ^ Malaga (PhoBnician), fna/aca=' salt' MALTA=3f«/ir New Bagdad, a suburb of Cairo. Batonet, from Bayonne. , Bernouse, from Fr. * Berne,'' from Hi-bern-ia* Bezant (coir.), from Byzantium. Bilboes, from Bilboa. Bonnet, from an Irish village of the same name. Calibre, possibly from Calabria (Taylor's Words and Places). See page 191. Cambric, from Cambray. Canter, * a Canterbury gallop ; ' the easy ambling pace of pilgrims going to the shrine of Thomas a Becket, at Canterbury. Carp, from Cyprus. Carpet, fit)m Cairo, where made. Carrawat, Pliny tells us from Caria. Chaltbeate, from Chalubes, a tribe of Armenia. Charlatan, derived the Italian forms ciarlatano^ cerretanoy from the city of Cerreto. Cherrt, from Cerasus in Pontus. Chestnut, from Castaneea in The^saly. Coffer, from Cyprus. CORDWAIN, from Cordova. Crayat. from Croatia. ! > 178 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANOUAGB. GuRRAMTS, from Corinth. Candt, from Candia. Coach, from * Kottsee,' a town in Hungary. Cooo.i, from the Mexican province of Choco. Coffee, from the mountains of Caffa, south of Abyssinia. 5"^*^®^' I from Damascus. Damson, J Demijohn, a glass vessel from Damaghan, a town of Khoraasan. Delft Ware, from Delfr. Diaper, from d'Ypres, in Flanders. DiMiTT, from Damietta. DiTTANT, from Dicta, a mountain in Crete. Druooet, from Drogheda. Ermine, the skin of the Armenian rat. Flash, from the gipsy squatters on the eommons around ' Flash, a village between Macclesfield and Buxton. Fustian, from Fostat, a suburb of Cairo. Gallowat, horse, derived from horses wrecked there from Spanish Armada. Gamboge, from Cambodia. Gauntlet, or Gantlope (lopesrace) ; from Ghent, where the punish- ment originated. Gauze, from Graza. Ginger {%^. jengihre), possibly from Zanzibar. Guinea, gold from the Guinea coast. Harlequin (It. Arlecchino), possibly from Arlecamps, or Champ d' Aries. Humbug, a piece of ^ Hamburg ' news, i.e. * a canard,' or £ilse report. Jalap, from Jalapa. ^ Jet (from gagate, jaet). Gagates, a river in Lycia. - Jennet, probably from Jaen, capital of one of the Moorish kingdoms in the peninsula. Latakia, irom Laodicea. Loadstone = X^e^ruA Zopzs, from Lydia (?). Lumber, the Lombards were the first pawnbrokers ; hence a room frdl of miscellaneous effects was named a Lombard (lumber) room« MaomeTi from Magnesia. STTHOLO0ICAL DEBITATIOIIB. 177 Majolica, from Majorca. Malmset {wme\ from Malvaaia, a port of the Morea. Matdukes, cherries from Medoc in the Gironde. MiLLiNEB, from Milan. MusLiN) from Moussul. NiTBE, from Nitria, a province of Egypt. Pad, Padding, from Padua. Pabchment, Charta Pergamenay used for library of Pergamus. Peach (persica)^ from Persia. Pheasant, from the banks of the Phasis. Pistol, from Pistoja, near Florence. Quince, the apple of Cydon, a town in Crete. BoAN {horse), Norman horse imported from Rouen. Sable, frur, from Siberia. Sabcenet, silken fabric, from the Saracens. . • ; ' Saioine {the fish), from Sardinia. / Saki/iNE {the precious stone), from Sardes, in Asia Minor. Sabdv, ic {smile), said to have been caused by eating the ' Herba Sardonica,' a species of ranunculus growing in Sardinia. Sedan, from the town of Sedan, in France. Seneh, from the slopes of Sinai. Shallot, from Ascalon. Shillelah, from parish of Shellelah, county Wicklow, Spaniel, from Spain. Spinach (Ar. Hispanach), Spain. Spbuce, means Prussian. Squills, possibly from Squillace. Tafett, Tabbt, silk fabrics woven in Atab, a street of Bagdad. Tabiff. Moorish cruisers sallied forth from Tarifa to plunder vessels passing through the Straits of Gibraltar. Afterwards they levied their black mail on a fixed scale of payment. Tobacco, from island of Tobago. Topaz, from Topazos, an island in the Red Sea. Tuc$, TucKEB, cloth worked at Toucques, in Normandy. Umbeb, earth brought from Umbria, in Italy. Vabnish, from the city of Berenice, on the Red Sea. ^qbst^d^ from ^he village of Worsted, neair Norwich. \i ' 178 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. I Zouave, corrupted from * shawi,' an Arab desert tribe. Vaudeville, from Vau-de-vire, in Normandy, where the enter- tainment was introduced at the end of the 14th century. CHAPTER XL r. .. WOBDS DEBIVED FBOH THE NAXES OF FEBSOHS. Algebra (At.), from Geber, an Eastern writer on Alchemy, &c. Alexandrine (verse), invented by a French poet, Alexandre Pa,ris. Blanket, first manufactured by Thomas Blacket, a citizen of Bristol. Brawn, said to be from a German cook named Braim 1 ! * In the Psalms we have, 'Their heart is as fat as brawn.' — Ps, cxix. 70. This disposes of such an idea. Burlesque (It. Burlescoj or Bemesco), from Francesco Berni, the inventor. Cereal, from goddess of com, Ceres. Chauvinism, from * Chauvin,' a braggart character introduced into plays at the period of the Eestoration, in ridicule of the Bona- partist fire-eating officev. Czar, possibly from Caesar. Dahlia, from Dahl, a Swede, who introduced the flower. » Darics, coins, so called from Darius. Debauch, from Bacchus, god of wine. Ducat, the coin of a Duke. Dunce, a disciple of Duns Scotus, the scholastic philosopher. DoTLEY, called from one Doyley, a tradesman of the Strand. Fiacre, St. Fiacre, Fiachra. An Irish saint, whose shrine was twenty-five miles from Paris. The name was given to convey- ances which fiarried the pilgrims. Gibberish, from Geber, see above, 'Algebra.' Galvanimi, from Galvani, an Italian. Gobelin, from the brothers Gobelin, dyers of Paris, temp. Louis XV. Greenpage, from Gage, a Sussex man, who introduced it. Gaoa. Admiral Vernon used to wear a Grogram coat, whence the sailors called him ^ Old Grog,' and applied the name to the mix- ture of rum and water which he first introduced on board ship. • Tft^lor, Words and Flam, p. 462. KTYMOLOaiCAL DBKTVATI0N8. 179 (Guillotine, from Guillotine, a French physician, who invented the instrument, a modem repetition of the old Scotch ' maiden.' Henchman,* possibly from Hengist, the lieutenant of Horsa. (Taylor.) Herculean, from the Greek mythological hero, Hercules. HEOTORiNa, from the Trojan hero, Hector. Hebmeticallt sealed, from Hermes Trismegistus, an Egyptian priest and philosopher. HoBSl, poflflibly from the Saxon warrior, Horsa. (Taylor.) This is fanciful. Jacket (Fr. Jaque)y from Jaque of Beauvais. Jacobins (1798), held their meetings in the hall of the Dominican or Jacobin convent. Jacobite, an adherent of James (Jacobus), the Stuart pretendei (1715). Jovial, ftwm Jove. Lazaretto, from Lazarus, the patron saint of lepers. Martial, from Mars, god of war. Mercurial, from Mercury. Macintosh, from the name of the inventor. Mansarde, from a French architect of the same name (1666). Martinet, from a strict disciplinarian in the army of Louis XIV. Mausoleum, sepulchre of Mausolus, king of Garia, built by Arte- misia, his wife. Negus, bo called after one Francis Negus. Some leading Whigs and Tories (Geo. I.) having got to high words over their cups, Mr. Negus recommended them to dilute their wine with water as he did. Orrert, really invented by Mr. George Graham, 1700, and copied for the Earl of Orrery. Panic, fear possessing sheep, from Pan, the shepherd-god Pasquinade, fix>m Pasquin, a Roman cobbler, and a noted character. He had a very marked physiognomy, and the statue of an anci^t gladiator having been exhumed, the Roman wits detected a resemblance to the cobbler, and gave the statue his name. Afterwards it became a practice to post lampoons on the pedestal of the statue. Hence the name. * More likely henoh, from haunch : the man who stands beside his maeter'a hannch. 180 A9ALTBIB OF THE ENGLISH LAirGUAGl. PjKONT, from UalutVf Apollo, who is said to haye applied it to medicinal purposes. Pander, from Pandarus, who procured for Troilus the love of Ghryseis. PhaSton, from Phaeton, son of Phoebus, who drove the chariot of the Sun unskilfully and was hurled by a thunderbolt from Jupiter into the river Po. Philippics, the orations of Demosthenes against Philip of Macedon. BooOMONTADE, from Sodomonte, a braggart, who figures in Orlando Furioso. Sandwich, from Lord Sandwich, an inveterate gamester, who be- grudged the time for a meal. Saturnine, from Saturn. Supposed to be under the influence of Saturn : dull, grave, phlegmatic. Samphire, corrupted from St. Pierre ; the name of a seaweed. Silhouette, a shadow portrait, in sarcastic allusion to M. de Sil- houette, finance minister, temp. Louis XV. / ' Stentorian, from Stentcr, a Greek herald in the Trojan war, whose voice, according to Homer, was louder than the united shout of fifty men. Spencer, from Lord Spencer, who, when Lord-Iiieutenant of beland, once in hunting had one skirt of his coat torn off. He tore ofi* the other himself, and some inventive genius made half coats and gave the name to them. Tantalise, from tiie punishment of Tantalus. Tontine, from an Italian, Lorenzo Tonti, who devised this method of insurance (1635). Taw)RT, from the fiiir of St. Etheldreda, or St. Awdrey, where gaudy finery was sold. Tram (wat), from Outram, the inventor. Zant, Itatuui corruption of Giovannis John. tettliOLOOiOAL DERIYAtlONB. 181 CHAPTER Xn. HA1ES8 OF XOKTHB, DATS, WnTDB, OOLOVBS, *•. § 1. Months and Dayi. 1. Tear, (A.-S.) gear^ from erianj to plough. Month, (A.-S.)=:moon«tA. Vid. chap. V. 2. Week, (A.-S.) weocj (Groth.) u;t/b= order. Dat, (A.-S.) dcBg^ from dagian^ to dawn. Testebdat, (A.-S.) gestrinan, to acquire ; dcBgtmd&j, 2. Season, (Lat.) satiOy a planting. Spring, (A.-S.) spring. Summer, (A.-S.) sumor or sumerj from the 9un. Winter, (A.-S.) from the unnd. Hence Winter means the windy time. 3. Januart, either from JanuSj or from ^'anua, the portal of the year. Februart, (JM.) februaref to expiate ; febrisj a ferer. March, the month of the god Mars. April, (Lat.) aperirey to open ; the spring month. Mat, (Lat.) from Maia, the mother of Mercury. June, (Lat.) from Junius Brutus, who expelled the Tarquins in this month. JuLT, (Lat.) in honour of Julius Caesar, formerly called Quintilis. August, (Lat.) in honour of Augustus Csesar. September, (Lat.) septem, the seventh month. October, (Lat.) octOf the eighth month. November, (Lat.) novem, the ninth month. December, (Lat.) decern, the tenth month. Bissextile, bo called because the sixth of the Calends of March was repeated ; occurred twice. 4. MoNDAT = day of the moon. TussDAT = day of Tuesco, a northern divinity (A.-8.). Wednesday = day of Woden, the Teutonic war-god. iim ANALYSIS OF THB ENGLISH LANOUA08. Thursday = day of Thor, Saxon deity. Friday = day of Friga, the Venus of the Saxona. Saturday = day of Seator, the Saturn of the Saxons. Sunday = day of the Sun. § 2. Winds. North, (A.-S.) nyrwian^ to bind together, to constrain. South, (A.-S.) seothan. to seethe. East, (A.-S.) yr«ian, to be angry. West, (A.-S.) wesan, to be wet, to soak. § 3. Passions. Hope, (A.-S.) hopian, to look out or after ; probably connected with yppon, to open. Joy, (Lat.) gcmdium. Fear, (A.-S.) fcer, a coming suddenly upon — a danger. Love, (A.-S.) lujian, tx) love. Anger, (A.-S.) angef vexation. Malice, (Lat.) malitia^ malum, evil. Grief, (Lat.) gravis, heavy. Hate, (A.-S.) hatian, to hate. Sorrow, (A.-S.) sorA, care, anrlety. Wrath, (A.-S.) wrath, anger. Jealousy, (Fr.) jalousie, a window-blind (Venetian), or (Lat) zelus, emulation. § 4. Colours. Auburn, (A.-S.) =a-Jron, i.e. bordering on brown. Brown, (A.-S.) ftrenwaw, to burn. Black, (A.-S.) the same word as bleak ; bldcian, to grow dark. Crimson, (Ar.) kermes, an insect producing the dye. Green, (A.-S.) grenian, to become or make green, to flourish. Grey, (A.-S.) grcsg. H. Tooke gives geregnan, to stain. Blue, (A.-S.) hldwan, to blow ; the colour seen when the clouds are blown away. Lake, (It. and Low 1-B,t,\ lacca, an Armenian ^um. ETYMOLOGICAL DERIVATIONS. 188 Pnnc, (Dan.) pincken, to sparkle, to glitter. Red, (A.-S.) readj rud. SoARLET, (Low Lat.) a-car-letunif possibly connected with car in caro. Orange, (Lat.) aurataj golden ? Umbeb, earth brought from Umbria, in Italy. Vermilion, (Lat.) vermea^ vemiiculus, a snoall worm yielding this colour. White, (Goth.) Ivwathany to foam. — Home Tooke. YellgWi (A.-S.) gealeiv. Tooke derives it from gecBlan^ to inflam<» CHAPTER Xm. PABTS OF THE BODT, fte. Arm, (A.-S.) earrn^ whence erian^ to plough. Blood, (A.-S.) hUd, from bledauy to bleed. Body, (A.-S.) bidaUf to abide. Bone, (A.-S.) ban, origin of which is doubtftil. Breath, A.-S.) be-oreth ; (^ei(/i=breath. Breast, (A.-S.) breost. Calf, (Gael.) calpuy calbUf a lump. (Icel.) kaljif the calf of the leg. Chest, (Lat.) cista. Cheek, (A.-S.)=cAcM;+«ifce (again). Ceowan, U) chew. Chin, (A.-S.) cm, cinan, to split. Eye, (A.-S.) eah, €age=eye. Ear, (A.-S.) eare=eax. Elbow, (A.-S.) eZn= ell, and bigan, to bend; the bow or bending of the arm. Finger, {A.-S.) fon, fangan, to take, to grasp. Flesh, {A.-S.) JIcbsc. Foot, (A.-S.) /o<,/eimn, to fetch. Hand, (A.-S.) hand, hentan, to hold. Head, (A.-S.) heafod, hebban, to lift up. Heart, (A.-S.) heorte. Instep, (A.-S.) anstcepauj to step forward. Jaw, (A.-S.)=scAatt' or cAcm; ; ceoM;a/i, to chev, 184 ANALTBIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. JomT, (Lat)juti^«r«, tojoin. Knib, (A.-S.) hniganf to bend. KiniCKLi, diminutive, from knee. Lip, (A.-S.) lippe ; whence to lap. Lungs, (A.-S.) lunge. Leo, (A.-S.) Ucgan^ to place, to lay. Mind, (A.-S.) mynany to remember ; (Lat.) mtn$. Mouth, (A.-S.) metian^ to eat. Nail, (A.- 8.) nagel. Neck, (A.-S.) hnecca^ hnigan^ to bend, vide ' Knee.* Nose, (A.-S.) ncss. Rib, (A.-S.) rt&, ribh. Shoulder, (A.-S.) sculder, acylan^ to divide. Skin, (A.-S.) scinauy to shine. Spirit, (Lat.) apiritus ; apiro, to breathe. Stomach, (Fr.) estomac. Soul, (A.-S.) sawlj aawoL Sinew, (A.-8.) ainu. TmQEsssthick part of the leg. Throat, (A.-S.) throte and throtu. Thumb, (A.-S.) thuma. Tongue, (A.-S.) tkingiarij to address, to speak. Toe, (A.-S) td, from tacan, to take. Tooth, {A.-S.)^tuggethj from teogan, to tug. Wrist, (A.-S.) whereby we wreat^ or pull. CHAPTER XIV. NAMES OF WEIGHTS AND MEASITEES: 1. Sterling. — Temp. Rich. I., the Easterlinga^ who dwelt in the east parts of Germany, were noted for the purity of their coinage; and, being skilfril in minting, were employed in coining, whence the name ' sterling.' — Camden. Pound, (A.-S.) pond^ pund ; (Lat.) pondua. 8oy::iui;lGir has the superscription of the sovran ; (Lat.) aupremm. ETYMOLOGICAL DERIVATIONS. 1B5 Shilling, (A.-8.) scylan, to divide. Penny, (Celtic) pen^Bhe&d. Penny is probably a diminutive, FARTHiNa=s/ourM-tn^ (ing dim. suffix) = little fourth part of a penny. Guinea, firom the Guinea coast. Floben, so called, from Florence, where first coined with the device of the lily flower. ThalebI took their names from the silver works in the Thal^ DoLLAB J or valley of Joachim. — Taylor, Words and Places. Ducat sscoin of a duke. Tester, bore the image of the king's head (teste, or tite). Gboat, like the German groschen, were great coins four times the size of a penny. Mark, was a Venetian coin, stamped with the winged lion of St. Mark. Guilder, a Dutch coin, possibly from Guelder land. Btzant, a gold coin, value 15/., struck at Byzantium. Jane, a small coin of Genoa (J&nua). Moiodore, (Portuguese) moeda de ouro=monej of gold. Stiver, a Dutch coin, hal^nny in value. (Dutch) stuyver, from stuyven, to beat fine. 2. Avoirdupois, avoir-du-pois, to have weight. Trot, so called firom the local standard of ^ Troyes. Grain, (Lat.) granum. Scruple, (Lat.) scrupuSf a sharp rock ; hence difficulty, a nicety, a small weight Dram, (Gr.) Spaxftri (drachme), so termed, for it was as much as the hand could grasp. Ounce, (Lat.) uncia, the 12th part of a pound. 8. League, (Low Lat.) leuca, (Fr.) Ueue, from locus j a district. Mile, (h&t) mille pussuum, VuBLOKQ, ajiirrow long. Fathom, (A.-S.) fcBthm. ^ \. Ell, (Lat.) ulna, the forearm. Yard, (A.-S.) geard, a rod, a measure. Inch, (Lat.) uncta, the 12th part of a foot 180 ANALT8M9 OF THE ENGLISH LANOUAOK. 4 Pint, (Low Lat.) pinta, (A.-S.) pynte^ from pyndan^ to hold. Quart, (Lat.) quartus, a fourth part of a gallon. Gallon, (Low Lat.) galo^ (l^i*>) galon, a mcuMuro containing Uimje pots. P£CK from poke, (A.-S.) pocca, a sack ; whence pocket. Also (Celtic) ; see chap VII. 8. Bushel, (Low Lat.) 6use//ii«, the origin of which is not clear. 5. Firkin, (Ger.) vtVr, four, and kin is diminutive : cf. ' farthing.' Kilderkin, (Dan.) kindeken; kind=chi\d', meaning 'small barrel.' Tierce, (Lat.) tres, the third part of a pipe. CHAPTER XV. TITLBS. Empebor, (Lat) imperator. Empress, (Lat.) imperatrix. King, (A.-S.) cyning, from cunnan, to know. Queen, ( A.-S.) ge-t&enian, ' to dwell with,' contracted cweBman. Noble, (Lat.) iwhilis. Peer, (Lat.) par, equal. Lord, (A.-S. and Lat.) hlaf, lofty, ertus, born; or (A.-S.) hlaford, loaf-giver. Ladt, (A.-S.) hlaf, raised ; ig, add ; from eacan. Duke, (Lat.) dux, a leader. Marquis, Lord of the ' Marches,* on the Welsh and Scotch borders. Earl, (A.-S.) eorl, (Dan.) eorla, connected with er or ere, signifying priority. Count, (Lat.) comes, a companion. ViscOuNT, (Lat.) vice comes. Baron, (A.-S.) beorgan, to fence or protect (with armour). — H. Tooke, Baronet, diminutive of the preceding. Sir, (Fr.) sieur, i. e. seigneur. Bishop, (Lat.) episcopus, ((Jr.) ivtoKO'triu, to overlook. Canon, (Gr.) Kayutv^a, rule. Dean, (Lat.) decanus^ C^^*) Se'«ca=ten. Sees were divided at an ETYMOLOGICAL DBRIVATIONB. J 87 early period into 'tithings/ each of which comprifled ten churches or parisheH, placed under the government of a dear Priest, (Lat.) presbytei; (Gr.) vptafivrtpotj an elder. Curate, (Lat.) CMra, one who hath the care or cure of soula. Deacon, (Lat.) diaconuSf (Gr.) iutKoyoQ, servant or minister. Parson, the peraona, or chief individual, of a parish. Some take it from parochiannar. SiXTON, corrupted from aacmtaUf the officer who looka after th<^ accessories of worship. Chancellor,* (Lat.) cancellariuHj a cancellia. Constable, (Lat.) comes atabuli^ count of the stable smaster of the horse. Marshal, (Dutch) mareachalk, q.d. magister caballommssimaBter of the horse ; or m&hre^ a horse, and achalk, a servant. Admiral, (Arabic or Turkish) emi'r-a/-6aAr=lord of the sea. Kniqht, (Ger.) knecht. Esquire, i. e. scutigery shield-bearer, (Lat.) scutum gerere^ to carry the shield. Dauphin, from Dauphin^, a province sold or given by Humbert, earl thereof, to Philip of Valois, on condition that the king's eldest son should bold it during the lifetime >f his father. Clerk, (Gr.) tcX^poc, a lot, because Matth 5u» was chosen by lot ; hence * clergy.' Seneschal, (Ijat.) senescaUus= senior servus ; scale (A.-S.), serves. Sheriff = shire-reeve ; 5/tire^=county, reeve = officer. WooDREEVE = an officer who looks after the wood. Abbot, (Hebrew) -466a = father. Nabob, (Hindoo) i\rat<7a6= gentleman. Steward = sted-ward := keeper of the place. Hence tbe name * Stewart ; ' as * Howard,^ from hold- ward, or keeper of the hold. Beadle, (A.-S.) beadf a prayer, from beodan, to pray, to cry : so beadle means * crier.' ♦ ** jp eancdlarii were officers of a court of justice, who stood ad cancelhs, at the j«iliiig8, received the petitions of suitors, and acted as intermediaries between them and the judge. To them naturally fell the office of keeping the seal of the sourt — the distinctive feature of chancellors of modem times.— Wedaewood, 188 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. Bailiff, from vallum^ a rampart : one who looks after the en- closure. Other titles will be found under the chapters relating to Military and EcCLESIASTICAIi TeRMS. i I I I CHAPTER XVL MILITABT TESMS. Arsenal, (It.) arce-navale^ or naval citadel. Cadet, (Sp.) cadetey one who enlists without pay, expecting a com- mission. Commander, (Lat.) manrfare, to entrust. Commodore, (Sp.) comendador, i.e. commander. Corps, (Lat.) corpus^ the body. Comrade, (Fr.) camerade^ (Lat.) cameraj a chamber. General, (Lat.) genus \ one who attends to general and not particu- lar arrangement. Colonel, either from (Lat.) dux colonias ; or columna, the column or pivot of the regiment ; some say (It.) colonello, formerly coronel or crown captain, from (Lat.) corona. Major, (Lat.) major, greater. Captain, (Lat.) caput, the head. Lieutenant, (Fr.) lieu tenant, (Lat.) locu7n tenens. Cornet, (Lat.) cornw, a horn. - Ensign, (Lat.) insignia. Some say corrupted from ancient. Serjeant-at-law, (Lat.) serviens. Sergeant-at-arms, (Fr.) serriant, i.e. one who dres£«:s or drills or masses men. So we speak of seiried ranks. Corporal, (Lat.) corpus, a body. Pioneer, (Sp.) j9eon, a foot soldier. Private, (Lat.) privatus, an individual. ETYMOLOGICAL DERIVATIONS. 189 IlLITART and Sentinel,* (Fr.) sentinelle, (Lat.) sentire. Soldier, (Lat.) solidus, pay. Sepot, (Pers.) sipahi, a soldier. Artillery, (Lat.) arcus and parrow. ETYMOLOGICAL DERIVATIONS. 191 Bulwark, (Fr.) boulevart, (Dan.) bollverk ; boll^ a globe or circular work. Gamp, (Lat.) campus, a plain. Port, (Lat.) /ori. . ill GTYHOLOGICAL DBRITATlONB. 195 Churchwarden, the guardian of the church. Sidesman, said to be a corruption of ' synod's man,' from the ancient custom of electing three laymen to represent the parish in * synod/ §3. Aisle, (Lat.) alOf the wing or side of a church. Belfry, (Fr.) beffroi, a watch-tower. Chancel, a cancellis, because cancelli, or bars, separated it from the area of the church. Choir, (Gr.) xopoQy (Lat.) chorus, a multitude of singers^ or dancers. Nave, (A.-S.) nafa^ the concave centre or body of a church ; hence also navel \ possibly from naviSy a ship, the symbol of the church. Pew, (Dutch) puye^ possibly (Lat.) podium^ an elevated place or balcony. Pulpit, (Ft.) poulpitre, (hat.) pulpituniy a raised place. Steeple, (A.-S.) steopl^ a tower, or steeple, perhaps from A.-S. stedp, precipitous. Vestry, the place where sacred robes were kept; (Lat.) vestiSf a garment. Font, (Lat.) fonSj fountain. §4. . Alb, (Lat.) albus, white. Chalice, (Lat.) caltx. Chasuble, (Low Lat.) casula, dim. of casa^ a house. Cope, (Low Lat.) capa, or cappa^ a cloak. Cowl, (Lat.) cucullus. Gown, (Welsh) gwn. Surplice, (Lat.) super pelliceum ; super ^ over, pellis^ akin. Paten, (Lat.) patina^ a plate, or dish. Rochet, (Lat.) rochettwm^ (A.S.) roc, a shirt or short-sleeved alb. TuNiCLE, (Lat.) tunicella, a little tunic. n k §5. CHBiSTMASssmass of Christ. MiCHA£LMAS=masB of St. Michael. n '•» III 'ID! Illi! 1) . ! t 1 1 ll 194 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. Epipha^tt, (Gr.) iimftareia = manifestation ; the manifbstation ol Christ to the Gentiles. Septuagesima, (Gr.) 70th ; really sixty-four days before Easter. Sexagesima, (Gr.) 60th ; really fifty-seven days before Easter. QuiNQUAGESiMA, (Gr.) 60th ; really fifty days before Easter. Ash Wednesday. On this day anciently penitents presented them- selves in church with ashes sprinkled on their heads. Lent, (A.-S.) /enc (iii) Equal electoral 'listricts. (iv) Paid representatives in parliament. (v) Abolition of property qualification for members of par- liament. . (vi) Annual parliaments. ETYMOLOGICAL DERIVATIONS. 197 CSovENANTER. The national covenant, professing to be based upon h document which James VI. of Scotland had signed in 1680, was drawn up and published by the four Tables : (i) Nobility, (ii) Gentry, (iii) Ministers, (iv) Burgesses ; and in their hands the whole authority of the realm was vested. They elected a general assembly, which met at Glasgow, November 21, 1638, and abolished episcopacy, ordering that every one should sign the covenant under pain of excommunication. The Covenanters prepared for war, and they entered England August 20, 1640. An agreement was signed at Ripon, October 26, 1640; com- nissioners were appointed, to whom the settlement of points in dispute were referred. This covenant, under the name of Solemn League and Covenant^ was received by the Parliament or assembly of divines, September 25, 1643. It differed essentially from the covenant of 1638, according to Hallam, and consisted of aa oath, to be subscribed by all sorts of persons in both king- doms : — (i) To preserve the reformed Religion in the Church o/ Scotland in doctrine, discipline, worship, and govern- ment. (ii) To endeavour to bring the churches of God in the three kingdoms into the nearest conjunction and uniformity in religion, confession of faith, form of church govern- ment, directory of worship, catechising, &c. (iii) To' endeavour, without respect of persons, the extirpa- tion of Popery, prelacy, and whatsoever should be found contrary to sound doctrine and the power of godliness. (iv) To preserve the rights and privileges of the Parliaments and the liberties of the kingdoms, and the king's person and authority in the preservation and defence of the true religion and true liberty. (v) To endeavour the discovery of incendiaries and malig- nants who hinder the reformation of religion, and divide the king from his people, that they may be brought to pimishment. (vi) To assist and defend all such as should enter into this Covenant. m' I M •will Mllll 111 (It I' ti '!'i !i^ -i 198 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. A large number of beneficed clergy who refused to subscribe were ejected. Charles II. signed it reluctantly at Spey (1660). In 1661 the House of Commons ordered it to be burnt by the common hangman, and in the same year Scotland renounced , the Covenant, and declared the supremacy of the king. Exchequer, Court of. This name was derived firom ' the table at which the sittings of the court were held — a four-cornered board about 10 feet long and 5 feet broad, fitted in manner of a table . to sit about, on every side whereof is a standing ledge or border four fingers broad. Upon tliis board is laid a cloth, bought in Easter term, of black colour, rowed with strakes distant about a foot and a span. On the squares of this '' scaccarium," or chequered cloth, counters were placed to assist in making the needful computations.' Fenian. Afler the ludicrous attempt at insurrection in 1848, made by Smith O'Brien, Mitchell, Meagher, and others, a new secret society of conspirators was formed by Stephens, who seems to have derived his method and organisation from tho revolu- tionary Polish committees. To this new society he gave the name of * Phoenix,' as symbolical of * resurrection ' (i. e. insur- rection). The difficulty experienced by an Irish peasant in pronouncing the *ii^jrd led, no doubt, to its corruption into * Fenian.' The laborious attempts made from time to time to derive the name from early Irish history, or the Phoenicians, remind one of the squabbles of the antiquaiies ab«ut 'Bill Stumps his mark,' in the pages of Pickwick ! Fifth Monarchy Man. A sect of republicans who appeared in England in 1645, and taught that Christ was about to reappear on earth, and establish a new imiversal monarchy. In 1653 they held weekly meetings in London, at which they de- nounced Cromwell as * the man of sin,' ' the old dragon,' and 'the dissemblingest perjured villain in the world,' in conse- quence of which he put a stop to their proceedings. They reappeared, however, at the Restoration, and stirred up a riot in which several lives were lost (1661). GuELPH, Ghibbeline. On the death of Lothaire II., Emperor of <::i BTTMOLOOICAL DERIVATIONS. 199 Germany, in 1137, Conrad, Duke of Franconia, Ron of Frede- rick of Hohenstaufen, Duke of Swabia and Lord of Wiblingen, corrupted into Ghibbeline, was elected his succesHor. His right to the throne was contested by Henry the Proud, Duke of Saxony and Bavaria, nephew of Guelph II., Duke of Bavaria. He yfka declared an outlaw, and shortly afler died. Hi3 adherents transferred their allegiance to his son Henry the Lion, and the empire was divided into two factions, — the adherents of tJonrad, or Ghibbelines, and the adherents of Henry, called Guelphs. The titles were first used at the battle of Weinsberg, 1140. When the strife terminated in Germany, it continued in Italy. The supporters of the popes were called Guelphs ; those of the emperor, Ghibbelines. Charles of Anjou expelled the Ghibel- lines from Italy. Girondist. A political party during the great French Revolution, 80 called because its leaders were deputies from the Gironde. In principle they were really Moderate Republicans. Sometimes this party was called ' Brissotine,' sometimes the ' Plain,' be- cause they sat on the floor of the Convention. Their opponents were called ' Jacobins,' because the meetings of their clubs took place in a building formerly a convent of Dominicans or Jacobins. These men, headed by Robespierre, Danton, Marat, St. Just, and others, were called the ' Mountain,' because they sat on the highest seats ranged round the Hall of Convention. The leading difference between these two parties may be briefly stated thus : — The aim of the Girondists was to consti- tute France a federal republic. The aim of the Jacobius was manifested in their motto, ' A Republic, one and Indi- visible.' This great question between republicans of two shades has been repeated in the war between the Northern and Southern States of America, the motto of the Southern States being ' States' Rights,' i. e. a federal union ; and the principle of the Northern republicans, * A Republic, one and Indivisible.' Huguenot. So called from (Ger.) eidgenossen^ confederates; or from Hugues, a noted Calvinist of Geneva : a name given to French Protestants of the 16th century, first persecuted in 200 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGB. ' k 1559, and bo called in 1561. By the revocation of the Edict ol Nantes, 1685, they were deprived of toleration, and many took refuge in neighbouring countries. Jacobites. The party that supported the Stuart Pretenders in 1715 and 1745. In general, adherents of the Stuart dynasty. Levellers. A party, which desired that ' all degrees of men should be levelled, and an equality established both in titles and estates throughout the kingdom,' obtained the supremacy in the army of the Long Parliament in 1647. They denounced all existing forms of government, and clamoured for the blood of Charles I. They raised an insurrection in 1649, and Cromwell took measures to suppress them. Vide ' Fifth Monarchy Man.' Lollards. A sect in Germany, who dissented from the Church before she renounced Popery. They sprang from William Lollard, who began to propagate his opinions in 1315, and was burned at Cologne 1351. The name was afterwards given to the disciples of Wickliffe. MuGGLETONiANS. A scct, followers of Lodowicke Muggleton, a journeyman tailor, who in 1651 commenced as a religious teacher, declaring that he and his companion, John Reeve, were the two witnesses mentioned in the * Book of Revelation.' Muggleton was tried at the Old Biiley for blasphemy, and con- '^ victed Jan. 17, 1676. Ha died March, 1677. The Muggle- tonians were in existence i^ the middle of the last century. ' It is also to be noticed that, during the civil troubles, several sects had sprung into existence, whose eccentricities surpassed anything that had before been seen in England. A mad tailor, named Lodowick Muggleton, wandered from pot-house to pot-house, tippling ale and denoimcing eternal torments against those who refused to believe on his testimony, that the Supreme Being was only six feet high, and that the sun was just four miles from the earth.* — Macaulay's History of England, vol. i. p. 170. Mountain. Vide supra, * Girondist.' N^ONCONFORMiST. A name used generally to describe dissenters from the Church of England, was first given to those who re- fused to comply with the Act of Uniformity (2 & 3 Edward VI. K? ETYMOLOGICAL DERIVATIONS. 201 e. 1.) p»fl8e9 an 1549. On the passing of the Act of Uniformiiy of Charles XL, 2000 of tlie clergy voluntarily resigned their livings on St. Bartholomew's Day, 1662. The Nonconformists held a bicentenary commemoration of this event in 1862, though no prominence was given to the fact of how they had become possessed of livings which the Act compelled them to relinquish. Orangeman. This name was given by the Roman Catholics :■} the Protestants of Ireland, on account of their support to W liiiam III., Prince of Orange. It was first assumed in 1795, as the designation of a political party, by the Protestants who formed loyal associations in opposition to the Society of United Irish- men, organised in 1791. NoN/UJROR. Sancroft, Archbishop of Canterbury, the Bishops of Bath and Wells, Ely, Gloucester, Norwich, and Peterborough refused to take the oath of allegiance to William III., and were deprived Feb. 1, 1691. The Bishops of Chichester and Wor- cester also refused, but died in the interim. To these men and their followers the term nonjurors was applied. They divided into two sections in 1720, in consequence of a dispute concerning the administration of the Communion.' By 9 Geo. I. c. 18, 1723, they were subject to the same taxes as Papists, and conducted their worship in hired rooms or private houses. They became extinct in 1780. Peelite. a name given to that section of the Conservative party which, after the rupture caused by the repeal of the corn laws, still adhered to Sir Kobert Peel. Most of them joined the Liberal party. Protestant. The second Diet of Spires, in 1529, decided that religious differences could only be decided by an ecclesiastical council, thus entirely disallowing the right of private judgment. A solemn protest was made against this decision by the Lutheran princes of Germany, April 19, 1529, in consequence of which the members of the Reformed Churches have since been known as Protestants. The protest was drawn up by Luther and Melanchthon. Parliament. ' At the close of the reign of Heniy III., the curia ■A 4 202 1 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. regis was called the King's Parliament, a term then employed to express any assembly met for the purpose of conference.' — Parry, Parliament and Councils of England. It did not then denote a legislative assembly, though the term began to be used in that sense at the commencement of the reign of Edward II. (1307-1317). The two branches of the legislature assembled in the same room as late as 1342. Their joint , assent became necessary before any act could become law, in the reign of Edward IV. (1461-1483). Puritan. According to Fuller, the name was first applied in 1564 (or, as others say, 1569) to persons who, in the time of Queen Elizabeth, refused to adhere to the episcopal form of worship. In the reign of Charles I. it was chiefly applied to the Indek pendents. RiBBONMEN. Owing to the secret nature of the constitution of this faction of Irish Roman Catholics, the date of origin is not known. Some authorities refer it to about the commencement of the present century : others fix the date twenty years after. Their outrages are mentioned in March, 1820, and they have ever since been intimately connected with the troubles of Ireland. Numerous murders were committed by them in 1858 and 1862. Radical. The extreme democrats in England first received the name of Radical about 1819. Derived fi:om radix (root) because the politicians so called desire to upset or alter tie constitution from the root or foundation. Tory and Whig.* The origin of these names is a subject of contro- versy. Macaulay says (vol. i. p. 267), ' Opponents of the court were called Birminghams, Petitioners, Exclusioniste. Those who took the king's side were called anti-Birminghams, AbhorrerSj Tantivies. These appellations soon became obsolete, * 1648. 'Argyle drew to aoms in the Highlands, whilst the Western peasantry, assembling and headed by their divines, repaired to Edinburgh, This insurrection is called the Whigamore's Raid, from the word whig whig, i.e. get on, get on, which is used by the Western peasantry in driving their horses ; a name destined to become the distinction of a powerful party in British History.'— Sir W. Scott's Tales of a Grandfather. I ETYMOLOGICAL DBKIVATI0N8. 20^ n employed nference.' — id not then )egan to be 16 reign of B legislature Their joint )me law, in led in 1564 ne of Queen of worship. the Inddr itii^n of this rigin is not amencement years after, id they have troubles of !■ ' ' lem in 1858 ! :i eceived the ^ adix (root) I )r alter tie > ;t of contro- ents of the sclusionists. irminghamSj ne obsolete, a the Western Edinburgh. i whig whig, \ driving their ^ rty in British | but at this time were first heard two nicknames still in daily use. It is a curious circumstance that one of these nicknames was of Scotch, the other of Irish origin. In Scotland some of the persecuted Covenanters, driven mad by oppression, had lately murdered the Primate, taken arms against the Government, obtained some advantages over the king's troops, and been finally routed at Both well Brig by Monmouth. These zealots were most numerous among the rustics of the western Lowlands, who were vulgarly termed whigs (from whey, sour milk). Thus the appellation was transferred to those English politicians who were disposed to treat Protestant Nonconformists with indulgence. The bogs of Ireland at the same time afforded refuge to Popish outlaws, much resembling those afterwards known by the name of Wliiteboys. These men were then called Tories (which means robbers). The name Tory was therefore given to those who refused to concur in excluding a Boman Catholic prince from the throne.' — Macaulay. For additional information the student is referred to Notes and Queries, / Trimmer. A political party, of which Viscount Halifax (temp. Charles II.) was chief. * He (Halifax) was the chief of those politicians whom the two great parties contemptuously called " Trimmers," i.e. between both, now siding with the one, now with the other. He assumed it as a title of honour, and vindicated the dignity of the appellation. " Everything good, he said, trims between two extremes." ' — Macaulay. Trimmers were analogous to Peelites. Adullamite. a name given by Mr. Bright to Mr. Lowe and other Liberals who differed from their party on the subject of Reform (1867). The name is taken from the Scripture narra- tive of David's resort to the cave of AduUam with * all that were discontented.'' This epithet will probably be applied henceforth to a re- bellious faction of either political party. Hustings. * The most noticeable traditions of ancient liberties are associated with the places where the Things — ihe judicial «dA 204 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. ii 't; iti i legislative assemblies of the Scandinavian nations were wont to meet. . . . The Northmen introduced their Things into Eng- land. The very name survives among us as an household word. A meeting is properly the mote-thingy an assembly of free- holders, and at the hustings or housething the duly qualified householders still assemble to delegate their legislative powers to their representatives in Parliament.' — Taylor's Words and Places. Star-Ghamber. The derivation of this term is uncertain. Some say it arose from the starry decorations of the roof; others derive it from Sterra (Port.), a parchment, because it was used as a repository for contracts made with the Jews. Hallam considers this court originated in the consilium regis ordinarium — the subject of many statutes from temp. Edward ni. Though not erected it was remodelled by 3 Henry VII. (1486). Its constitution and authority were defined more par- ticularly by 21 Henry VIII. (1529), by which the President of the Council was made one of the judges. It was abolished by 16 Charles I. (1640). An unsuccessful attempt was made to revive it in 1662. The Star Chamber took cognisance both of civil suits and of criminal offences throughout the time of the Tudors. The civil jurisdiction claimed and exerted by the Star Chamber was in general such as now belongs to the Court of Admiralty ; some testamentary matters, in order to prevent appeals to Rome; and suits between corporations. The offences principally cognisable in this court were forgery, perjury, riot, maintenance, fraud, libel, and conspiracy. But, besides these, every misdemeanofu* came within the proper scope of its inquiry. Corruption, breach of trust, and malfeasance in public affairs, or attempts to commit felony, seem to have been reckoned not indictable at common law, and came in consequence under the cognisance of the Star Chamber. The mode of process Was of a summary nature. The accused person was privately examined, and if he had confessed enough to deserve sei^.tence it was immediately awarded. The more regular course of proceeding seems to have nearly resembled that of the Court of Chancery. It was BTTMOLOaiCAL DERIVATIONS. 205 held competent for the court to adjudge any punishment short of death. Fine and imprisonment were of course the most; usual. The pillory, whipping, branding, and cutting off the ears, grew into use by degrees. lemeano;ir CHAPTER XIX. PEOULIAB WOBDS. Amugker, Run-a-Muck, (Malay) amuco, a madman. Assassin, (Pers.) Hashish^ an intoxicating poison. The name of a tribe of fanatics, who lived in the mountains of Lebanon, similar to the Thugs in India. Bailiff, (Lat.) valluniy a rampart. Balderdash, possibly from the Scandinavian deity. Balder ; or Ice- landic, Balldur=:balbuties stultorum ; or Welsh, baldorddus. Barbican, (Pers.) bdla-khanehj (Mid. Lat.) barba cana, an upper chamber ; whence also balcony. Barlet Sugar, corrupted from (Fr.) sucre brule, i.e. burnt sugar. Bedlam, corrupted from the convent of St. Mary of Bethlehem, as- signed by the Reformers for the reception of lunatics. Beefeater, corrupted from Fr. buffetier, buffet = sideboard. Bigot, from bigote (Sp.), a moustache ; or from old N.-Fr. btgoty i.e. by God; or possibly corrupted from Visigothz=:a. fierce per- secutor. Blackguard, a name given to the lowest servants who attended to the pots and kitchen utensils of the great on their travels. Blunderbuss, (Ger.) biichse, applied to a rifle, a box, hence * arque- bus,' * Brown Bess,' &c. Bog Latin, i. e. bok-ledene, or book-learning. Bogie, possibly from BogUj the name of a Scandinavian deiiy. Bogus, corrupted from Borghese, an American worthy. BooBT, (Lat.) bubOf an owl ; (Gr.) (iovQ, an ox. Bosh, a pure gipsy word tor fiddle. — Blackley's Word Ooasip, Bft40, probably from Bragi,^ the Norse god of mirth and Bong. 206 ANALYSIS OP THE EXGLISH LANGUAGE. Brigand, (Fr.) brigand ; (Sp.) bregante, a footman armed ; or pos- sibly, (It.) brigarCy to strive, to brawl. Buccaneer, (Fr.) boucan, a wooden gridiron, whereon cannibals broil pieces of flesh ; a term applied to savage pirates. Buffoon, (Fr.) buffon, the fool in the pantomime, who receives the buffs or blows for the amusement of the spectators ; possibly bufo, a toad. Bunkum, a name derived from some American worthy. Burlesque, (It.) burlesco, or BernescOy from Francesco Bemi, who invented this species of composition. Cannibal, probably a corruption of Carib, or Caribal, a savage West Indian people. Canter, i. e. Canterbury gallop, taken from the ambling pace of pil- grims going to the shrine of St. Thomas of Canterbury. Charles's Wain, corrupted from ceorVs-wain, or peasant's waggon. Cheek by Jowl. Sometimes written jig by jowl=* cheek by head ' Jowl means head or gullet. Chouse, (T«rk.) chiaoua^ a messenger from the Grand Seignor, in 1609, defrauded the Turkish and Persian merchants in London of 4,000/. Coax, from cogs-meuy who, in the garb of sailors, practised on the credulity of those they met by tales of pretended shipwrecks. Country Dance, corrupted from (Fr.) contredansej i. e. a dance in which the partners faced each other. Coxswain. Cog, a fishing-boat, from (A.-S.) cceggian, to confine, and swain, a servant, or attendant. Curmudgeon (Fr.) coeur, the heart, and mechant, wicked ; or from corn-merchant, one subjected to penalties for hoarding grain. Deuce, possibly from the Scandinavian deity Tiw ; or from (Celt.) diaus, a corruption of diabolus. Dodge, to go about like a dog. DoGCHEAP : dog =* god ' or * good ; ' cA6a/>= market, or barter. Dudgeon, (A.-S.) dugan, to be strong, whence doughly. Fellow, possibly Fr. filou=.a, rogue ; or (Low Lat.) felagns, i. e. Jide- ligatus. Felon, as above, (¥T.)filou ; oxfeah, beneficium, and (Ger.) Ion, pre- Hum, i. e. * crime punished by loss of fee : ' or (Gael.^ feall, treaaon : feallan, a traitor. ETYMOLOGICAL DERIVATIONS. 207 Fiacre. St. Fiachra had a shrine at Meaux, twenty-five miles from Paris. Carriages were kept at an inn for infirm pilgrims. Fib, (It.) Jiabbare, to sing merry tunes and idle songs, as nurses do in rocking their children. Fiend, (A.-S.) Jian, to hate ; or possibly from the Finns, whom tra- dition described as malignant imps. Flash, a wild district between Macclesfield and Buxton, the gipsy squatters on which used a barbarous slang. Flitch, same aafleischj ov fiesh (Germ.). Franchise, from Frank, denotes the possession of full civil rights of the conquering race. Gab, (A.-S.) gabban, to scoff. Gaffer, (Fr.) grand-pere, grandfather, some say godfather. Galloshes, i. e. Gallo shoes, or French shoes. Gammer, (Fr.) grand'mere, grandmother, or some say godmother. Gammon, (It.) gamha, (Fr.) jambe, possibly connected with gambol. Gauntlet, vide chap. X. Gawby, perhaps a gap-y, i. e. a gaping fool, dunce, or blockhead. Gawky, (A.-S.) gcec, a cuckoo. Gewgaw, (A.-S.) gegaf, from gegifan, to give away. Gibberish, from Geber, an obscure Eastern writer on Alchemy. Girl, ( A.-S.) ceorl, properly a peasant of either sex. GoosEBERRY-FOOL, (A.-S.) fulUau, to beat, to press down. Growl, (Ger.) grollen, as if ge-rollen, to murmur. GRUFF=rough, from ge, participle prefix, and (A.-S.) ruh, or rug, or rough", p. part, of reffan, to rive. Haberdasher. Berdash was a sort of necktie. Haberdasher means berdasher. Hammercloth, i. e. hanaper or hamper cloth. In olden times it was usual to cover the hamper which contained provisions with a cloth. This hamper was placed in front of the cairriage, and served as a seat ibr the driver. HABRiDAN^one harried, or worn out, from (Fr.) harrier, to harry ; or (Wallon) hdrde'-dain, gap-toothed, applied to an old woman. — Wedgewood. Hoax, from hocus-pocus. Hocus-pocus, corrupted from Hoc est meum corpus ; the word was used in aversion to the Romish doctrine 208 1 fl Amysis OP THE .POLISH ..^atAOE. Of transubstintiation. Others d^^V •. . the Stag, fl,e perquMte of fc fce!t 7^ " "'" *^« '^^ of Hu«Buo=a pk-oe of Hamburg ne„.?r c""**^- fc^OL^ss, (Ge,-.) hausenilaslJkZ;,'^^ ^'^'^ ^<"««'«« canard Jabgok, posriWy from (It.) cC^oor / "^'°''' *'"**' 'h^Wadder ^^rrT^anwi''^^'^^'''^"''--'^- blockhead ^-^ ""'' = ''"P'^' »<> "O^^ = knoll = iead • .' ^^^'^ ff^uncata, (Ft.) ionrh/^ Ldmbep, from Lombard Th» T„ ., , ^ pawnbrokers. ' ' ^°"''"'^'' ^«« ^e fir^ b,^,„ ^^ UGBE. The OerPfl «i. tt • BTTMOLOaiCAL DERIVATIONS. 20D = Venetian win- gyrare ad aotem, aoll = head, i. e. \e Ural, sup-v Old NiCKfNikr, the dangerous water- demon of Scandinavian legends. Old Scratch, from the demon Skrattiy which still survives in the superstitions of Northern Europe. Otes, O tes, i. e. Oyez, Oyez, Hear ye, Hear ye. Pantaloon, (It.) pianta leone^ * the Planter of the Lion,* i. «. Standard-bearer of Venice; the Lion of St. Mark was the standard of Venice. PiCCAR00N=a plunderer ; (Fr.) piqueron^irom picorer,i.Q. pecorare, to steal pecora. Poltroon, (Lat.) pollice truncus^ lame, or maimed in the thumb, to escape military service. POTWALLOPER, from pot-wabblcr, i.e. pot-boiler; (A.-S.) wappelian, to boil. One who boiled a pot within the precincts of the borough, within a certain time of the election, had the right of voting. Punch and Judy, supposed to be from Pontius cum Judceis, i. e. Pontius Pilate and the Jews ; possibly a mediaeval play, or mystery. Quandary, from (Fr.) Qu'en dirai-je ? * What shall I say of it? ' Rascal, (A.-S.) a lean deer. * Riffraff, (A.-S.) redfian, to take away : tattered, worn, or worthless . people. Rigmarole, uncertain. The ragman's role occurs in Sir T. More^ Fox, Skelton, &c. Robber, (Ger.) rauben, (A.-S.) redfian, to rip, rob, take away. Scaramouch, (Fr.) escarmoucheur, a skirmisher. Scoundrel, (Lat.) abscondere, to hide. Scullion, (Fr.) escuelle, a platter ; esatllien, a washer of dishes. Shotover, or Shooter, from chdteau vert. Skipper, (Old Norse) skipveri, a sailor. Skylarking : Latham says from (A.-S.) Idc, a game, or a sport. Slubber de GhjLLiON=slubbering glutton ; (Fr.) goulu, gluttonous. Spick and Span New, (Du.) spyker a warehouse, and spange, shining. Sterling, vide chap. XIV. Tariff, tarifa. Cruisers plundered vessels passing the Straits of Gibraltar, and levied toll. See p. 177. Tatterdemallion, (It.) tattere, to tear, and mallionf of unceirtain pi^tifming and origin. 210 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. Thunder, from Thunor, or Thor, a Scandinavian deity; whence Thursday. TiNTiHARRE, a noise, or clashing ; (Fr.) tinter, to ring, and marrey a mattock. Urchin, (Fr.) herisson, (Lat.) erinaceus, a sea hedgehog. Walnut, means 'foreign' nut, from Walschland, or Italy, cf. Wales, Cornwall. : Ml ill CHAPTER XX. WOBDS IN COKMON VSE WITH OBSCVBE DEBIYATIONS. Abominable, (Lat.) ahominory from ah and omeuy really applicable to what is detestable in a religious light — of evil omen. Absurd, (Lat.) ah and surduSj deaf; such an answer as one would expect to get from a ' deaf man. Academy, (Gr.) dmSi^/u ta, a grove near Athens, where Plato and other philosophers were wont to lecture. Hence a name trans- ferred to places of instruction. Acorn, (A.-S.) €^c=oak and corUf oak-corn. Address, (Lat. and It.) ad and dirigere. Adultery, (Lat.) ad and alteimm or alteranif to another. Ajar, i.e. a-cAar=on the turn^ (A.-S.) cyran^ to turn. Algebra, (Ar.) from Geber, an obscure writer on Alchemy. Alligator, (Sp.) el lagarto, or (Lat.) lacerta^ the lizard. Allow, (Fr.) allouer^ (Lat.) adlaudare. Almanac, (Ar.) aZ, the, (Gr.) /u^*', month. Answer, (A.-S.) andswarian, to answer, (Goth.) and^ against, swararif to swear. Anthem, (A.-S.) anteferif (Low Lat.) antiphonOf (Gr.) avr'npiavov. Argosy, possibly from the Argos, which Jason commanded. Assault, (Lat.) assultumy part, of assilirey to leap against. Attorney, (Fr.) attoumery to take a turn, to transfer. Awkward, imcertain, possibly from (Dan.) aver-rechts ward, c[. d. * looking from the right.' See p. 161. ETYMOLOGICAL DERIVATIONS. 211 Bachelor, (Fr.) baa chevalier, next to a banneret. Balance, (Lat.) bilanx, an instrument for weighing, composed of two dishes or scales. Ballad, (It.) ballata, from ballarCy to dance ; whence ballet. Balluster, (Lat.) balltsta, (It.) baleatra^ a cross-bow; baleatriera^ a loophole to shoot from. Bankrupt, (It.) banco rotto, (Fr.) banqueroute, i.e. bench-broken. The Lombard merchants were wont to expose their wares for sale on benches in the market. When one could not pay his debts, the rest drove him away and broke his bench to ' pieces. Banns, (Ger. and Dutch) bann-en, bann, (A.-S.) bannan, to publish, to proclaim. Hence * banna ' of marriage, * bandit,' an out- law, &c. Banquet, (Ger. and Dan.) banchet, from bank, a bench. Barrister, (Low Lat.) bairasterius, possibly from (Fr.) barreauj the bar of a court of justice. Belfry, (Fr.) beffroi, a watch-tower. Billiard, or Balliard, augm. from ball ; (Ger. and Dan.) bollerif to roll. Bullion, (Lat.) bulla, a seal ; properly the mint, or oflSce. BuRCjjiAR, (Lat.) burgi-latrocinium, the plundering of a house. Cabbage, (Fr.) caboche, (Lat.) capuccio, from caput. Caitiff, (Lat.) captivus, a captive. Cajole, from cage, (Lat.) cavea, to sing in a cage. Candidate, (Lat.) candidus, white : one seeking office went about in a white toga. .. Canopy, (Mod. Gr.) Kiavuirelov, a mosquito curtain, fr. Ki!jva)\p, a gnat. Carat, (At.) kavra, a bean ; the standard weight for diamonds. Cardinal, (Lat.) cardo, a hing*^ ; hence critical, principal. Carnival, (Lat.) camera vale. Carouse, (Ger.) gar, completely, entirely ; aus, out, i. e. to drink all out Cash, (Lat.) capsa, from capio, to take. Chaqrin, (Fr.) chagrin, care, grief; (Genoese) sagrind, to gnaw; (Pied.) aagri, shagreen, a shark's akin used as a rasp in polish- ing. ?12 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGUSH LANOUAGB. •!i Chair, (Gr.) KaOidpOy (Lat.) cathedra, or (A.-S.) cyran^ to turn. Chancel, a cancellis. Vide chap. XV. Charm, (Lat.) carmen^ i. e. magictim. Chattel, Cattle, (Lat.) capitalia, from caputs the head. Cheat, (Lat.) cadere, to fall. The word ' escheats ' was first applied to lands which fell to the crown by forfeiture. The * escheators,' or king's officers, were guilty of so much fraud, that at last the word, corrupted into ' cheat,' was used in a bad sense. Cheer, (Gr.) xalpuVf or (Fr.) oceur, the heart. Chimnet, (Gr.) Kaynvot, from Kaiuv, to bum. City, (Lat.) civitas, a state. Clever, commonly derived from deliver (?), allied to cleaver. Club, (A.-S.) cleofan, to divide, to apportion expenses. Cluhst, from clumps, (Dan.) klompe, a mass, (A.-S.) ge-lmaUf to connect. Comedt, (Gr.) Kui^rif a village, and ^cri, a song ; at first a sort of village festival or harvest-home. Companion, (Lat.) con, together, paniSf bread; one who has the fellowship of eating bread. Control, contra, against, and rotuluSf a roll. Copse, (Gr.) kowtuv, to cut down. CosTERM0NOER=costardmonger, costard = kind of apple. Couch, (Lat.) collocare. Counterpane, (Lat.) culcita puncta, a quilt arranged in patterns for ornament ; (Fr.) coulte-pointe, courte-pointe, contre-pointe ; whence the name. Court, (Lat.) cohors. Cousin, (Lat.) consanguineus (con sanguis), of the same blood. Coverlet, (Lat.) codperire ledum, (Fr.) couvre-lit. CuPBOARDscup horde, a cup or press for cups, or cup-bur, i.e. cup- bower, (Icel.) hur=a receptacle. Curfew, (Lat.) codperire focum, (Fr.) couvre-feu. Dainty, (Welsh) dantaeth=a. choice morsel, (Lat.) a dente, Daisy, the day's eye. Damage, (Lat.) damnum agere. Dandelion, (Fr.) dent de lion, lion's tooth Pavtoe^, (Lat.) damnum gerere., .4' 1 '■- 'W VTTMOLOeiOAL DEBIVATIONa 213 Delight, (Lat.) delicia. Delirious, (Lat.) de, lira^ a furrow or ridge ; a metaphor taken from a person deviating from the straight furrow or ridge in ploughing. Demub, (Lat.) demorarif to delay. Demure, (Lat.) de moribua, of good manners. . Denizen, (Welsh) dinaa^ a city, and aydd, free. Diet, a council, or parliament, (Lat.) from dies, a day. Diet, a feast, (Gr.) Uavra. Dirge, (Lat.) dirige^ so called from Psalm v. 8 : ' Dirige, Domine Deus rneWf in conspectu tuo vitam meam.^ Disaster, a word borrowed from astrology, (Gr.) Bve and &> ny, to express their numbers. Host, (Lat.) hostiSj an enemy. Host, (Lat.) hoapes, an entertainer. Host, (Lat.) hoatiay a sacrifice. Hurdle = a little hoard or building. Hurricane, (Sp. W. Indian) ouragan- a storm. Hurry, (A.-S.) Aere, an army ; whence herian, to ravage, to plundei. Hence also ' harry,' ' hurry,' * harrow,' &c. Husband, (A.-S.) house-bond. Imbecile, (Lat.) in baculum, one who leans on a stick. Impair, (Lat.) pejor, worse. Individual, derived from Logic. Dividing genus into species, and so on, we come at last to the unit, which we cannot divide^ except physically; hence ' individuum,' i.e. * nondivisible.' Ingot, (Fr.) lingot, from lingua^ q. d. tongue- shaped, or (Du.) in- gieten, to infuse. Intrigue, (Lat. and Gr.) tncce, rpix^i, hairs, entanglements. Inveigle, (It.) invogliare, to make one willing or desirous. Invoice, (Lat.) in viam, on the way. Ivory, (Lat.) ebur, (Gr.) /3apwc=heavy. Jaded, (A.-S.) yede or yode= goed or gone, one tired with going. Janissary, (Turk.) yengi cheri, or new soldier. Jargon, vide chap. XIX. Jaw, (A.-S.) chatv, from ceowan, to chaw. Jenneting, corrupted from ' Juneting.' zVpples which ripen in June, Jig, conjectured to be from (Fr.) gigue, (It.) giga, a fiddle. Jorden, (A.-S.) g6r=fi\th, and c?e»= receptacle. Jowle, written also choule (Lat,) gula, the gullet. Juice, (Lat.) succus, sugere, to suck. Julep, (Low Latin) yM/ep«s= water sweetened with sugar. Kennel, (Lat.) canis, a dog. Kerchief, (Fr.) couvre-chef. Kidnap, q. d. to nab or steal children : ^'lnc?=child. Knave, (A.S.) cnafa, a boy, a youth. - ' Knife, (A.-S.) cnif. Some derive it from (Gr.) KvLvtiv, to scrape. Si^BK««««V 216 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. ' 1 Laceet, (Sw.) laquerCj or lakere, a runner; whence 'leg.' Lad, (A.-S.) Icedan, to lead, q. d. one led. LamfoOxs^ (^'O lamponier, an idle companion, from old Fr. Uxmptr^ to drink. Larum, (It.) alV amii=ito arms 1 Lass, i. e. laddess, fem. of lad. League, a confederacy ; (Lat.) Zt^are, to bind. League, a distance ; (Fr.) lieu, (Low Lat.) leucaf (A.-S.) Uag^ liahf lah, a law ; a district in which a particular law was in force. Leather, (A.-S.) lether, from (A.-S.) hlidan, to cover up. Lecherous, (A.-S.) liccian, to lick. Lees, (A.-S.) licjan, to lie, v\'hat remains at the bottom of the bottlu. Leman, (Fr.) le mtgnon, or Vaimant. Lettuce, (Lat.) lactuca, from lac, milk. Lewd, (Lat.) laicus, (Gr.) Xaoc, same as layman; possibly from (A.-S.) Icewede, p. part, of Icewian, to mislead. Liquorice, corrupted from (Gr.) glycyri'hiza=sweet root. Lizard, (Lat.) lacerta. Lobby, (Low Lat.) lohium, (Ger.) laube=a. leaf. Lobster, (A.-S.) loppestre, loppe=za, flea. Luncheon, corrupted from noonshun, i. e. meal taken at noon. Mace, (It.) mazza, (Lat.) massa, a club ; whence ' massacre.' ' Mackerel, (Dan.) makrel, some say a maculis, from its spots. Madrigal, anciently Madriale, (It., Sp., Lat) mandra, a sheep- fold, q. d. a shepherd's song. Maggot, (Goth.) matjan, (A.S.) metian, to eat; whence moth, &c. Malady, (Lat.) male aptus. Malein, t. e. little Mary. Man, (A.-S.) ma^an=/)osse; whence may, might, &c. Massacre, see above, ' Mace.' Mastiff, from maison-tenant, or ' mase the thefe,' because he guards. the house from the thief. Meal, (A.-S.) md^l, a part, or portion. Meal, (Dan.) meel, (Goth.) malan, (Ger.) malen, (Lat.) moiere, tor grind. Measles, (Du.) maese, (Ger.) maser, a spot. Meat, (A.-S.) metiuUf to eat. ETYMOLOGICAL DBMVATIOira. 217 "MxxTiSQ, i. e. mot-thing (Sc.). Motescouncil ; thingssjudicial as- sembly, an assembly of freemen. Megrim, (Lat.) hemicraniuni, (Gr.) ^/L(tic/9avia=pain round the middle of the head. Menial, (Old Fr.) meanie^ a household. Mess, (Lat.) missus^ from mittere, to send. * MiKABiT, (Ar.) menarahj a lantern. MmcE, (Lat.) minutusj small. MiNiATUBE, (Lat.) mmmm= red lead: miniare^ to paint with yer- mUion. Minion, (Fr.) mignon^ (A.-S.) mdencun, velle, cupere. MoB:=mo6t/« vulgus. Game into use temp. Charles II. Dryden uses * mobile,* and mentions ' mob ' as a novelty. MoLB, (Lat.) moleSf a heap, a mess. MoNKET, from mannikin, a little man. Morass, (Dan.) morads, another mode of writing marsh; (A.-S.) wersc. Morganatic, (A.-S.) morgen-gifey (Dan.) morgangaue=z the mormng gift; a kind of dowry paid on the morning before or after marriage. MoROPS, (Lat.) mos and osus^ a man full of his own ways. Mortise, (Lat.) mordere, to bite. Mosque, (Ar.) mesgid, a place of adoration. Muggy, (Welsh) mwglio, to warm. MuMUT, (Ar.) murriy signifies wax. Munch, (Fr.) manger , to eat. Mustard, (Lat.) mustus, pungent, and ardeo, to bum. Muster, (Lat.) monatrarey to show. Mustache, (Gr.) /ivcTa^, an upper lip. Nap, (A.-S.) hnappian, to sleep. Nap, (A.-S.) hnoppa, the same word as knapf Jcnop, or ^noJ=any- thing rising. Neat, (A.-S.) hmtan=to butt; means properly horned cattle. Neat, (Lat.) nitidus, clean, nice. Neighbour, (A.-S.) neah, near, and gebure, a country man, or bowery a dwelling. Nephew, (Lat.) nepos. Niece, (Lat.) neptis. hi t -41 m w»« -If. ■ ¥1 218 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. Nettle, (A.-S.) netle, possibly the same origin for needle, i. e. that which pricketh. Never, (A.-S.) ncsfre, na=not, and cefre=^ever. Niggard (augmentative), from nigh, or (A.-S.) nyrwan, to constrain Nightingale, (Ger.) nacht-i-gall : nacht, night, and gdllen, to resoimd Noon, (A.-S.) won, (Lat.) {hora nona), the ninth hour. > Nostril, (A.-S.) nose-thirle, i. e. nose-hole : thirliarij to pierce ; whence * drill.' Nuisance, (Lat.) noceo, to hurt. Oar, (A.-S.) erianf to plough, to ply. Offal, i . e. that which ' falls off.' Omelet, (Fr.) omelette^ q. d. ceufs-molette, i. e. mixture of eggs. Onion, (Lat.) unus, i.e. a root with one bulb. Ooze, (A.-S.) wse=water ; whence Ouse, Usk, Esk, and other rivers. Orchard, corrupted from hortyard, (Lat.) Aor^i^s :=garden, (A.-S.) 1/ard, an enclosure. Ordeal, (A.-S.) orddsl ; or !=great, and deBl=:judgment. Orddre, (Lat,) either horridus, or sordidua. Ore, (A.-S.) ora^ (Fr.) or, (Lat.) aurum. Orgies, (Lat.) orgia, avb r^c opy^c, i. e. a furore bacchantium. Ospray, i.e. ossifrage, (Lat.) os, a bone, and frangere, to break. Ostler, (A.-S.) hosteler, vide * Host : ' some say, oat-stealer ! Ostrich, (Lat.) avis struthio, (Gr.) (TTpovd6e=a, sparrow. Otter, (A.-S.) oter^ (Lat) Intra, (Gr.) vSwjo. Owl, (Lat.) ululare, (A.-S.) ule. Paddock, (A.-S.) pad, a toad. Paddock, coirupted from (A.-S.) parruck, a park. PagaN, (Lat.) paganus, a villager. Vide * Heathen.' Palette, (Fr.) paille, (Lat.) palea, straw. Palfrey, (Fr) par le frein, by the bridle. A horse led by the bridle. Palliate, (Lat.) pallium, n cloak. Palst, (Gr.) 7ra/oaXvS.) paboL Peculiar, ^a.t.) peculium, stock (pecus) or money acquired by son or slave with parental sanction; hence 'private property.' Pedlar. A pad, ped, in Norfolk, is a pannier, or wicker basket ; a pedlar, or peddar, a man who carricj such. Pell-mell, (Ft.) pesle-meslej confusedly ; milee, or medley. Pennant, (liai.) pinna, a feather, or flap; posaibly from pendant (Fr.). Person. The Roman theatres were ho large that the actors wore masks containing a contrivance to render the voice louder. Such a mask was called persona (per, sonare, to sound through) ; aflei'wards persona came to signify an actor, or a character of a play. Pilgrim, (Fr.) pelerin, (Lat.) peregrinus, from per ager. Pillory, (Fr.) pilier, the pillar, or post, or (Lat.) piliorium, the iron ring by which the neck was confined. Pirate, (It., Sp., I-at.) pirata ; (Gr.) trtipariiq, because he risks many dangers. Pitcher, (Fr.) pichier, (It.) bicchiere, a beaker, or beaked cup. Placard, (Fr.) plaquard ; plaquer, to stick, daub, or paste on. Plagiarism, (Lat.) plagium, meant man- stealing ; now it means a literary theft. Plunder, (Low Ger.) /)ZMnc?en=rags, trumpery; (Dutch) plonderen. This word, it is said, was introduced after the Thirty Years' War. Pocket, (diminutive), a little poke, or wallet. Poll-tax. Poll, or boll, means *hef H ' Pommel, (It.) pomolo, dim. of porno, ai. cwpple; so any round head. Porcupine, (It.) porco spinoso, q. d. porcus spinatus. Porpoise, (Lat.) jaorcMS /)wcis— pig-fish. f*' m «f*M ^■^i m ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. i' 1 I Porridge, (Lat.) porrumj a leek ; also said to be a corruption of pottage. Posset, (Lat.) pottOy a draught. TREACHf (LbX.) predicare. Prowl, (Fr.) proiej prey, q. d. to seek for prey. Pudding, (Fr.) boudin, (Low Lat.) hodinua^ a sleeve, large and loose. PoNCH, (Hindoo) pounch^ five, because made of five ingredients. Punt, (Fr.) puis-nd^ (Lat.) pos<-nafi6n, plural of sow. Sycophant, a ' fig-shew er' =an informer. The export of figs from Attica was forbidden. Tabbard, (Fr.) tabarre, a long riding-cloak. TAi>POLE=toad poll, I.e. * toad-head.' Tallow, (Du.) talgh, (A.-S.) telgan, to smear. T Ais tvf Y, (Lat.) tantdvi, ,.:' m Btymolooical derivations. *22^ Task, (Lat.) taxare, same as tax. Tattoo, (Polynesian), or possibly from tapoter tous='besA all. Teach, (A.-S.) tdecan, to instruct, direct Teem, Team, (A.-S.) tyman, to pour forth. Temper, (Lat.) temperare. Tennis, derived from (Fr.) tenez^ take; a word used in playing the game. Testy, (Fr.) teste, or tetej the head. Tether, possibly from the verb to tie. Theriac, Treacle, (Gr.) dnptuKti , the word means viper's blood. THIMBLE=<^MmJ-6eW. Threshold, (A.-S.) thrcecswald : threscian, to beat, t:;a^c?=wood. Ticket, (Fr.) etiquette, a little tick, or bell, or note. Timber, (A.-S.) timhnan, to build, or construct. Tinsel, (Fr.) e'tincelle, (Lat.) scintilla, a spark. Tissue, (Lat.) fex'o, to weave. Toilette, (Lat.) telum, a thread. < Tornado, (Sp.) tornar, to turn. Torpedo, (Lat.) toipere, to benumb. Tortoise, (Sp.) tortuga, either from tarda, sJow, or torta, twisted. Towel, (Fr.) touaille, possibly from the same root as toilet. Trance, (Lat.) trans, acrosb, and eo, to go. Tribulation, (Lat.) trihulum, a roller to thrash out wheat; the word is metaphorically used. Trifle, (A.-S.) trifelan, to pound, to break ; possibly from trivial. Trigger = that which drags (Du.) dragge, drecken, to drag. Trim, (A.-S.) tryman, to set in order. Trinket, (Fr.) trinquet, means properly the highest sail of a ship. Trivial, (Lat.) tres vice, a place where three ways met, from gossips meeting at street corners ; or from (Lat.) trivium, the elementary course of instruction ; possibly from tero. Truant, (Du.) trouwant, a wanderer. Trumpery, (Du.) trompen, to deceive, (Fr.) tromper, Turbot, possibly from (Lat.) turbo, a top. Turnip, from turn, and (A.-S.) ncepe^napm. Tweak, (A.-S.) twiccian, to pluck. Twins, (A.-S) twinauj to double, to 'twain.' if .L-tt ;M ; >i, [I '."'I ;2 224 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 1 Twirl, (A.-S.) thirlian, to tiirn round or about. Ugly, (A.-S.) oguj great fear; whence 'ogre' (?). See p. 208. Umpire, (Lat.) nonpar, having no equal, t. e. * sole judge.' Usher, (Lat.) oatiarius, a door-keeper. Valet, same as varlet=haT\ot, or hireling. Vassal, possibly from (Lat.) vas, a pledge. Venison, (Lat.) venor, to hunt. Venom, (Lat.) venenum, poison. Verdigris, a viride cBm='from the green of brass.' Vignette, (Fr.) a little vine or vine-branch, or branch- like bordei. Villain, (Lat.) viliSy or because he belonged ad ^villam^ domini', or (A.-S.) wylen, a slave. Vinegar, (Lat.) vinum acgr= sour wine. Viper, (Lat.) vipera, i. e. vivipara, because it produces its young alive. Vixen, (A.-S.) /rcen, a female fox. Volley, (Lat.) volo, to fly. Voyage, (Lat.) viam agere. W AUHSCOT, (DvL.) waeghen-schot : waeghe=iwave. - Wallet, (A.-S.) weallian, to go abroad : a traveller's pouch. Wassail, (A.-S.) wees hale—salvus sis (?\ Good health to you. Weather, (A.-S.) weder or wether, derivation uncertain. Wedge, (Du.) wegghe. ' Weight, (A.-S.) wcegan, to bear, carry, or raise. Wether, (A.-S.), possibly from wetheran, to withstand. Wherry, (Lat.) vehere, (A.-S.) wertan, to urge on at all speed ; or faran, to go. Whey, (A.-S.) /iiycP3r= the watery portion of milk. Wicket, (Fr.) guichet, (Du.) wicket, a hatch of a door. Wife, (Ger.) weben, to weave. Wile = same as guile (A.-S.) tvtglian, to bewitch. Wimple, a veil, or covering; possibly from (Lat.) umbella. Wince, (Fr.) guincher, to writhe ; possibly connected with (A.-S.) winnan, to oppose. — Richardson. Window, corrupted from wind-door j door to admit the wind. WoAD, (A.-S.) wad. , . - . . Wold, (A.-S.) «;eaW=wood. UTYMOLOGICAL DBRIVATlONS. Woman, (A.-S.) tvifman^weHvmgman. Work, (A.-S.) wt/rcan, to act, to act upon. Wrath, (A.-S.) wr^than, t» writhe, or twist. rlru^'m'V ""/' ''''' "'^''''""' *^^ «^«»« «« to rack. I ACHT, (Dan.) ^achten, to pursue. Yearn, (A.-S.) ge-yrnan, to run after, to pursue. wilfSr* " '""'■"■ """""»" ^^-'-^ •'-"•• p«>p'e Zenith, (A.-K.), opposed to Nadib. • 'ofix ^orr*° °'^*'^ ""*^''' " --'''" ' '■ " "-* tahoiM are oaUed after the ftnoied figure of aninml» I m 'aAI ii4j f' » ?". i ^• f;l Ill, y .r' 1;^ 226 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGU8H LANOUAOB. APPENDIX L Latin Preflxei. 1B6- AB- from or atray A- AD* V " AO- AV- ''■, AL- AM- AP- - AS, to AB- A8- AT- A- ABIBI- AUBO, both ANTB- AiTTB, before fiBMB- BBNB, well BI- BI8- BIS, twice cmcoM- 0IBCT7- ciBOXJH, aronnd CON- COM- oot- COB- • coK, together 00- couw- OONTBA- CONTBO- ooMTBA, against OOTJMTBB- IMN SB, of, from, or down w* ' - »IS- separation, or negation as, abt-ee»8 „ -tue a-vertion ad-vance atHsmt af-fect mi-hw am-munition ap-plause arrogate as-taitlt at-tend aspect amb-iffuoti8 ante-ehamber iene-diction bi-ped bia-ouit ciroum-ferenoe oirou-itous eon-voke oom-bme coUleot eor-rupt oo-eqtud ooun^ ooHtra'V&M N M l> W ** M It It M It il » » •» tl It tt It tt 11 oounter-act dt-throne diriwt dU'treut INTBU, between INTHL- IMTBO- IMTBO, to within JUXTA- roxTA, clone by ICALK- ] KALI- ' KAXB, ill, or bad VAT.- MANU- MANUS, a hand WON- »ov, not OB- OC- OF- > OB, against OP- OS- OMNI- ouMis, all PBB- PBB, through P08T- POST, after PBB- PBA, before PBO- PBO, for, before PUB- PB«rB»> PB£TBB, past, or beyond SB- •BSD' ■ BB, back BSfTBO- BBTBo, backwards 8B- signifies apart or separate Hura- siNB, without 227 as 0-diet „ ex-ctue „ ef-fect „ extra-ordinary „ in-duce „ im-poM „ U-lume „ ir-radiate ,, efnu-bark „ oii-graw „ in-iquity „ U-leg(U „ im-prudent „ $r-r«wren< „ ig-nomiriy „ wi-ty „ inter-course „ enter-prise „ intel-ligencc „ intro-duce „ jvuta-position „ male-factor „ mtUi-gnant „ mal-contmt „ wianM-«cTfp< „ non-resident „ ob-Ject „ oc-ovr „ of-Jioe „ op-pose „ os-tentation „ per-feot „ post-pone „ pre-vent „ pro-mise „ pur-pose t, preter-naiwal „ re-gain n retrospect „ ee-erete 1 ; I if ''i a2 •i I '228 SHliI< 8TTB- SUC- 8UF- 8U0- 8UB- 8US- 8U- 8UHTKB- 8VPKB- 8tJ8- TRAN8- TRA- (FR.)Tlti8- TBI- uin- VICB- ▲• AW- ▲M- AM- AHFH- ANA- ANTl- ANT- APO- APH- ARCH- ARCai- Atrro- ATJT- f'ATA- CATH- CAT- DBOA- DIA- DIS- ANALtSIS OF THE BNQLIBU lANQUAGtt. RignifieB half ■ BVB, undor suBTHB, under svPBB, over TRAKS, acroBS TRE8, three ULTRA, beyond UNTTS, one VICE, ioBtead of Greek Prefixes. A, iy, without, not ttfupt, about, on both sides iwi, up ityri, against, instead of &ir6, from itp6 s, chief aMs, self Kord, down BiKa, ten Sii, through iis, ill It a« temi-eiroU „ subscribe „ tuc-cted „ ^-fir „ Miff-gest „ sur-render „ tui-peot §u-spioion tubtttr-fuge guper-ven« sur-plu» tran»-act tra-dition tres-paat tri-dent tUtra-foonttme tmi-form un-attimou* viee-rojf » » f» >» fi >• i» n II II » II a-pathy an-arohy am-brosia am-bitioH amphi-biou» ana-tomy anti-ehriat ant-agoniat apo-»tate aph-oriam arch-angtl arohi-teot auto-graph aut-opay cata-logue oath-edral cat-egory deea-logue dia-meter di$-aater dya-entery GREEK PREFIXES. 229 ML' MPIr ■xo- HSFT> WOA.' BTPMMr HTPO- HTPH- ICBTA- MIITH- Mjrr- MOMJ- Moxr- OBTHO- PANTO- PAN- PABA- PAR- PBNTA- PBBI- rniijo- PHIL- POLT- FBO- FBOS- psBxnx)- PSBUB- HTM- 8TH- fcYI.- ■T- nu- h, out from if, in M, iqpon . f(«, without ffS, well llHi; half h-tpot, different liTTo, seven l(, six Mp, over, abora dir((, under ^cri, change (or after) fi6vos, single ^pd<^s, right nas, all iropii, beside, beyond w4vTtt five Ttpf, around iftiKos, a friend iroXtis, many irp6, before irp<(s, to ^cvSos, £iilse n art. a science — as an art. 4. How is Grammar divided ? Explain the meaning of Etymelogy, Synlaa, Prosody. 5. Define Word, Syllable, Letter, Vowel, Consonant. How are Vowels and Consonants divided ? 6. Explain what is meant by Labials, Dentals, and Gutturals. 7. Exhibit the division of Letter in a tabular form. 8. When are to and y to be regarded as vowc^ls ? When as consonants' 9- What are Diphthongs and Triphthongs ? Mention those that are proper. It. VVhen are c and g soft and hard? 11. What are the defects of the English Alphabet? 12. What are the requisites of a perfect Alphabet? 13. What letters are superfluous? 1 4. What is meant by Orthography, Orthoepy ? 16. Give a tabular scheme showing tm analysis of ' word according '■<> form.' 10. How are the anomalies of English spwUlng to be account«d for'r 17. Examine the spelling of the lollowing wordf Deferred differed, foreteis or foretells, xmraveled., gallopped, ponies, instill, uneontroiablejudgement, Henrys, marshall (the verb), ascendency, brimfull, travel ag, fatigueing, moveable or movable, judgeship, lodgable Hlledge>«4>le alledgement, abridgment, lodgment, infringement enla^MMMt £M±&ow]edgement, combatting, recalls, marvelously. 18. State the general rule for dividing words into M"llabiefl. 19. Divide the following words into syllables: .^^nefit, cabinet, covetous, diminutive, education, nicety, civil, colour, vscribe, massy, chanter, blanket, vestry, evening, folio, genius, officiate, i.ible, scholar, separate, polysyllable, geographical, Helen, Philip, wealthy. PRAXIS. 233 knt, knt, n. 1. Define Accent, Euphasis, Quantity. 2. Show that accent differs from quantity. 8. What is the use of accent? 4. What general rule regulates the position of accent in words which are identical in form?* 6. On what part of a ' derived form' is the accent generally fouai in English? 6. Which seems to be the favourite place for accent in words of more than three syllables ? Q-ive instances of words that have shifted their accent io obedience to this principle. m. 1. What is the threefold province of Ettmolcot? 2. Define Part of Speech. 3. Give a fourfold- classification of words. 4 Exhibit in tabular form MorelFs schomo for classifying words. 6. What are Latham's views ? 6. Sliow by a tabular scheme how, according to Home Tooke, the parts of speech may be reduced to two. 7. Enumerate the parts of speech and explain each. 8. Define Accident, Accidence. IV. \. Classify Nottn according to meaning. 2. What is mejint by Proper, Common, and Abstract Nouns? 3. Into what two classes are 'Singular' or 'Collective' Nouns divided? 4. Classify 'Common' Nouns. 5. Classify 'Abstract' Nouns, 6. Divide Noun according to ' Structure,' 7. Explain the meaning of ' Primary Dorivativo,' ' Secondary Derivative.* 8. What is the meaning of ' strong' and ' weak' as used in English Grammar? 9. From what language do wo take our primitive nouns ? 10. Explain the meaning of 'Diminutive,' ' Aiigmentative,' and 'Patronymic' 11. What are the 'Simple Diminutive Suffixes'? 12. Give instances of words which have compound 'Diminutive Suffixes.' 13. What are the 'Augmentative Suffixes'? Give instances cf 'Patronymics. 14. Explain the meaning of thu following affixes : 'Hood,' 'ness,' 'ty,' 'rie,' 'ry,' 'ship,' 'dom,' 'ment,' ' mony,' 'cy,' 'tude,' and illustrate by examples. 16. Explain the force of the affixes in the following words: Balustrade, forage, morning, farthing, firkin, stiincliion. |i()Il;ini, tartlet, garden, pockei. i4ti I . 1 .*>» For a list of tlnise wortls, si* AppuudU il. p. 2aO. 234 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. !!^. 16. What is meant by Derivation and Composition? 17. How are compound nouns formed ? 18. What is the logical force of a 'compound? ' Which tenn limits and defines the other? 19. Mention words which are incomplete 'compounds,' one element being concealed. 20. Give instances of words which are erroneously supposed to be * compounds.' 21. Which is earlier in a language, 'composition' or 'derivation'? 1. Define Tbrm, Number, Genbbb, Case, Person. 2. How do nouns of A.-Saxon origin form their ' plurals ' ? 3. How do nouns imported from foreign languages form their 'plurals?' Give instances and exceptions. 4. How is the prevalence of the plural form in s and es to be accounted for? 6. State the general rule for forming the plural in s and es. State exceptions. 6. What is meant by a strong plural ? Give a list of those noons that have strong plurals. ' ' 7. What do strong plurals imply ? 8. Give the plurals of the following : Sister, brother, ox, tooth, penny, hero, cargo, lady, palmetto, fife, knife, scarf, proof, ruflF, phenomenon, axis, formula, crocus, loaf, genus, analysis, appendix, bandit, cherub, judge, beau, focus, omnibus, beauty, key, valley, lily, animalculum, mouse, country, leaf, woman, pea, kiss, beach, self, fox, wharf, chief, eye, donkey, medium, sheep. 9. Nouns that end in fe form their plurals in ves. State exceptions to the rule. 10. Give a list of nouns ending in/, which do not change it in the plural. 11. Mention nouns that have both a strong and a weaJc plural. 12. Give a list of nouns that have two plurals with different meanings. 13. What nouns hava different meanings in the singular and plural? 14. What nouns have two meanings in the singular, and one in the plural? What have two meanings in the plural and one in the singular ? 1 5. What nouns have no singular ? What have no plural ? 16. How is collectiveness shown in English? 17. Discuss with reference to number the following nouns: Alms, means, news, pains, amends, richos. 18. Ethics, children, wages, chickens, swine, kine, welkin, ferns, folk — explain these words, with reference to number. 19. Explain the origin of the plural affixes cs, en, and ri/ in yeomanry. 89. Give the plural of ' courtmartial,' • aidecamp,' ' lord mayor.' How do com- pound nouns form their plural? PtlAXtB. \i'\\' ^Z^ SI. GIVe tbe plurals of finnan, Brahman, talisman, caiman, Massuinuii, Norman, Frenchman, German, Dutchman. the lural? jeans, ^plain com- . .•' VI- . ^„. . . . \. Define Obndeb. What is meant by Common Gender? 2. Why is the English language more philosophic in regard to gender than other languages? 3. In Turhat three ways is gender indicated? 4. What are the A.-Sazon and N.-French alBxes to show the male or female agent? 5. Explain tiie words Songstress, tapster, maltster, wizard, punster. 6. What peculiarity is there iu the words Drake, gander, bridegroom, widower? 7. Explain the following words: Lord, lady, man, woman, nephew, uieoe, heroine, vixen, sultana, girl, slut. 8. Give the feminine forms of Bachelor, beau, buck, colt, gaffer, hart, milter, monk, rake, sloven, steer, wizard. 9. Mention feminine nouns that have no corresponding masculine. 10. What is the meaning of the affixes er and aier ? U. On what principle or principles do we attribute gender to inanimate objects? vn. 1. Define Cask. How many cases have we ? Explain the statement ' that we have two cases expressing threj relations.' 2. Explain the words Declension, Case, Oblique, in connection with one another. 3. Explain the meaning of genitive, dative, accusative, and ablative case. 4. What is the difference between subject and nominative ; object and accusa- tive? 6. What is the origin of the possessive case in 's ? How is the ' \>TJlten when the word ends with s ? 6. Whence did we obtain the genitive with of? 7. What is the ordinary difference between the genitive with of, and the genitive with 'at 8. What adverbs show traces of genitive and dative forms ? 9. Give words that are respectively instances of genitive, dative, accusative, and ablative forms. 10. Enumerate all the traces which survive of A. Saxou noun inflexions. 11. Write down the genitive cases singular and pl\iral of the following: Mother, man, girl, John, righteousness, woman, Xerxes, sheep, cat^ Moses, rose, people, bees, caterpillar, children, tree. 12. Explain the affixes in the following words : Liar, sailor, duckling, hillock, knuckle, streamlet, brooklet, freedom, landscape, bailiwick, horseman* m m tiii (4) I m 2de ANALTBtS OF THE flNGLISU LANOUAOS. 1, 1 ! I II ! alup, blackness, slavery, nnitliy, manhood, pocket, shovel, gizdle, kin- dred, arcade, musician, trastee, Perkin, wisdom, bishopric, asterisk. 13. Explain the meaning of the following affixes and give instances: Aid, one, kin, sor, tzy, trix, ee, eer, iaa, iat, ling^ lodk» tode, ence, axy, el, ness, ment^ isk. vm. 1. Define ADJKCTrvB. 2. Classify ac^ective according to Meaning. 3. Classify adjective according to Meaning and Formation. 1. Explain with examples Common, Proper, Numeral, PMnominal, Partiei* pial, and Compound Adjectives. 6. How are Definitive Adjectives divided ? 6. Divide Qualitative Adjectives. 7. Divide Quantitative Ac^ectives. ' 8. Classify Adjectives according to Structure. 9. What are the A.-Saxon adjectival suffixes ? 10. What are the principal classical ac^ectival suffixes ? 11. In what ways can we form adjectives to express the absence of a quality , the presence of a quality ; the presence of it in a small degree ; in a larger degree ; the power of anything to impart a quality ; the fitness of anything to exercise it ? 12. What is meant by Cardinal and Ordinal Numerals? 13. What is meant by Distributive and Multiplicative Numerals? 14. Explain the so-called Article. What is the meaning of the word? 16. On what grounds are these articles classed as adjectives and not as pro- nouns ? 16. Give general rules for the use of a and an. 17. What is the rule for a or an before words beginning with h? Give examples. 18. Explain the phrase 'three times a year.' 19. What are the Indefinite Quantitative Adjectives? 20. Give a list of noons employed as collective numerals. 21. What are the compounds oi one? What is the diffisrence between one the noun, and one the adjective ? 22. How are Compound Adjectives formed ? 23. What are Simple Adjectives in origin ? How are adjectives Derived? 24. What is the great peculiarity of the English adjective ? In what respectb has it an advantage over the adjective in highly inflected languages ? 25. Define Comparison, Positive, Comparative, Superlative. 26. Give rules for the comparison of adjectives. 27. What dissyllable adjectives form their comparison by er and eU? 28. Explain the meaning of these suffixes er and est. 29. What is the meaning assigned by Tooke to more and most? 12. Wh 13. Whi 14. Wh 16. Givi PRAXIS. 287 to. What a4JeotiveB admit no degrees of companion f 81. Give a lift of irregnlar comparisons. 82. Explain the forms, Better, worse, less, much, manj, Hearty flrst, last, farthest, rather. 88. Explain the forms lesser, uppermost. 84. What is the difference between few and a /etc, further and farther, elder and older, latter and later ? 85. What is the test of a true English comparative? Mention classical ad- jectives, as well as others of Saxon origin, which, though comparatives in form, do not conform to this test. 38. Give the derivation of the 'first ten' numerals. 37. Explain eleven, twelve, thirteen, twenty, liundred, thousand. 38. Explain farthing, firkin, riding (of Yorkshire), first, both, once, twice, only, cipher. 39. Give the force of the affixes in the following words : Sleepless, learned, talented, gifted, brazen, western, easterly, truthful, shady, blithesome, homeward, lovely, odious, righteous, verbose. iO. Mention adjectives that have more than one superlative form. 41. What a^*ectives have no positive — no comparative form? 42. What is the difference between the ' two first' and ' the first two' ? 43. What are comparatives and superlatives of eminence and diminution ? IX. 1. Define Fbokoitk. 2. Classify Pronouns. 3. Define the classes into which pronouns are divided. 4. What are the Personal Pronouns ? 5. What are the Possessive Pronouns ? 6. Specify the Indefinite Pronouns — Substantive and Adjective. 7. What are the Belative Pronouns ? State the difference in the use of the words so employed. I one the 8. Explain the anomalies in the use of the pronoun ' self 0. Give a complete declension of the Personal Pronouns. 10. What are the Reciprocal Pronouns ? What is the difference between them [? in their use? respectb 11. Explain Mine, thine, our, your, their. What is the difference between jes? *my and mine,'— 'thy and thine'? 12. What are the Compound Pronoims ? 13. What are the uses of ' self' and ' own ' ? 14. Why is ' it is me' less unexceptionable than ' it is him' ? 16. Give the derivations of He, she, it, the, that, who, which, such, each, everj, thither. f !B m. ii f;-: ■ 288 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAOB. 16. When was the word ' its' introduced? What form did it supplant? 17« Distinguish between 'each' and 'every.' 18. Explain etymologically Any, enough, some, divers, aught, naught, either. 19. What are the Pronominal Adverbs? 20. Explain the words ' why' and ' the' in the phrase, ' the more the merrier. 21. When are ' but' and ' as' used as relatives ? 22. What are the Demonstrative Pronouns ? How are ' this ' and ' that' used when they express contrasts ? 28. Explain the word 'to' in 'to-day.' 24. Divide pronoun according to structure. 25. Define Relative, Antecedent, and Beflective pronouns. 26. Distinguish between ' each other,' ' one another.' 27. What are Distributive Pronouns ? « •11 1. Define Vbbb. 2. Exhibit in tabular form a general classification of Verb. 8. Define Personal, Impersonal, and Unipersonal Verbs. 4. What are the three Lnpersonal Verbs ? 5. How are Personal Verbs divided according to Quality ? 6. Explain the meaning of Verb Substantive. 7. Classify verbs according to Relation. What is meant by ' Relation' ? 8. Explain what is meant by Transitive, Intransitive, and Neuter Verb. How many kinds of Intransitive Verbs are there ? 0. Define ' Auxiliary Verb.' 10. How are verbs divided according to ' form' ? 11. What is the difference between 'strong' and 'weak* verbs? 12. Into how many classes taay 'weak' and 'strong' verbs be respectively divided? Specify their.. 13. What is meant by a Redundant Verb? * 14. What are Defective Verbs? Enumerate them. 15. Classify verbs according to Meaning. 16. Define a Reflective Verb. Have we any special form for reflective verbs in English ? 17. What is a Causative Verb ? In what ways are causative verbs formed? 18. What are Intensive and Diminutive Verbs? By what aflSxes may they be known ? 19. What are Inceptive Verbs ? Have they any special terminations ? 20. What is meant by a Frequentative Verb ? Mention the suffixes, classical or otherwise, which characterise them. 21. Give a division of Verbs according to Or^tw. 22. Into what three or four classes may derived verbs be divided ? 23. What is meant by Conjugation ? How many coiyugations have we ? PRAXIS. 289 24. 26. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 36. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. erb. 41. 42. 48. 44. vely 4(S. 46. 47. rerbs 48. 40. d? 60. ay be ■ L 61. T 62. sical ^ hat are the Accidents of the verb? Define them. Have we a true Fassiye voice in English ? What is meant by the Middle voice in English ? What verbs are said to have a middle voice? . , How many Moods have we ? Explain them. What is meant by Tense ? How many tenses have we in English ? How many modifications of each ? Explain the meaning of Indefinite, Incomplete, Oomplote, Continuous, as applied to tenses. What are the various uses of the Present Indefinite ? How are Compound tenses formed ? What kind of verbs form their compound tenses with the verb ' to have ' ? With the verb ' to be' ? What effect have these auxiliary verbs on the concord of the participle? Which is correct, ' He is come,' or • He has come' ? If both are allowable, what is the distinction between them ? Conjugate the verbs ' to be,' ' to have,' ' to bring,' ' to run,* ' to smite,' ' to drown.' Write out the Future tenses in full of the verbs * to bring,' ' to remove. ' Coiy agate the Passive voice of the verbs ' to strike,' ' to invite.' In what four ways may Auxiliary verbs be divided ? Give a list ef auxiliary verbs. State what you know about the verbs ' shall' and ' will,* * may' and ' can.' There are two verbs 'do' ; two verbs 'become' ; two verbs 'think' ; and two verbs 'let'* in the language, explain them. What is a Participle ? How does it differ from an ordinary adjective ? When are participles capable of comparison ? Write down the active and passive participles of the verb * to strike.* What is meant by Gerunds ? How may they be distinguished from the indefinite infinitive or imperfect participle ? Explain the formation of ' could.' What is the tendency of the present usage with reference to the Subjunctive mood and strong verb ? On what grounds is the Potential mood not admissible ? What two forms have we of the Infinitive mood ? How did they arise ? What are Gerundial Infinitives ? How are they distinguished from common infinitiyeB? Explain the verbs ' did' and ' hight.* What remnants have we in English verbs ci' terminations expressing dis- tinctions of persons ? Explain the terminations st, th. \-,' II i r-" * Let (auxiliary) used in first and third persons Imperative mood, from (A.-S.) he'tan, to loiter, to permit. Lsr, to retard, to delay, from (A.-S.) latian, to delay ; as, ' we are sore let and hindeted.' *:( 240 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAQB. 65. What is the origin of the participial and gerundial endings in ingi 64. What is the force of the suffix ed in ' delighted'? 66. Give the meaning f4 the verbal prefixes a, be, for, and an ; en, mi$, vfith, and re. 66. Ooi\JTigate and analyse the verb 'to be.' Show of how many verbs It originally consisted. Compare it with the substantive verb in Latin and French, and give the supposed meanings of Am, was, were, are, be, is, wert. 67. What is there peculiar about • are' and • were' ? 68. Give the original meanings of Shall, will, can, may, worth, quoth, and yclept. 69. Explain the participial prefix ^ in yclept. 60. Explain the phrase, ' woe worth the day.' XI. 1. Define Asvbbb. 2. Classify adverbs according to Meaning. 8. Classify adverbs according to Structure. 4. From what parts of speech are adverbs derived ? 6. Mention adverbs derived from old genitives and datives. 6. Explain the word ' darkling.' 7. What are the four adverbial prefixes with their meanings ? Give the four adverbial suffixes and their meanings. 8. What adverbs qualify verbs or participles ? What qualify ac^'eetives, or other adverbs ? 0. Mention adverbs that have conjunctional power. 10. Tabulate the Pronominal Adverbs. 11. How are adverbs compared? What difference formerly existed betwee the comparison of adjectives and adverbs ? 12. Explain the phrases, ' clean gone,' 'to stick fast,' ' to ride hard,' 'you dad right.' 18. How are Compoimd Adverbs formed? xn. • 1. Define FBBPOsrnoir, and explain its use. How do Prepositions differ from Conjunctions? 2. What relations do prepositions chiefiy express? 3. Classify prepositions according to meaning and structu/re. 4. How do Simple and Compound Prepositions differ in origin from VerbaJl prepositions? 6, Whi^ axe verbal prepositions in reality? id OfiX PRAXIS. 241 6. Oire a lift of simple prepositions, and explain them etymologically. 7. Qive a list of compound prepositions, and explain them etymologically. 8. Give a list of verbal prepositions, and explain them etymologically. 9. Why are prepositions more frequently used in modern than in ancient languages ? 10. When prepositions are affixed to verbs what change do they often produce in the verb ? 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 16. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. xm. Define CoNJXTNcnonr. • Classify coi\junction8 according to meaning. Classify conjunctions according to structure. Explain the meaning of ' coordinate ' and ' subordinate.* How are Coordinate Conjunctions divided ? How are Subordinate Conjunctions divided? Give another classification of conjunctions, and illustrate it by examples. Define ' correlative.* What are the Correlative Coiyunctions ? Give a list of simple coi^junctions and explain thorn etymologically. Give six examples of derived conjunctions. , . Give six examples of compound conjunctions. Hew may Adverbs, Prepositions, and Conjunctions be distinguished t Give examples of 'but' as a relative, a preposition, a conjunction, aii adverb. Give examples of 'after' as an adjective, an adverb, a preposition, a conjunction. Give instances of other words which are adverbs, prepositions, or conjunctions according as we use them. Show that 'that' the conjunction is one and the same as ' that' the demon- strative prono\m. What are Interjections ? Give the five senses of e» as a suffix. Give the five senses of 0r as a suffix. Give the five senses of-tn^ as a suffix. Give the etymology of the monosyllabic coi\junction8 and prepositions. What is Home Tooke's theory respecting the particles ? What is the suppcied origin of all nouns ending in thl What is the supposed origin of all nouns ending in ed or its equivalent, and in en ? Give the etymology of Smith, earth, girth, truth, health, bacon, heaven, bread, brawn, field, flood, month, mouth, moth, dawn, chum, haft, head, fiend, friend. Give the etymology of Yes, no, perhaps, yesterday, to-morrow, morniug'. quickly, lol lief, fain, about. 5ow does ' between' differ from ' among' ? \l Jl!; 'ill I tRil ill 'I I :ip iji! I f 242 .\NALTSI& OP THE BITGLISH LANGUAGE. .1 28. What is the m What is meant by the Substance, Quality, and Quantity of a proposi<4p>9 9. When is a term said to be 'distributed' ? JO. What are th^ rules for the distribution of terms? 11. Give examples of the four kinds of propositions. 12. Explain the terms ' Categorical,' ' Hypothetical.' 13. How may 'Hypotheticalfl' be divided? % 14. How are Hypotheticals reduced to Categoricals? 16. How is the quantity of Indefinite Propositions determined? 16. What is meant by the * matter' of a proposition ? 17. Examine the following propositions and state their Substance, Quantity and QoftUty. i. All virtuous men are rewarded. ii. No one can believe all tha^ historians say. iii. Some books are instructive. iy. Not in outward charms shotdd men build their pretension* ^ ph«i» f . Some political evils are not to be avoided, fi. Veni, vidi, vici. Tii. Iron is heavy. \^» (Jidiibit the Division of Proposition in tabular form. PRAXIS. 243 .*,»•■ XV. 1. How are Propoaition, Predicate, and Subject defined grammatically f 2. Define Sentence. How many kinds of sentences are there? 8. Define Simple Sentence, Complex Sentence, Compound Sentence. 4. Exhibit in tabular form a division of sentence. 6. What are the < essential ' parts of every sentence? 6. What is meant by Complement of predicate and Extension of predicate ? 7. Explain with examplod the meaning of Noun sentence, Adjective sentence, and Adverb sentence. 8. Of what parts does a Complex sentence consist ? Explain them fully. d. What are the components of a Compound sentence ? Explain them fully. 10. Analyse the following Simple Sentences : — i. The two men climbed the steep mountain in silence. ii. In summer he took his frugal meal in the open air. iii. Long ere noon all sounds in the village were silenced. iv. In Brussels there was a sound of revelry by night. V. Expense ought to be limited by a man's means. vi. The Ancient Christians were animated by a noble love to each other, and a strong hope of immortality. yii. Overwhelmed by the sight, yet speechless, the priest and the maiden gazed upon the scene. viii. The death of Caesar threw all Bome into consternation. ix. Your father returned home yesterday. X. ' Canst thou draw out leviathan with a hook ? ' xi. The perception of the ridiculous does not necessarily imply bitter- ness. zii. They returned to their own country fiill of the discoveries they h&(\ ma'^.e. XIV. W9-i' xiii. Convinced of the necessity, he resigned himself to his fate. The lowing herd winds slowly o'er the lea. Him the almighty power, Hurled headlong flaming from the ethereal sky With hideous ruin and combustion down To bottomless perdition. How oft the sight of means to do ill deeda Makes ill deeds done. Zfl. ■ 244 XTU. zyiu. XIZ. XX. ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. . . a rich throne, as bright as sunny day, On which there sat most brave, embellished With royal robes and gorgeous array, A maiden queen.' To check this plague, the skilful farmer chaff And blazing straw before his orchard burns. .... who pierce, With vision pure, into those secret stores Of health, and life, and joy. In ancient times, the sacred plough employed The kings and awful fathers of mankind. U. Analyse the following Complex Sentences : — i. It was so cold in the year 1830, that the Thames was frozen over. ii. Many learned men write so badly that they cannot be understood. iii. Kain fertilises these fields which spread their bounty to God's i-reatiires. iv. Maay books cost more than they are worth. V. When the king heard the news he was frightened, vi. ' Thou shalt honour thy fath&r and thy mother that thy days be long.' yii. When Jesus was twelve years old he went up to the temple with his brethren, viii. Foolg rush in where angels fear to tread. ix. ' Where the carcase is there will the eagles be gathered together.' X. He cannot write because he has injured his hand, xi. As a man lives so will he die. xii. Whene'er I Malk abroad how much I learn from the beauties of nature around me. 12. Analyse the following Compound Sentences : — i. The clergy were much displeased at the fashion, and one deigymaa , is said to have preached a sermon against it. ii. He looked at her sorrowfully, but without manifesting either vexa- tion or surprise, iii. He was a bad man, therefore he was not respectel by his subjects. iv. War is attended with desolating effects, for it is confessedly the scourge of oar angry passions. J. He arrived a,t the right moment, or I should have l^een lost. Maxis. 245 Ti. The life of the queen bee aeems to be all enjoyment^ yet It if only an idle life. ▼ii. With a slow and* noiselees footstep, Comes that messenger divine, Takes the vacant (^hair hekAn me, Lays her gentle hand on mine. viii. Birds 8e IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) A ^ 1.0 I.I 1^128 ■50 ^^ 2.2 2.0 11-25 i 1.4 1.6 '/ r V '^ > r -> '^ > ^ y /^ Photographic Sciences Corporation 33 WEST MAIN STMIT WEBSTER, N.Y. MSM (716) •73.4503 ^^^V^^ ^.v^ Cv ^ 256 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. Sure fate of all, beneath whose rising ray Each star of meaner merit fades awfly ! Oppressed we feel the beam directly beat, These sons of glory please not till they set. 44. Are the following statements consistent with facts ? All males are of the masculine gender. We have in English six cases of nouns. John is the nominative case to the verb. Men are in the plural number, because they mean many. The s cannot be a contraction for his, for it is put to female nouns. — Johnson. 46. Correct the errors, if any occur to you, in the following passages : Who should I meet the other day but my old friend.— Addison. I cannot tell who to compare them to. — Bunyan. We are still at a loss who civil power belongs to. — Locke. My son is to be married to I know not who. — Goldsmith. My desire has been for some years past to retire myaelf to some of oiu American plantations. — Cowley. Any word that will conjugate is a verb. Thou, Nature, partial Nature, I arraign ! — Bums. 46. Explain the difference between irregular and defective verbs in English. Is it possible to classify as regular a large proportion of the so-called irregular verbs ? 47> How do you account for the forms am, be, and was in the verb substantive? Illustrate your explanation by similar forms of the verb substantive in other languages. 48. How do you account for the fact that the earlier stages of a language are richer in forms and inflexions than the later ? 49. Mention any forms and infiexions which are gradually dying out in Eng- lish, and thus show that the process of simplification is still continuing in the language. 60. Examine the English of the following passage, referring each word to the language from which it is derived : At the death of the king, his chief wife and several of his followers are immolated, that they may attend him in the next world. When a monarch succeeds to the throne, he sacrifices at least one wife and many followers, merely to show that he can exercise his prerogative. WOOLWICH COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION. 257 re? in 61. Gire example of words adopted into English from other langnages than those alluded to in (1). 62. What is meant by a noun of multitude ? Give examples of such noons, and write a series of sentences showing their peculiarities of constmc- tion. d3. How dr you explain the substitution of his for its in the following, and many other passages of the Bible ? — The fruit tree bearing fruit after his kind. 54. Write a series of short sentences showing the right and the wrong use of e« and Man; of or, nor, and neither; of each, either, and both; of here tatii. there ; of hither, whither, and thither ; and of henee, whence, and thence. 66. Explain accurately the meaning of the term passive voice. How is th« passive formed in English ? Can it be called a true passive so far as formation is concerned ? Give examples of true passive formations from other tongues. 66. Examine the English of the following sentences and explain the allnsioiis : 1 . This was the most unkindest cut of all. 2. Earthlier happy is the rose distilled. 3. And Nicanor lay dead in his harness. 4. But mice and rats and such small deer Have been Tom's food for many a year. i. For 'tis the sport to have the engineer Hoist with his own petard. 6. The fattest hog in Epicurus' sty. 7. Lay not that flattering unction to your soul. 0. I have thee on the hip. 9. And mistress of herself, thoiigh China fall. 10. Why, man, he doth bestride the narrow world like a Colossua. 67. Explain the meaning and give the derivation of the following word* : Apocryphal, alphabet, didactic, sardonic, sarcastic, tautological, enthu- siastic, orgy, organ, mystery, epitaph, pyramid, hieroglyphic, and night- ingale. 68. Is it possible for a language to remain stationary ? What are the causes which have given rise to the greatest changes in English, and what are the causes which tended most to fix and settle the language ? 50. Write a grammatical sentence and then analyse it, showing the partf ottt of which it is made. 60. Explain accurately the meaning and ubc of coqjngation and infleadon is grammar. •1. Diitingoisb between auxiliary, irregular, and defeetive vnbb in gramoiat. ■' v. ^iil, 258 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 66 67 Write a few sentences containing examples of each of those kinds of verbs. 62. Compare the English language as a means of expressing thought with any other language with which you may be acquainted. 63. Enumerate the parts of speech, and show the use of each in a sentence. 64. What do you understand by cardinal and ordinal numerals? Compare the English numerals with those of any other language. 65. Explain the names of the months, and of the days in the week. What is the derivation of bissextile, and what is its English equivalent ? Give L list of words in common use derived directly from the Celtic, Latin, and Scandinavian elements in the English language. Explain the construction of the words printed in italics in the following passages : — (a) That same year the Queen died in Lindsay, At Westminster I ween his body they did lay. (b) Let bring a car^wAccZ here into this hall, But look that it have his spokes all. 68 Explain the original and secondary meanings of the words printed in italic in the following passages : (a) For this believe, that impudence is now A cardinal virtue. (b) Skilled in no other arts was she But dressing, patching, repartee ; And just as humour rose or fell. By turns a slattern or a belle. (p) True faith, like gold into the furnace cast, Maintains its sterling puroness to the last. {d) Thus, utmost lands are ransacked to afford The far-fetched dainties and the costly board. («) The ordeal was an established method of trial among the Anglo- Saxons. (/) And Jonathan gave his artillery unto his lad, and said unto him* Go, carry them to the city. ((f) The fierce Pratorians threw their swords into the scale. (A) There is no need to be scrupulously critical in distinguishing between them. (t) They must not think that all about them are such idioCi as not to Bpj ont the prevarication, (i) And mistress of herself, though China fall. {I) Hypocn'ny, detest her as we may. Woolwich competitive EXAMmATioN. 259 ft 60. Explain the meaning of the following grammatical terms : Letter, word, sentence, voice, mood, tense, person, number, and gender. 70. Are there any true cases in English? Explain the use of prepositions in the formation of cases. 71. What is the use of the subjunctive mood in grammar? Give examples of its use in English. 72. Give the derivations of the following words : Aught, many, nostril, threshold, pigmy, cubit, ell, ironmonger, wharfinger, harbinger, arbour, haven, and heaven. 73. Explain the meaning of the word verb. How many conjugations of the verb are there in English ? 74. What is meant b^ the infinitive, imperative, subjunctive, and indicative moods in Englibh ? 75. Explain the meaning of the term Syntax, and show its use in grammar. 76. Give as complete a list as you can of words which change their meaning with their accent. 77. Out of how many elements is the English language formed? Is it pos- sible to write a sentence composed entirely of one of these elements ? If it is, write such a sentence. 78. Mention the languages from which the English language is derived. In what proportions are those lauguages represented in modem English ? 79. Give a lint of foreign woid.° which have been natiiralised in English since the year 16G0. 80. Explain such expressions as ' Johi: his book,' and ' the gate which opened of his own accord.' Explain the formation and use of its. 81. Explain the use of person, number, gender, mood, tense, and voice in grammar. 82. Quote several English proverbs and explain them. 83. Define what is meant by a verb in grammar. Explain the difference between the active and passive voices of a verb. 84. Define what is meant by a noun substantive. How many cases has the noun substantive in English ? 86. Li what way do nouns substantive usually form their plurals ? Give some examples of irregular plurals in English. 86. Explain what is meant by an adverb. What part do adverbs play in grammar? 87. Give a list of English prepositions, and explain the meaning and force of each. 88. What do you understand by simple and compound sentences ? Give boma examples of each kind of sentence. •i i:|: ''/l* >>M 260 ANALYSIS OP THE ENOUSll LANGUAGB. 89. Whf t is tho meaning of grammar, and what are its uses ? 90. How many participles are there in English ? Explain the use of participles in English, and compare it with the use of participles in other languages. 91. Explain why some verbs are irregular or defective, and mention some of each kind in English. 92. Cor\jugate the verb substantive in English, and show that it is made up of several verbs. 98. Give a list of words imported into English during the seTMiteenth and eighteenth centuries, mentioning in eaih case the country firom which tho word came. 94. Show the effect of the Norman Conquest on the English language, by in- stances of words still in use. 96. Explain accurately, and illustrate by examples, the difference between shall and tvill, should and would, and am and he. 96. Explain the derivation and formation oigvll in the sense of dupe,£e?ontVin, goblin, gazette; buck in the sense of wash, host, tournament, trade, spinster, gossip, and bridegroom. 97. Mention any parts of the verb which have a tendency to become obsolete. Show that this tendency is common to other languages. 98. Explain the derivations of the following words : Candidate, sycophant, cur- few, history, algebra, almanack, hypocrite, seraph, assassin, and gazette. 99. Give a list of English words which, with the same spelling, have different meanings. 1 00. Explain the derivation of the following words: Ambition, attention, Bible, cannon, companion, gospel, gossip, panic, and paradise. 1 01. Explain the derivation of Cardinal, club, curfew, dunce, guillotine, pagan, sacrament, tribulation, ttmic, and tyrant. i02. Explain the derivation of Biggin, calico, cicerone, dragonnade, essay, Hugonot, husband, kickshaws, miscreant, neophyte, noyade, Tory, and Whig. 103. Explain the terms. Demonstrative, superlative, cardinal, ordinal, diminu- tive, and patronymic, as used in English grammar, and give instances of each. «04. Take any regular English verb, and run it through its numbers, moods, and tenses, in the active voice. 106. Do the same with the verb substantive. i WOOLWIOU COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION. 261 WOOLWICH COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION. REV. W. STEfiBINO. Jnly 1859— January 1869. 1. Explain the following terms : Imperfect tense, indirect qnestion, proper name, analogy, snbjectiye, objective. 2. ' It is necessary that he who desires fiime, a«^ in a way to deserve it.' Is this constmction correct ? Explain the meaning of subjonotiTe mood. When is the subjunctive mood used in English ? 8. Is the English language capable of receiving accessions readily ? In what ways does it borrow or invent new terms ? Compare it in these points with any other language with which you may be acquainted. 4. Distinguish between the following : Paraphrase, gloss, commentaiy, illus> tr*tion, version, translation, analysis, manual, abstract. 5. How many parts of spaech are thc.?8 in English ? Explain the names they bear ; and show how those names express their real character. 6. In how many different ways are the feminine gender and the plural num« ber of substantives formed in English? Account for the variety of formation. 7. Point out and oormct errors or defects, if any, in the following sentences : They wear a garment like that of the Scythians, but a language pecu* liar to themselves. — Sir John MancleviUe. They were planned by a clever servant, who to say all that can be said in his praise, is, th«t he is worthy of such a master as he has. — Cobbett's Rural Eidis. Let us hear Dr. Lingard, to prevent his society firom presenting whoce work to me the sincere and pious Samuel Butler was ready to go down upon his knees. — Ibid. Sixteen have been sentenced to suffer death, but two only were left for execution. — Ibid. 8. Explain the following terms: Auxiliary, impersonal, inti&asitive, and reflective verbs, and verb substantive. Give examples. i 262 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 9. To what langnagas, and for what classes of words respectively is Engliih most indebted ? To which respectively can you trace the word* in the following passage? A vast metropolis with glistening spires, With theatres, basilicas adorned ; A scene of light and glory, a dominion That has endured the longest among men. 10. Compose ft short passage to illustrate the use of ellipse, pleonasm, and antithesis. 11. Explain the word ' synonyme.' Give examples of words which are properly, and of words which are improperly oied as synonymous. Aooonnt for the erroneous use. 13. What is signified in grammar by the expressions : ' Governed hy* agreeing with, depending on, in apposition to, used absoluieiy. Give examples. 13. Explain the expressions in italics: 'What is it o'doekt' 'It wants fifteen minutes to one by railway time, not but thai this is no rear on why you should hurry away.' 14. Distinguish between composition and derivation of words. Are bishopric, kingly, friendship, compounds or derivatives? 15* State the rule for the formation of comparatives and superlatives. In- stance and account for any five exceptions. 16. Distinguish between the use of the full stop, colon, semicolon, and comma. Give examples. 17. Why have wheat, pitch, gold, deer, sheep, no plural ; and bellows, scissors, mathematics, no singular form? Instance other substantives which have only one number. 18. Instance words which are not pronounced as they are written ; and account for the inconsistency. 19. Point out and defend anything unusual in the construction of the words in italics : Him ought not to be a tyrant. The rule is also general but that it admits of his exceptions. The cities who aspired to liberty. For not to have been dipped in Lethe's lake Could save the son of Thetis /rom to (2m. 30. Point out and correct the errors or inaccuracies in the following: Every constable amounting to 240 had his cresse . The town consists of three distinct quarters, of \ 'hich the western one is by far the larger. Every sort of legislature resolve themselves into this. SI. Instance words, which, being borrowed by English from other languages^ WOOLWICH COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION. 263 Aaye had their meaning or spelling altered. Account, where it is p2(iy«(2 the hero. : He was given a book. . Please it your honours To call me to your senate, I'll deliver Myself your loyal servant. 26. How do you explain the construction of the following passages ? Rewrite them in a fuller form : Wit, whither wilt.— iSAiiAr«p«are. £ven share hath he that keeps his tent and he to field ' doth go.' — Chapman. He's heir in double trust, First as I am his kinsman and his subject, Strong both against the deed. — Shakapeare. 27. What is meant by an exception ? Give five or six instances of exceptions to rules of grammar. 28. What is meant by obsolete ? Give five or six instances. 29. Compose two or more sentences, containing specimens of the different past tenses of the indicative mood active. SO. In what respect is English defective as compared with any other language or languages ? How does it supply its deficiencies ? tl. Point out and explain any peculiarity in the construction of the following : What with pain, and what with fear, he was unable to proceed. He is gone a-hunt?ng. Him who disobeys me disobeys. — Milton. This lodging likes me better. — Shakspeare 264 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. Good name in man or woman, dear my lord, Is the immedirte jewel of their bohIb. — Shakt^r§, Thon most awfbl form ! Bisest from forth thy silent sea of pines. — Colmdgt. 32. By what ooi\jttnctions are clauses expressing a purpose, consequence, oppo* sition, condition, cause, introduced ? 13. Enumerate several defective verbs and nouns, naming the parts that are wanting in them, and accounting, when you can, for the want. 34. Name the moods used in English; and state briefly their uses. Give examples. 36. Explain the terms traruitwe and itUranntive. When and why do they sometimes seem to change characters ? Give examples. 36. State, with examples, the various causes of differences between the spelling and the pronunciation of words in English. 37. Write out a list of the terminations of adjectives in English ; and say from what language each has been borrowed. 3ft What peculiarity is there in the use of the words in italics ? Woe is me. This said, they departed. It contains the same information as the Lady Rich her letter. Dark with excessive bright thy skirts appear. 39. Is there any difference in the meaning of the following words : Ye and you ; all, each, and every ; farther and further ; between and among ; severally and respectively. 40. Explain the formation of the following words : Children,- twain, brethren, pease, alms, swine. 41. Point out any peculiarity in the formation of Inmost, could, quoth, tapster, methinks. 42. Why are some letters in the following words retained in the spelling, though not pronounced? — Viscount, medicine, debt, would, hymn, sove- reign, chronicle, hour. 43. Explain the use of the tenses and moods in the following sentences : Darius at once retreats. Scott, Byron, and Wordsworth have flourished in this century. Byron flourished thirty years ago. He is come. Would it were so. 44. Do the literal meanings of the tenns, indicative, subjunctive, infinitive, explain the uses of the moods so named ? 61 6k 60 61. 62. WOOLWICH COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION. 266 |>8ter, ing, ove- ive, 40. Explain the old forms : He went a-hunting. He went for to do it. Some will burn a houie an it wero but to roast their eggs. 46. In what respects is the English alphabet defective or redundant ? 47. What circumstances most commonly lead to the introduction of new words in a language ? Instance words so imported into English. 48. Explain the terms oblique, transitive, root, part of speech, as used in Eng- lish grammar. 49. Distingniah between clause, sentence, phrase, paragraph, proposition. 60. What is meant in grammar by ooncordi Give examples of the several kinds of grammatical concord. 61. Explain the form of the possessive case singular, e.g. Father's, Will the same explanation suffice for the plural possessive. Fathers' ? 62. Why is the past tense killed said to bo regular and struck irregular in form- ation ? What is meant by the terms regular aud irregular as applied in English grammar? 63. To what extent is a correct use of words facilitated by an acquaintance with their etymology ? 64. Compare English and any other language with which you may be ac- quainted with reference to the order of words in a sentence. 56. Of what inflexions are English a(\jectives, substantives, and verbs capable ? 66. In what sense can it be said that or and nor are conjunctions, the letter y sometimes a consonant, and w sometimes, or always, a vowel, and that the past tense is formed regularly by the addition oi d or ed to the present ? 67. Does a participle, used as an adjective, differ from an ordinary adjective, an intransitive verb used transitively from an ordinary transitive, and a noun of multitude from a noun in the plural number ? 68. Do the literal significations of proper name, common noun, and perfect and pluperfect express the ways in which the forms so named are used in English? 60. On what grounds have the foUowing expressions been sometimes defended ? Than whom. It is m£. You was. The Duke with his sons are here. I walked a hundred mile. 60. State several of the most general rules for forming the plural in English ; and mention exceptions to them. 61. Distinguish between accent and quantitij in English. Give examples. 62. What were the usual wmvh nf f<. niinL' the {ilurul and genitive in old English ? Do any words still bo I'urm them? t i .If I!! 266 ANALYSIS OP THE ENOLTSH LA50UA0B. 6S. The Donn and the verb have been said to be the two original partnof ipeech, ' all thn others being substitutes, abbreyiiitions, jr contractions, for the purpose of facility and despatch.' What is meant by this statement ? 64. State, with examples, reasons for the diversity in the pronunciation, in English, of syllables or parts of syllables spelt ia the same way. 06. Explain the construction in the following expressions, and give examples of similar constructions : He is about to die ; The wine tastes sour ; Ah me I Four o'clock. 60. Explain the term infinitive ; and mention the various uses and forms of tiiat mood. 67- To what languages may the terminations of the following words respectively be traced ? — Nation, awful, double, sympathy, gracious, valour, pathetic, astonish. 68. Explain etymologically the following forms: Innermost, whence, methinks, widower, eyry, farthing. 69. What are the essoutial parts of every English sentence? Give examples of nmple, compound, and compfcx sentences. 70. Mention, with examples, the various forms and uses of the present tenw in English. 71. State the rules for the formation of the comparative and superlative degrees in English. Can you mention any exceptions ? 72. Are the following expressions good English? Give reasons for your opinion : ' Mutual friendH,' ' talented,' ' unreliable,' ' a man of talent.' 73. In how many different ways may compound nouns be formed? 74. Explain the following statements : ' The imperfect participle is often used as a genind.' ' The present tendency of the English language is to oon^ vert strong verbs into weak.' 76. What internal evidence does English contain of its derivation from several different languages? 76. Can you account for the spelling of the terminations of ' deferred,' * em- ployed,' ' the Henrys,' ' infallible,' ' saddest,' as compared respectively with ' differed,' ' defied,' ' miseries,' ' incurable,' ' longest.' 77. Mention grammatical terms which are used in English grammar in sensei differing from their original meanings. 78. Can you justify or explain the following old expressions ?— ' It am I ;' ' His pavilion were dark waters ; ' ' It liketh thee ; ' ' I never was nor never will be false.' 79. Are the following expressions grammatically correct or not? Give reasons for your opinion : WOOLWICH COMPETITIVE EXAMIKATION. 267 ed He ii a bettor philosopher than a stateaman. The tenth and the eleventh boyv in the class. The words are as follow. This is one of the most successful works that ever was executed. Death has come to all greater, better, wiser than L 80. Explain the force of the rerb in the following expressions: It strikes four; The earth mores ; The fish weighs five pounds ; A house to let 81. GiTe examples of the following rules: * When the subject, though having a plural form, is Ntill regarded as one thing, the verb is singular.' A collective noun takes a singular verb when the idea of unity is promi- nent, but a plural verb when the idea of plurality is prominent. 82. What is the force of the genitive case in English ? Give examples of diflbr- ent meanings it may be used to express. 83. Show, by examples, the meanings of in, re, and /or, in composition. 84. Point out and explain any peculiar!^ in the spelling of^wherever, freer, schiam, could. 86. Take any four words which have undergone important changes in meaning since their original introduction into English ; and account for the changes. 86. Show the uses in English of the infinitive and the several participles. 87. Point out the redundancies and deficiencies in our alphabet. 88. Enumerate the most commonly used conjunctions. How may coi^junctions be classified? 89. State, with examples, the rules for the sequence, i.e. succession, of tenses in English. do. Which mode of spelling do you prefer, and why ? — Honor or honour, apoetaey or apoeUujf, travelled or traveled, realize or realise, dependent or dependant, jewelry atjeweUery. 91. Explain, with examples, the terms irregular, defective, and exception, as used in English Grammar. 92. Explain the uses of ' by^ in the following expressions : By-and-by ; day by day ; ten feet by twenty ; he was by himself ; by him the man looked short ; he stood by ; he swore by his gods. 93. Point out and explain anything unusual in the words or construction of the following sentences: I do you to wit of this fact. They left off beating of Paul. He WHf let and hindered in running the race. .Thif is expedient for you not only to do, but also to be forwaid « 7Murago. If, 1' * W it ' M II tm ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAOB. 94. What is the usual order of words in an English sentence? Quote ct compose sentences in which this order is departed from. 96i Account for the existence of synonyms in a language. Instance words which are, and words which appear to be, but in fact are not^ synonyms. 96. What functions do the articles perform in English ? Illustarate the use of them by examples. 97> By what forms of the verb can you express habit, command, the act of the verb without reference to an agent, and an action at once future, perfect, and continuous ? 98. Explain the following assertions : Every sentence must contain a subject and a predicate. English is not so well adapted to rhyming versification as French, Spanish, or Italian. The present tendt.ncy of the English language is to reject foreign plurals. 99. Explain any peculiarities in the construction of the following sentences : He received double as much again. I cannot but think you are in the wrong. He will not succeed in this, be he ever so wise. All of us have given to us a task to perform. 100. Mention differences between the language of the present day and Old English in the mode of declining and conjugating words. 101. What is the use of prepositions? Distinguish between prepositions and ooigunctions; and mention prepositions which may be employed as con- junctions. 102. State, with examples, the signification in composition of the particles, oon, dis, ward, and ther. 103. What is meant by a relative pronoun ? Enumerate, with an example of the use of each, the several words employed in English as relatives. 104. When are e and g hard, and when soft ? State the rule, with any excep- tion to it. 105. Mention, with examples, various ways of forming the feminine gender in English. 106. Point out, and correct, any grammatical errors or obscuritieB in the follow- ing sent^Aces : She stood back in the room— more backward ^ good deal than she was accustomed to do on such occasions. I am disposed to think that to persons in trade the difficulty of answering these questions would not be so great if they will imdtrtake to diicus!> ihem. 1 .„ , ''""'''''^ '''''^^ mMm.„o^. 269 •«. i» wh« w.^,™"* ^ *^^ -P""' of being compoM, ^ „ *". Is there any peculiarifv • *u following sentences? ^ '° "^^ "'^^"^ «^'e««ed by th. rerb in the The violet smells sweet. -The wine tastes four. He is doing well. 112. Explain, with examoles fha ♦ ^ntrauHti^e, aa appi"' tf^rb? ^ ''^''''^' ^^'-^^ ^/-«t., and Ki * , ^'^n^ect or justify the following Rp^ •. . incorrect or obscure ; '*^ *^^ sentences when l* *Hia sport ropnlied hiH foM ». -i da not tUni h. ,„ the tlu.rom,h i • f *' """^ ■"»'•• 3- 'The oath taken by the r«^_ ^ _^ ia. been «„rfe i. theUws of S^' ""°° »V »>Ii.tle eha^ «m wrong, nor no man wrong.' '.: I 270 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 9. ' The assembly consists of forty-seven members, two being elected by cineteen districts, and three by each of three other districts.' 10. ' Sir Theodore was one of the few South Sea directors, who (though he lost considerably) did not lose his character.' 11. ' If this be him we mean, let him beware.' 12. ' In every minutise they manifeskcd great interest.' 13. ' Prospered beyond his utmost expectations, he returned home.' 14. 'It contained sundry memorandas of money paid by the archdeacon.' 15. ' By a telegram received this morning the prince had arrived, and is in the castle.' 16. ' I do uot believe they ever did any real harm to any one ; or, if they did^ were unfeignedly sorry for it.' IT. ' They would allow Dr. Priestley or Channing to be clergy of the Church of England, only not Woolston or Hume.' 18. 'If this gentleman would make himself practically acquainted with the subject, he would not find it so simple as he is inclined to believe it, and is desirous to lead the public into the same error.' > • 10. 'The king advises that between those oflScials, by whom business can be carried on by word of mouth, the writing of letters should not be allowed, as having a tendency to hinder controversies on unimportant matters.' 80. ' Many a Frenchman, German, and American are to be found in London.' 81. ' As you write to say how glad you would be to be informed of where I intoid going, I now do so in compliance with your request.' 28. ' His evident compassion was not the least painful, though touching, part of the spectacle.' 83. ' There are very few who know how to be idle and innocent : every diversion they take is at the expense of some virtue.' 24. 'He taught them what human nature was, and which knowledge was unquestionably necessary to enable a man to do his duty in the world.' 26. ' Never will the cardinals agree among one another to elect t pope the secretary of the last pontiff.' 26. ' Every one of us talks worse English every hour of our lives.' 27. ' It is said that the prince will limit his stay in the Highlands till about the 10th of September.' 28. '.Against these appointments a very few of extreme views had only ventured to feebly remonstrate.' 89. 'All the Stuart sovereigns had very few good qualities.' '^ WOOLWICH COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION. 271 9ion lid; the >ui 80. ' Kixig John and King Edward I. wore severally men of the greatest inca- pacity, and of the greatest capacity for government.' 31. * Their want of merit is the real reason that none of them have attained much reputation, and are all of them declining in favour day by day.' 32. ' I have lormerly read the answer to such an application to the prince.' 13. ' No one regretted more than myself that the matter was brought before the public until all other modes of redress had been tried.' 34. ' I would have given little consideration to the news if an Englishman's opinion did not confirm it.' 35. ' This gentleman may be a good churchman, but his whole sympathies are evidently with her enemies.' 36. ' Tourists may break the journey at any of the stations betwen Carnforth and Coniston Lake, to enable passengers to visit Fumess Abbey.' 37. ' Some pertons will have perceived with siirpriBe, that an Englishman should have co^ uted to take service in a foreign court.' 38. ' This event v^ 1 hereafter take rank among the annals of the empire.' 39. ' His brave heart and love of adventure made him an agreeable companion, and many friends.' 40. ' The practice is increasing, since the French treaty, of adiilterating wines.' 41. ' The Senate had decreed a separate triumph to both of them.' 42. ' A Scotchman will not marry on a Saturday. Except when the last day of the year falls on a Saturday, it is the favourite marrying day in Scotland.' 43. ' Messrs. W.'s covered case for valuable plans and maps will be found as useful as a tin case, at one-fourth the price.' 44. ' Ifum governs both the nominative and the accusative cases.' 45. ' The reigning sovereign of the United Kingdom shall be successively the sovereign of the order.' 46. ' The House of Commons has, with becoming dignity, supported their own privileges.' 47. ' I will, fbr my conscience sake, spend all my lives, if I had a thousand, against all the world that shall draw sword against our religion.' 48. ' It was in the monastery of St. John that these MSS. were discovered, and are now deposited in the Bodleian Library.' 40. ' The Empress Catherine sent for the ambassador last week, and desired he will Older for her a bust of Charles Fox.' ':l H 1 i 1 !!! ill i ! 272 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANOUAOB. 60. ' The new Italian banknote is adorned in the two lower conien with po^ traits of Cavour and of Christopher Columbus.' 51. ' The English commissioners intend to bring over their own fire engines, all of which are exactly equal in water-throwing force to eight of the ordinary Paris engines.' 63. ' The Crystal Palace is almost the first place ever visited by a foreigner in England.' 58. ' I have been alwa} , accustomed to believe that your professions of friendship to myself and late lamented husband were sincere.' 54. ' I desire that the coronation gift of 60,000 ducats, presented to me by the country, shall be dedicated to the purpose I have indicated.' 55. ' The trade of Marseilles vastly increased since the French have had Algiers.' 66. ' From the judgment of this coxat he appeals not, to which as provided by the letters patent the appeal lies ; viz. the archbishop, but to the crown.' 57. ' Messrs. S. request us to state, that neither they nor any relation of theirs are in any way concerned in this suit.' 58. ' This publication being somewhat of an official character, I think the profession are entitled to its being accurate.' 59. ' I have no reason to think other than well of you, nor do I think other, believe me.' 60. ' If your correspondent has any real object in view, he will furnish me with the names of the persons to whom he alludes ; and I have no means of making this known to him except through the medium of your columns, and on receiving which he may be sure that the fullest investigation will be proceeded with.' REV. R. C. TRENCH. 1865-1856. 1. The plural is usually formed in English by adding « to the singular. Ex- plain the following plurals which are otherwise formed : Oxen, swine, kine, b. ithren, feet, mice, phenomena, banditti. 8. In what two ways do we form comparatives and superlatives in English? Explain the comparatives : Elder, better, rather, farther, further ; and the superlatives: first, mosti stating the positives on which thejr ajre formed. TfOOLWICH COMPBTinVE BXAMINATIOir. 273 S. Write a sentence of four or five lines on any subject yon please, which shall consist exclusiyely of words drawn from the Anglo-Saxon portion of our language. ^ 4. To which branch of the language, the Latin or the Anglo-Saxon, do adjec- tives ending in ful, able, ible, ly, like, some, al, ous, less, severally be- long? Give examples of each, and explain the force of the termination. 5. To which branch of the language, the Latin or the Anglo-Saxon, do sub- stantives ending in ness, hood, head, ment, ion, dom, ty, cy, severally belong ? Give examples of each, and explain the force of the termi- nation. 6. Give the force of the prefixes, dis, mis, fore, pre, pro, de, un, in, and con , and state whether they belong to the Anglo-Saxon or Latin portions of the language. 7< Distinguish between the following words : Each and every; common and mutual ; feminine and effeminate ; childlike and childish ; to oblige and to compel ; to pardon and to forgive. 8. State from what quarters, whether from Anglo-Saxon, the Latin, or else- where, we have derived the following words : Sword, candidate, salary, sycophant, curfew, history, algebra, almanack, daughter, sister, hypo- crite, book, bride, seraph, assassin, coffee, sarcasm, gazette. 9. Give the derivation of Candidate, salary, engine, soldier, bayonet, curfew, ensign, infantry, radical, England, intoxicate, feudal, heresy, homage, gossip. 10. Erom what languages have we derived the following words: Eclipse, mob, arsenal, zenith, tornado, anodyne, parish, parochial, halcyon, priest, war, dwarf, duke, candle, bazaar, regatta, minster? 11. Give the derivations of the following words: Auspice, arsenic, carnival, Stoic, pagan, alms, leopard, renown, solecism, gentle, satire. 12. Write out the following passage, underlining with a single line the Anglo- Saxon words occurring in it, mch two lines the words derived directly from the Latin, and with three the Latin derived directly through the French ; also if there are any words derived from any other quarter. Gives not the hawthorn-bush a sweeter shade To shepherds, looking on their silly sheep. Than doth a rich embroidered canopy To kings that fear their subjects' treachery? yes, it doth ; a thousand-fold it doth. And to conclude, — the shepherd's homely curds, His thin cold drink out of his leather bottle, Bis wonted sleep under a fresh tree's shade, lii 274 ANALTSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. All which secur* and sweetly he ei\jo7s, ; Is far beyond a prince's delicates, His Tiands sparkling in a golden cup, His body coached in a carious bed, When care, mistmst, and treason wait on him. Of man's first disobedience, and the firuit Of that forbidden tree whose mortal taste Brought death into the world and all our woe. With loss of Eden, till one greater Man Bestore us, and regain the blissful seat, Sing, heavenly Muse, that on the secret top Of Oreb, or of Sinai, didst inspire That shepherd, who first taught the chcaen seed In the beginning how the hearens and earth Bose out of Chaos. In the above passage (i) either distribute the words according to the languages, Hebrew, Greek, Latin, French, and Anglo-Saxon, from which they are drawn ; (ii) or else distribute them according to the several parts of speech to which they belong. 18. Give the derivation of the following words: Eremite, quaint, heaven, earth, smith, champion, exotic, engine, ecstasy, diamond, citadel, cabal, antidote, anthem, cathedral, romance, remorse, crucible, caitiff. 276 EXAMINATION Papers SOT AT THB OXFOBO LOCA. EXAMINATIONS ^862^1868. JWIOB CATOIDATES, ,8M. 1. PfB- E™», e«,.-. . '*°^'^ '•'*^' *•• *^oup questions should ho ^ *'**'^*' *A* dwdl„<^°i^«""*« tioB «,d Death Wtiodoam ° '"■™'»ln'ed B«nti.L ^.'"'"^"""^^Oy Milton: ^ „ ^"^ Co-re,;.. ?^'°««,"». ■ TheiustH:;:::^"^^^t^^-p-sious: Ambrosial odours ^P^^'«chus huge. 5 Wh«f • .. Cerberean mouths t^^ ''^^^*- «• What ,s the general rule for the f ^' '^'^'^^ «««». •ttbstaatives ? tot, * , "*® lormation of th« ^i , What are the exception, to tl^e^p'^'™' ""»"»'« T 2 Uncouth, Intend, Welkin. S«rbonian bog. Vexed Scylla. The trading flood. 278 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH liANGUAGE. 6. Explain the terms relatire and antecedent, and the grammatical eon- nection existing between them. Illustrate this connection by parsing the relative in the following passages : But who here Will envy whom the highest place exposes? None whose portion is so small Of present pain, that with ambitious mind Will covet more. The prison of his tyranny who rules. JUNIOR CANDIDATES, 1863. 2. Analysis, Parsing, &o. [N.B. Every candidate is required to satisfy the examinwn in this paper. Attention should be paid to spelling, handwriting, punctuation, and correct- ness of expression. Four questions should be answered, of which the first and second must be two.] 1. Analyse the following passagfe, distinguishing in each clause the subject, predicate, &c., and pointing out the connection between the principal and subordinate clauses. [N.B. A verbal analysis is not required.] 'Tis silence all, And pleasing expectation. Herds and flocks Drop the dry sprig, and, mute-imploring, eye The falling verdure. Hush'd in short suspense, The plumy people streak their wings with oil, To throw the lucid moisture trickling off ; And ymt th' approaching sign, to strike at once Into the general choir. EVn mountains, vales, And forests seem, impatient, to demand The promised sweetness. - ? 2. Parse the words to which numbers are prefixed in the following senteneesr, taking care to explain the construction as well as the parts of speech, &c. [N.B. The numbers may be substituted for the words in the answers to this and the following questions. Abbreviations may be used. Rules of Syntax 9t^ not be quoted.] 277 W Shook ftoa w u. .,„<^ f':;'^" h^ (.) .ta«^ (io)WhH»Uiediuifin„„v_.'','^f*"'""'« gloom. 0.) Wlo.e loft//,';/:;;:^' (■')'-"«. the ™^ ^e. «. Give the pa.t tense and past mrf- 1 . 0. state the subiects in - . '• I'ivid torrents. '""°'"^^"^-«^^«»-- J. The bright BuU receives him 3- Winds the whole work ^. Unflesh'd in blood. 5. AU,s off the poise within. '• S: J,"^^^'^ of the Samian saga 7. The Mantnan swain. ^^* 8. As fl,es the father-dust. '• J'"!°f ^iWa's shore. 10. British Tempe. JUNIOR CANDIDATES, 1864. 3. fN.B Ev ^*^^'"' ^^^'^^ *«• Attention sho^dTe^|!^d t '"^.f"^ ^ ^^^'^^ ^he examine™ i„ .v I i 14 2t8 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANOUAQl^. 1. Analyie the following sentences, distinguishing in each clause the sutjeot, predicate, Sec, and pointing out the connecting links between the prindptl and subordinate clauses. [N.B. A verbal or detailed analysis is not required.] Low the woods Bow thoir hoar head ; and, ere the languid sun Faint from the west emits his evening ray, Earth's universal face, deep hid, and chill, Is one wild dazzling waste, that buries wide The works of man The fowls of heaven. Tamed by the cruel season, crowd around The winnowing store, and claim the little boon Which Providence assigns them. 3. Enumerate the 'parts of speech,' and classify each word in the abore passage under its proper denomination in this respect. 3. What are the ordinary inflexions of nouns, pronouns, and verbs ? Cite instances of such inflexions in the above passage. 4. How many cases are there ? State the case and grammatical construction of the following words as they occur in the above passage: 'Their/ •his,' 'ray,' 'waste,' 'that,' 'man', 'season,' 'boon,' * which,' 'them.' fi. Parse each word in these lines : Father of light and life, thou Good supreme t teach me what is good ! teach me Thyself I 0. Explain the following allusions, and either quote the context or state the topics with which they are connected in Thomson's Winter. 1. Ethereal nitre. 3. Sacred to the household gods. 3. Loose-revolving fields. 4. The noblest name of Just. 5. The two Achaian heroes. 6. Awful from the plough. 7. Attic point. 8. Unwearied plying the mechanic tooL 9. His tardy wain. 10. The frantic Alexander of the North. ' OXFORD LOCAL EXAMINATION PAPBRS. 279 JUNIOR CANDIDATES, 1860. 4. Analysis, Parsing, fto. [N.B. Every candidate is required to satisfy the examiners in this paper. Attention should be paid to spelling, handwriting, punctuation, and correct- ness of expression. Candidates are recommended not to dwell too long over any single question, so as (if possible) to answer aU on the paper.] 1. Parse each word printed in Italics in the following passage, showing its oonnection with other words in the sentence to which it belongs : Yet BtUl, even here, content can spread a charm. Redress the clime, and tUl its rage diiarm. Though poor the peasant's hut, h\% feast though tmaUt He sees his little ^^ the fo^ of a//; Sees no contiguous palace rear its head To shame the meanness of his humble shed ; No costly lord the sumptuous banquet deal, To make him loathe his vegetable meal ; But calm, and bred in ignorance and toil, Each vfish contracting, fits him to the soiL ?. Give the past tense indicative and the perfect participle of each of these verbs : FaU, Seethe, Set, Cleave, Chide, Gk), Swell, Bid, Thrive, Sit, Lie, Lay. 8. What is an intransitive verb ? What is a verb in the passive voice f 4. What is a pronoun ? Into what clesses are pronouns divided? 6. Analyse the following passage : Cheerful at mom he wakes from short repose, Breasts the keen air, and carols as he goes ; With patient angle trolls the finny deep, ' Or drives his vent'rous ploughshare to the steep ; Or seeks the den where snow-tracks mark the way, And drags the struggling savage into day. 280 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANOUAOB. 6. Explain the menning of these ozpresBloni : a. The lazy Scheld. b. The wandering Po. 0. Campania's plain. d. Wild Oswego. e. Famed Hydaspea. /. Damien's bod of steel. 7. Briefly express in your own words the substance of the reflexions eon* tained in the passage which begins : Vain, very rain, my weary search to flnd That bliss which only centres in the mind, &o. \ JUNIOR CANDIDATES, 1866. A. Analysis, Parsing, &o. [N.B. Erery candidate is required to satisfy the examiners in this paper. Attention should be paid to spelling, handwriting, punctuation, and correct- ness of expression. C&ndidates are recommended not to dwell too long over any single question, so as (if possible) to answer all on the paper.] 1. Analyse the following passage : Unskilful he to fawn, or seek for power, • . By doctrines fashion'd to the varying hour; Far other aims his heart had learned to prize, More bent to raise the wretched than to rise. His house was known to all the vagrant train ; He chid their wanderings, but relieVd their pain. 2. Parse each word in the first three lines of the above passage, taking care to show the grammatical construction, as well as the part of speech, &c. 3. What is a noun ? Enumerate the various kinds of nouns, and instance objects to which they may severally be applied. 4. How is the past participle formed ? Illustrate your explanation by refer- ence to the following forms: Beceived, cloven, fled, brought, flung, laden, shorn, put. 6. What do you mean by gender ? How should you describe ' child * and 'fowl' in reference to gender? and what are the feminine forms of ' actor, ' executor,' ' hero,' and ' lad ' ? OXFOUD LOCAL EXAMINATION PAPERS. 281 6. Give a brief account of tho gulyoct of Qr)ld«»niith'H Deserted Village, and explain the following ezpresHionsj quoting (if you ciiu) tho coutoxt: a. Labour'd mole. e. Bay'd the whispering wind. b. Mantling bliss. /. Wild Altama. e. Unprofltably gay. g. Muttod woods. 4, Impotence of dreu. h. Life's taper. JUNIOR CANDIDATES, 1867. 6. Analysis, Parsing, &o. [N.B. Eyory candidate is required to satisfy tko examiners in this paper. Attention should be paid to spelling, handwriting, piinctuation, and correct* ness of expression. Candidates are recommended not to dwell too long over any siigle question, ■• as (if possible) to answer all on the paper.] 1. Analyse the following passage : From his native hills He wandered far ; much did he see of men, Their manners, their eiyoymeuts, and pursuits. Their passions and their feelings; chiefly those Essential and eternal in the heart, That, 'mid the simpler forms of niral life, Exist more simple in their elements, And speak a plainer language. 2. Parse each word in the following passages : a. His calling laid aside, he lived at ease. h. The youth resigned A task he was unable to perform c. We parted, nothing willingly. 4» He could afford to suffer With those whom he saw siiffer. 8. Of the following verbs give (a) the past tense and (b) the perfect parti* dple ; and arrange the verbs in two classes according to the former (a) : Ask, Choose, Go, Make, Strive, Wander, Bend, Come, Lay, Quit, Take, Win, Blend, Drink, Lie, Read, Tell, Yearn. 282 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANOUAGB. 4. Give the sense in simple words of the following passage : In dreams, in study, and in ardent thought, Thus was he reared ; much wanting to assist The growth of intellect, yet gaining more. And every moral feeling of his soul Strengthened and braced, by breathing in content The keen, the wholesome air of poverty, And drinking from the well of homely life. 5. Explain and illitstrate Jt^rom the foregoing passages the following gvam- matical tennt*!: Antecedent — auxiliary — case — conjunction — inflexion — mood — prexulwiti' relative — syntax. 6. Explain the following words and phrases, and (where you can) supply the etymology of those marked by italics : Enthusiast — itinerant — rustic — sequestration — equipoise — garrulous — mighty orb of song — unutterable loY&— preternatural — lineaments — superstitions — nervous gait — spon- taneously. JUNIOR CANDIDATES, 1868. 7. Analysis, Parsing, &o. [N.B. Every candidate is required to satisfy the examiners in this paper. Attention shoiild be paid to spelling, handwriting, punctuation, and correctnesfr of expression. Candidates are recommended not to dwell too long over any single question, 80 as (if possible) to answer all on the paper.] 1. Analyse the following passage : And by yon gate. That bars the traveller's road, she often stood. And when a stranger horseman came, the latch Would lift, and in his face look wistfully : Most happy, if, from aught discovered there Of tender feeling, she might dare repeat The same sad question. 2. Parse carefully each word in the following passages . a. The cottage-clock struck eight. h. Yes, it wold have grieved Your very soul to see her. C. I wist not what to do. OXFORD LOCAL EXAMINATION PAPERS. 28R «. GHre in simple words the general senso .f tho following passage: It were a wantonness, and would demand Severe reproof, if we were men wLos(^ hearts Could hold vain dalliance Mith the misery Even of the dead ; contented uhonco to draw A momentary pleasure, never marked By reason, barren of all future gooti. 4. «^«(«)thepasttenseand(6)thopastparti.:,leofthefollowingverb«. ^Id, Tell, Eeceive, Gird, - vSu..^ Leave Creep. Wear, Catch. Eeview. StrilTe. Se. SENIOR CANDIDATES, lg62. 8. English Grammar, inclnding Analysis of Sentences. ^}Hn T7,T^'t'" '" "'^"^'"^ '° '''''^y '^e examiners in this paper of eCssion ^^ '''''°'' '"'"''"'' ^^°^'"^^^°°' ^^^ ^°"-''^- The first four questions should be attempted before any of the others.! 7%is vesper-service closed, without delay, From that exalted station to the plain Descending, we pursued our ^o»?ftt;rt-rf course. In mute composure, o'er the shadowy lake Under a fated sky. [No trace remained ' Of those celestial splendours ; gra/ the vault— Pure, cloudless, etUr ; and the star of eve Was wanting ;^but inferior lights appeared, Faintly, too faint almost for sight ■ iuvA soine Above the darkened hills stood ho/dhj forth In twinkling lustre, ere the boat attained Her mooring-place ;] «>^er<^ to the sheltering tree, Our youthful voyagers bound /rtsif her prow. With prompt, yet careful hands. This done, we paced The dewy fields. v ^^ 1. Paraphrase the portion of the above passage placed in bracketfi. ?. Analyse the first sentence ending with 'faded sky.' » 284 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH liANGUAGB. 8. Parse the words and expressions in italics. 4. Correct the following sentences if faulty ; if not fanlly, vindicate theif correctness : The council have no intention to adhere to its former decision. The land grows excellent wheat, forty biushels the acre. Sleep flies the wretch. The family was well conducted and regular attendants at church. A ten inch board. More than ten mile. The best as I ever met with. Who do you think it was ? He had two sisters, the one a wealthy spinster, the other a married sistet is the wife of a farmer. 6. Explain the origin and meaning of the prefixes circum-, sub-, ao-, de-, c(n- be-, sym-, and of the affixes -gram, -graph, -graphy, -logy. lUustrate by instances of werds in which they occur. 6. How is the comparative degree formed in adjectives and adverbs ? By what construction is it followed ? Is the following correct : 'He is more worthy of blame than me ? ' 7. Define the terms pronoun, conjunction, and verb, giving the etymology ot each. How many kinds of pronouns are there ? Give examples of each kin«l. 8. Give the past tenses and participial forms of the verbs : Break, Lie, Swim, Hold, Slide, Spread, Climb, Forsake, Drink, Strew, Sing, Ely. SENIOR CANDIDATES, 1863. 9. English Grammar, including Analysis of Sentences. [N.3. Every candidate is required to satisfy the examiners in this paper. Attention should be paid to spelling, handwriting, punctuation, and correctness of expression. The first four questions should be attempted before any of the others.] 1. Analyse the following passage, distinguishing in each clause the subject, predicate, &c., and pointing out the connection between tLe several dausea [N.B. A verbal analysis is not required.] theb sifltef -, con- lutxate y what worthy ogy ot of each [paper. ctnesB abject, lUBea. OXFORD LOCAL EXAMINATION PAPERS. 285 ' I never did repent for doing good, Nor shall not now : for in companions That do converse and waste the time together, Whose souls do bear an equal yoke of love, There must be needs a like proportion Of lineaments, of manners, and of spirit ; Which makes me think, that this Antonio, Being the bosom lover of my lord, Must needs be like my lord. 2. Farse fully the words to which numbers are prefixed in the- following sentences, stating the construction, as well as the parts of speech, &c. [N.B. The numbers may be substituted for the words in the answers to this and the follovnng questions. Abbreviations may be used. Rules of syntax need not be quoted.] (i) I, (2) who (3) weep (4) little, (5) did, I will (6) confess The (7) moment I was (h) seated here (9) alone, (10) Honour (11) my little (12) cell (13) with (14) some few tears, (16) Which anger (16) and resentment (17) could not (is) drv. All (19) night the storm (20) endured; and, (21) soon as (22) help , > (23) Had been collected horn the (24) neighbouring vale. With morning we (25) renewed (26) our quest. 3. Explain the terms (1) auxiliary verb ; (2) case absolute; (3) objective case; (4) noun of multitude; (5) disjunctive conjunction; (6) apposition; (7) abstract noun ; (s) neuter verb ; (9) relative pronoun ; (10) strong perfect. Illustrate by examples. 4. Distinguish between lie and lay; survey and survey; shall and will; horse's legs and horses' legs ; subject and subj^t ; depository and de- positary; farther and further; owed and ought; was and were; this and that ; my and mine. 6. Words really or apparently the same frequently express different gram- matical relations. Explain the differences in the following instances : (1) Seeing a person coming &c. (2) Seeing is believing. (3) TTiat is the man (4) that told you (5) that you were not to go to (6) ^ thtU place. (7) What say you? He did (s) what I told him. (9) But so it was. None (10) but the brave deserve &c He Wiis all (11) 6tt^ gone. It rains (13) hard. A (13) hard stone. (14) Whence are you? The place ( 1 5) whence I came &e. (1 6) For he told me &>e. Send ( 1 7 )for him. 286 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 6. Give the feminino forms of (i) tiger and ('2/ abbot; the diminutives o^ (:)) gooso and (4) lamb ; tho plurals of (5) penny and. (6) loaf; the pos- sessive cases of (7) he, and (s) us; the perfect tenses and perfect participles of (9) thrive, (10) slay, (11) tear, and (12) tread; the compa- ratives and superlatives of (1 j) lovely, (14) sly, and (15) humble. SENIOR CANDIDATES, 1864. 10. English Orammar. including Analysis of Sentences. [N.B. Every candidate is required to satisfy the examineia in this paper. Attention should be paid to spoiling, handwriting, punctuation, and correctness of expression.] 1. Parse each word printed in italics in the following passage, showing its construction in tho sentence to which it belongs : purblind race of miserable men. How many among us at this very hour Do forge a life-long trouble for ourselves. By taking true ior false, or false for true ; Here, through the feeble twilight of this world Groping, how many, until we pass and reach That other, where wc see as we are seen. y. Eixpress the sense of the above passage in simple prose as briefly as you can. 8. 'The parts of speech are not the names of classes of words taken by themselves, but of words as they are constructed in sentences.' Explain this statement, giving examples to show that the following words become different parts of speech according to the connection in which they occur : but, that, taking, trouble, false, forge, contract. 4. When the same word, being of more than one syllable, may be used either as a verb or a noun, what distinction is usually made in the place of the accent ? What exceptions of common occurrence are there to this rule? 5. What is an auxiliary verb ? Explain the use and meaning of each of the English auxiliary verbs. 6. What is the distinction between conjunctions and prepositions ? 7. Analyse the following passage, distinguishing in each clause the subject, predicate, &c., and pointing out the connection between the several clauses : Oxford local examination papers. 28t What stronger breiistplnte than a heart untainted ? Thrice is he armed, that hath his quarrel just ; And he but naked, though locked up in steel, Whose conscience with injustice is corrupted. 8. Distinguish between these expressions and words : He is come, and He has come. I alone can do it, and I can do it alone. A picture of the Queen's and A picture of the Queen. Fall, and fell. Rise, and raise. Lie, and lay. Stop, and stay. Sit, seat, and set. 9. Give the Saxon words in common use which most nearly answer to the following : Extend, expand, penetrate, pervade, denote, depart, spiritual, multitude, intrusion, invasion, incursion, elevation, altitude, division ither ice of rule? Ith9 SENIOR CANDIDATES, 1866. 11. English Grammar, including Analysis of Sentences. [N.B. Every candidate is required to satisfy the examiners in this paper. Attentioa should be paid to spelling, handwriting, piuct nation, and correctness of expression.] Bless'd are those Whose blood and judgment are so well comingled. That they are not a pipe for fortunes finger To sound what stop ahe please : Giie me that m&n That is not passion's slave, and I will wear him In my heart's core, ay, in my heart of heart. Aside thee.— Something too much of this. 1. Analyse the above passage, distinguishing in each clause the subject, predicate, &c., and pointing out the connection between the several clauses. 2. Parse fully the words in italics, stating in each case the construction or relation of the word parsed to the other parts of the scatence. 8. How do you distinguish between the participle and the verbal substantive in -wtjjT ? HlnBtrate your answer by the following examples : ' I am o 288 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. going a hunting,' ' I saw a boy throwing a stone,' • Day dawnmg, Wb started,' 'Biding is healthy.' Explain the a in the first of these. 4. What is the exact force of the prefix in the following words ? — Problem, procure, proceed, prologue : subtract, subacid, subside, subsidize, surrepti- tious: innate, intact, incident: disqualify, dispense, dissect, dissuade: re- peat, reluctant, remit, remote : withdraw, withhold, v/ithstand. 6. The term pronoun etymologically means a ' word used instead of a noun.' Would such a definition comprehend all the words classed as pronouns, or all the cases to which pronouns apply ? «i. Enumerate the inflexions (proper) of verbs, and the auxiliaries employed where inflexions are wanting. Distinguish the shades of meaning in the following forms : I wrote, I have written, and I have been writing ; I write and I am writing; You shall write and You will write. 7. Which do you consider correct in point of orthography? — Honor, or honour; recognize, or recognise ; center, or centre ; traveler, or traveller ; moveable, or movable ; wilful, or willful. Give reasons for your preference. SENIOR CANDIDATES, 1866. 12. English Grammar, including Analysis of Sentences. [N.B. Every candidate is required to satisfy the examiners in this paper. Attention should be paid to spelling, handwriting, punctuation, and correctness of expression.] ERs years but young, but his experience old ; His head unmellowed, but \i\b judgment ripe; And, in a word {for far behind his worth Come all the praises that I now bestow) He is complete in feature and in mind. With all good grace to grace a gentleman. 1. Parse each word printed in italics in the above passage, explaining its grammatical connection with other words in the sentence. 2. Classify the English aiixiliary verbs, and explain the uses of each of them. 8. What are the uses of the adverb ? How many kinds of adverbs are there ? 4. What ia the distinction between strong verbs and weak verbs ? OXFORD LOCAL EXAMINATION PAPERS. 289 It was told him. He walked ten miles. Give Am the book. He lived many ycor« after m«y-^,>, his root. And then he falls 05 I (fo. for your an/wer. " ^ ''^"""°" "' " P™°>^ ? »i™ ■ m,on 4. What i« an auxiliary verb ? Classify the EugUsh auxUiary verb. 6. What 18 the passive voice? xn^.v, , Mowed by the "b^ ca^ ""^ " ™'' '» ''" I""'™ "'« •» 6. 8ive the past tenses and perfeet participles of these verbs ■ W, Expel, F„,^ '& Grow, Climb. Spnng, Lie. ^ee, 7. Explain the prefixes in the following words : Innate, Intact, Uncomfortable, Disordbrly, Hypothesis, Thrive, Slide. Lay. Withhold, Subtract* Return, Hyper tole, Annul. u2 292 8. Analyss ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGK. Heaven doth with us, as we with torches do, Not light them for themselves : for if our virtues Did not go forth of us, 'twere all altke As if we had them not EXAMINATION PAPERS BBT AT THB CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIdNS. JUNIOR CANDIDATES, 1869. 1. Budiments of English Orammar. [M.B. Every candidate must satisfy the examiners in this paper. Three questions at least should be attempted.] 1. Give the plimJs of the following nouns : Wolf, Fife, Canto, Soliloquy, Flagstaff, Negro, Lily, Donlcey. Life, Give instances of nouns having two forms of the plural of different meanings. 2. Give the past tense indicative and past participle of each of the following verbs : Abide, Blow, Cleave, Draw, Sing^ Beseech, Drink, Hurt, Lie (to rest), Run. 3. Point out and correct what is amies in the following expressions : Was you there ? or was it him ? James and him didn't ought to have said so. Who did you expect to have seen here ? I was neither considering James nor John when I did it. Either James or John have great caus^ for complaint. He don't mind what I say ; but I will be sorry to punish him. UAMBRIDQE LOCAL EXAMINATION PAPERS. 293 4. What is a gentence/ Define the terms 'subject' and 'predicate.' Point out the subject and predicate in the following sentences : He always acts with considerable judgment. To be angry is unwise. In the year 1066 William the Conqueror invaded England. 6. Parte fully the following passage : Pare to be true. Nothing can need a lie. A fault which needs it most grows two therebj* JUNIOR CANDIDATES, Trench on the Stndy of Words. 1. In what sense is language man's invention, and in what sense God's gift? 2. Words sometimes preserve the record of exploded errors. Show in what way the following wordt), Leopard, sardonic, humour, saturnine, jovial, mercurial, amethyst, do this. 3. Give the derivation of Tinsel, desultory, dunce, gipsy, curfew. 4. Allusion to what ancient customs is bound up in the words, Thraldom, cal< oulation, expense, stipT2lation ? 6. What information about the following things, namely, Bayonet, calico, guinea, cordwain, cherry, peach, currants, dimity, damask, sherry, er- mine, may be obtained from the names they bear ? 6. Define synonyms. How do synonyms find place in a language? What advantages in respect of style may we hope to gain by the study of them? 7. Give some examples of the morality, and some of the immorality, which find place in the use of words. 1' 294 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANOUAOE. JUNIOR CANDIDATES, 1860. Rndiments of English Orammar. (PKRMMrNAUV.) 1. What is the meaning of an ' abstract,' ' common,' and • proper' noun ; an ' auxiliary' and ' impersonal ' verb ; a ' cardinal ' and an ' ordinal ' num- ber ? Give examples of each. 3. What is the general rule for forming the possessive case, singular and plural, of nouns ; and what are the exceptions to this rule ? 3. How do nouns ending in y preceded by a consonant,/, aud/e respectively, form their plurals ? Give the plurals of the following words : Key, berry, calf, grief, knife, penny, ox, fly, brother. 4. Write out the present and past tenses of the following verbs : Forget, speak, think, stand ; and give the past tense and past participle of the verbs Lose, knit, ride, wear, run, sit. 5. Parse the words in italics in the following passage : FvXl many a gem of purest ray serene, The dark unfathom'd caves of ocean bear ; Full many a flower is bom to blush unseen, And waste its sweetness on the desert air. — Gray's Elegy. JUNIOR CANDIDATES. 4. Trench on the Study of Words. 1. What objection is there to regarding language simply as an invertion? 2. To which of the races which have inhabited England do we mainly owe oup language ? Mention any words which are derived (1) from ancient Greek or Roman philosophers, (2) from the Schoolmen. Whence do we derive the words ' earl ' and 'countess ' ? 8. Show from etymology' what influence the planets Mercury, Jupiter, and Saturn were supposed by astrologers respectively to have upon those , bom under them. What three articles of food may be shown by ety- mology to have come to us originally from the coast of the Black Sea. ,r CAMBRIDGE LOCAT. EXAMINATION PAPERS. 295 4. Horace says, ' Many wokIh will bo revived which have now gone out, and many will pass out of use which arc now in vogue.' Show by example* that this has boon the case in English. 6t It has been questioned whether wo ought to write ' honour ' or ' honor,' ' favour* or 'favor.' State the case on both huIch, and point out precisely what is meant when the latter spoiling is called wrong. .1. Define and trace to a common root the words Sense, sensual, sensitive, sensuous, sensiblo, sontimuntal, roscntmont, aftsentation ; also Qentle, genteel, gentile, generous, general. 7. Diatiognish between Deist and Theist, diffidence and distrust, effective and effectual, conscience and consciousness, invention and discovery, vir- tuous and virtual. . 8. What change has taken place in the meaning of the words Nephew, noyel- ist, neologist, plantation, favour, naturalist ? JUNIOR CANDIDATES. English Orammar. Pabt I. — Frblihin^bt. [N.B. All students are required to satisfy the examiners in the first part jf this Paper, which is the English Grammar of the Freliminaiy Examination. Four questions at least should be attempted.] 1. Give the names of the parts of speech. What is a pronoun? What is the particular use of a relative pronoun ? 2. When is a noun in the nominative case absolute ? Give a sentence con- toning an example of one. 8. Distinguish between transitive and intransitive verbs. Give two simple sentences, a transitive verb occurring in one, an intransitive one in the other. 4. Write down the past tense, present and past participles of the following verbs : Scatter, swear, ride, mow, gallop, spin, trouble, profit, lose, toes, fly. 5. Parse the following sentence : Your voiceless lips, flowers, are living preachers. 11 29Q ANALYSIS OF THE ENGUSH LANGUAGE. 1 i 1 ) : Pakt II. 6. Why are somd consonants tormed liquids and some mutes ? Give instances of each. What is a diphthong ? 7. State the different parts of speech to which each of the following words may belong : Sleep, long, tear, close, shade, below, last, pluck, shed, btar, underneath. 8. Gite the rules, with ex»mp1ea to each, for the use of s and the apostrophe in the following; cases : a. Nouns in the possessive case in apposition. b. Several possessives used together. c. When of is used with the possessive form. 9. Specify what class of transitive verbs may take two objects after them. In what cases may neuter verbs take an object after them ? Give examples. 10. Name the moods of a verb, and explain their use. Take a verb, ard pjivp an example of each. 1 1. Correct the mistakes in the following sentences : Mind who you are speaking to. Since you were here last, I rode out on horseback regularly every day. On notice of this been given to the committee, a resolution was at once come to to forbid it. * The ten first chapters of the book were interesting very, the remaining was dull. 4 2. Analyso the following sentence : The lively Grecian, in a land of hills, Bivers and fertile plains, and sounding shores. Under a cope of sky more variable, Could find commodious place for every god, Promptly received, as prodigally brought, Froia the surrounding countries, at the choice Of all adventurers. ; t< CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATION PAPERS. 297 JUNIOR CANDIDATES. English Grammar. PaetL [N.B. All students are reqiured to satisfy the examiners in the first part of this paper. Four questions at least should be attempted.] 1. Write down the feminine forms of Abbot, duke, hero, ram, traitor, widower. 2. Writedown the plural forms of Cargo, child, chiirch, knife, monkey, penny, portfolio, roof, tooth, -tree, woman. 3. Place the indefinite article before each of the following nouns : Box, ewe, heir, historian, house, union. 4. Mention the parts of speech to which the following words respectively belong : Arrow, beside, besides, boy, grow, often, seldom, since, though, through, vain, vein, yellow, your. 6. Write down the past tense of each of the following verbs : Beseech, drive, forsake, fly, bear, lay, lend, lie, shear, shoot. 6. State the rules for forming the degrees of comparison of adjectives. Part II. 7. Distinguish between transitive and intj-ansitive verbs. What is meant by (1) a verbal preposition, (2) a verbal substantiva ? 8. Into what classes are pronouns divided? Form a sentence including a personal pronoun in the objective ease, and a relative pronoun in the possessive case. 9. Write down a part of tr.d verb * to love,' diflferiug in voice, mood, tense, number, and person, from ' I was loved.' 10. Distinguish between the meanings of the sentences within the following brackets: fYou Lave hdpod mo oftener than he. i. You have helped mo uftencT than him. ■% 298 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 11. State the rules for the concord of 1. A relative with its antecedent. • 2. A collective substantive with its verb. 12. Correct the mistakes in the following sentences : — 1. As neither John or Thomas are going, let you and I go. 2. Observing the house actually on fiio, ic was evident the enginei were required. 3. I can't go unless John comes home. 4. I don't know whether he goes now, but he didn't use to. 13. Explain the terms subject, object, and predicate. Give an example of an indirect object. 14. Analyse Those who reason in tliis manner do not observe that they are setting up a general rule, of all the least to be endured; namely, that secrecy, whenever secrecy is practicable, will justify any action. JUNIOR CANDIDATES. 7. EngUsh Grammar. [N.B. All students must satisfy the examiners in this paper. Four questions at least must be attempted.] 1. Define a noun; and distinguish between proper, common, and abstract nouis; giving examples of each. 2. What does the possessive case denote ? State the rule for its formation. "Write down the possessive case plural of Man, lady. 3. Give the comparative and superlative degrees of Good, bad, little^ old, nu- merous. 4. Name the number, gender, person, and case of She, its, ours, them, us, ye, thee. 6. What is an adverb? Into how many classes are adverbs divisible? State the classes to tvhich the following adverbs respectively belong : Again, almost, enoxigh, fully, hiiher, pcradvcnture, well, yesterday, yonder, 6. Distinguish between the properties of prepositions and conjv notions. State the difference between copulative and disjunctive conjunctions. In the sentence 'Blessed are the merciful, for they shall obtain mercy,' what part of speech is /or. <* CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATION PAPERS. 299 JUNIOR CANDIDATES. 8. English Grammar. 1. Explain briefly the meanings of Etymology, syntax, concoid, declension, mood, tense. 2. Define a noun and an adjective. Distribute a^'ectives into three classen according to their meanings. 3. Write down six words which are used as adverbs and prepositions. How do you detect a preposition in a sentence ? 4. Assign to its proper part of speech each word in the following sentences : a. I will conduct myself so as to gain respect. b. Pending the trial all but a few perished. c. He is fond of pleasing everybody. 6. Write three short sentences, one containing a substantive clause, one an adjective clause, and one an adferbiai ciaxise. 6. What do you mean by a contracted sentence? 7. Correct mistakes in the following sentences : a. Riches does not belong everybody. b. These sort of arguments ought to be more inculcate. ^ e. If the Sun goes about the Earth, astronomy's results are misleading us. d Speak thou then which trespass here. e. I saw a black and white man walking together. 8. Analyse the following sentences : a. Why are you so late ? 6. He will succeed or die. c. Whatever the consequences may be, I shall go my way. d. You ask me why, though ill at ease, Within these regions I subsist, Whose spirits falter in the mist» And languish for the purple seas. , 9. Can you show that the number of the parts ol speech is complete and sof- ficient for expressing our thoughts ? 366 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANOUAGB. JUNIOB CANDIDATES. 9. English Orammar [Every student must satisfy the examiners in this paper. Four questions at least must be attempted.] 1. Name the parts of speech, giving one example of each. 2. Define a preposition. Show bj examples that the sa*ne word may be used sometimes as a preposition and sometimes as a conjuntion. 3. Give the masculine nouns corresponding to Duchess, ewe, heifer, witch ; and the feminine corresponding to Beau, host, lord, master, executor. Write down six nouns of common gender. 4. Write down the past trnse and the perfect participle of the following verbs : Arrive, begin, dare, freeze, go, spread, strike, tell. 6. What is an auxiliary verb ? What tenses and moods require the use of auxiliaries? 6. Distinguish between the meanings of the following pairs of words and phrases: Any, some; alone, only; stay, stop; decrease, diminish; sanitary, sanatory ; prevail upon, prevail with. 7. Analyse the following sentences, and parse the words printed in italics: 1. Uneasy lies the head that wears a crown. 2. Being angry with one who controverts an opinion which you value, is a necessary consequence of the uneasiness which you feeL 8. How are adverbs usually formed ? What adverbs are derived from the following words : All, beside, ground, heaven ? Write down the principal adverbs which can be derived from words contained in the sentences of question 7> CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATION PAPERS. 301 DB SENIOR CANDIDATES, 1869. 10. Rndiments of English Orammar. I and rite vvag le of and ralue, the woidi [N.B. Every candidate must satisfy the examiners in this paper. Three qneftions at least should be attempted.] 1. Give the past teutir indicative and past participle of each of the following verbs : Awake, Break, Fly, Hit, Sit, Swell, Forbid, Eat, Flee, Ring, Strive, Tear. 2. ^iTrite down the following passage without changing the order of the words, but spelling them according to the present usage ; and point out any differences between this passage and modem English, other than those of spelling: And Jhesus, seynge the puple, wento up into an hil ; and whanne he was set, hise disciplis camen to hym. And he openyde his mouth, and taughte hem, and seide, Blessid be the pore in spirit, for the kyngdom of hevenes is heme. Blessid be mylde men, for thei Bchulon welde the erthe. Blessid be thei that mournen, for thei Bchulen be comfortid. Blessid be thei that hungren and thirsten rightwisnesse, for thei schulen be fulfillid. Blessid be mercyful men, for thei schulen gete merci. Blessid be thei that be of cleno herte, for thei schulen se God. Blessid be pesible men, for thei schulen be clepid Goddis children. Blessid be thei that suf&eu persecusioun for rightfulnesse, for the kingdom of hevenes is heme. —8t. Matt. V. 1-10. (Wyclip). Jt. What is a pronoun ? Write a short sentence containing the words This, that, who, and whom. 4. Parse fully the following passage : — Stone walls do not a prison make, Nor iron bars a cage ; A free and quiet mind can take These for a hermitage. 5. Define the terms ' subject ' and ' predicate.' When is a sentence said to to be ' simple,' and when ' complex ' ? Write a simple sentence in which the subject shall bo qualified by a par* t|ici|^ial plirase, and the predicate extended by an adverbial ]^hrase,s I! ^ 802 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. SENIOR CANDIDATES, 1860. 11. Bndiments of Engi^ish Grammar. '_' s> ) (PBBLmiNiLBT.) ^ [N.B. All candidates are required to satisfy the examiners in this paper.] 1. EiruuBBATB the different kinds of pronouns. Decline such pronouns as admit of declension. 2. Give a list of nouns (a) that have no singular, (b) that have no plural, (o) that have the singular and plural alike. 3. Point out the errors in the following sentences : How will we know whether is the greatest of the two ? * Neither John or Thomas considered that morning or evening are the best time for study. Either in the four first of that class were clever boys. If I had not broke your stick, you would never have ran home, nor began to tell those kind of lies, which nobody but foolish men believe. Every member of our families have been introduced to each other. 4. Write down an example of (1) a simple, (2) a compoimd, and (3) a complex sentence. 6. Rewrite the following in modern English : — Lo lo (quod Dame Prudence) howe lightly is every man eodyned to his owne desyre and his owne pleasaunce. Certes (quod she) the woides of the phisiciens ne shulden not ben understonden in that wise, for certes wickednesse is not controrie to wickednesse, ne vengeaunce is not contrarie to vengeaunce, ne wronge to wronge, but everich of hem encreaseth and engendreth other. But certes the wordes of the phisiciens shuld be understonde in this wise, for good and wick- ednesse ben two contraries : and peace and werre, vengeaunce and suf&aunce, discord and acord, and many other thingea : But certes wickednesse shalbe warished with goodnes, discorde by acorde, werre by peace, and so forthe in other thinges. — Chaucer, Cantet' bury Tales, CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATION PAPERS. 308 .... A- per.l vasuB aB oral, (o) are the tome, nor lish men ber. % complex ned to his the wordes that wise, rengeaunce )ufc everich B wordes of i andwick- eaxtnce and But ceites by acorde, ceri CanUf' SENIOR CANDIDATES, 1866. 12. Preliminary English Grammar. [N.B. All candidates are required to satisfy the examiners in this paper.] 1. Explain the word vowel. Show by rules and exceptions, with the aid of examples, the various sounds indicated by the rowels, both singly and in combination. 2. What means have we for expressing relation between nouns substantive? Explain such a phrase as * Wills Act Amendment Act.' 3. What is a defective verb? Give examples, and show how they are sup- plemented. J f 4. Explain what is meant by a conditional sentence ; and point out the dis- tinction in meaning between ' If you go at once you may be in time,' and ' If you went at once you might be in time.' 6. Examine the construction of tbe following sentences : 'Tis sixty years since Miich ado about nothing. They must fight it out. He came himself. ' b. Analyse the foUowing passage, and parse the words printed in italics : I cannot tell if to depart in silence, Or bitterly to speak in your reproof, Beatfittetk my degree or your condition. SENIOR CANDIDATES, 1866. 13. English Grammar. 1. Which letter is the aspirate, and why is it so called ? In what words is it rightly dropped when it stands as their first letter? Under what cir- eamstanoes are the forms a or an used of the indefinite article ? 304 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 2. Explain how you distinguish between proper, common, and abstract nonns. ClaBsify the following: Inconsistency, confession, gorernor, squadron, day, education, knowledge, youth, time, contest, Wellington, talent, Robert 3. Define the term ' case ' as employed in grammar. How many cases ar» there in English? How are they used? Decline Child, nAbish, he, who, another. 4. Point out the difference of meaning in the forms of exDression, ' A states . man and oratoi* walking up Constitution Hill,' and ' A statesman and an oiStftrv^alking up Constitution Hill.' "When is the sMMe^i^eated or not in such cases ? 6. What parts of a verb must b'^ntn^vn in order to conjugate it? In what particulars does a regular differ ^oi^-^liMpMjgular verb ? Give the past tense and past participle of Demean, mean, hf ftYft, npJhfinTr. cost, accost. 6. Parse Analyse Uprouse ye then, my merry, merry men, For 'tis our opening day. That time of year thou mayst in me behold When yellow leaves, or none, or few do hang Upon those boughs which shake against the cold, Bare ruin'd choirs, where, late the sweet birds sang. "•*«■, SENIOR CANDIDATES, 1867. 14. English Grammar. 1. Define the following terms: Vowel, consonant, diphthong, syllable. Into what are diphthongs divided ? Point out the vowels i n the words wayward and yearly. 2. Give the general rule for the formation of the plural number of nouns; and enumerate the principal exceptions to this rule. Give the plural forms of Church, stomach, baby, day, knife, handkerchief, ox, folio, grotto. 3. What is meant by a relative pronoun ? When the relative is preceded by two antecedents of different persons, with which of them do the relative and the verb agree ? Correct the errors in the following sentence: ' Thoq, art the person which were supposed to have written the letter.' GAMBKIBGE LOCAL EXAMINATION PAPERS. 305 ns. Ay, pt are Mies kdan what e past BbCCOSt. ■E'V 4. Distingnish between transitive and intransitive verbs. Explain the terms mood and tense. Point out the dilTerence between the potential and subjunctive mood. 5. Point out the difference of meaning in the following sentences : I was disappointed of the letter which I have so long wished for. I was disappointed in the letter which I have so long wished for. Distinguish between 'a taste o/a thing,' and 'a taste /or a thing.' 6. Parse Analyse I know him as myself: for from our infancy We have conversed, and spent our hours together. Then burst his mighty heart ; And, in his mantle muffling up his face. Even at the base of Fompey's statue, Which all the while ran blood, great Csesar fell. ble. Into wayward louns; and viral forms jrotto. receded by the relative jnce-.'Thoa SENIOR CANDIDATES, 1868. 16. English Grammar. 1. Define the following terms: Phrase, clause, sentence. Write a short sentence containing substantival, adjectival, and adverbial clauses. 2. Give some of the rules for the use of commas. 3. Give the rules for forming the imperfect participles of verbs; and form those of Call, love, singe, tie, strip, sait, defer, recover, frolic. 4. Explain carefully the meaning of the terms, person and mood. Correct the following sentence so as first to state the supposed case as a fact, secondly as a supposition : If thou i.^ honest, I love you. 5. What are the diflferent shades of meaning between the sentences : I think, I am thinking, I do think ? Q. Parse Such holy rite, Methinks, if audibly repeated now From hill or valley, could not move gUiblimer transport. 806 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. I II Analjie Brutus, I do observe you now of late. I have not from your eyes that gentleness, And show of love, as I was wont to have : Yon bear too stubborn and too strange a haod Over your firiend th '* ''>ve« you. i 307 EXAMINATION PAPEES 8BT AT THB OXFORD LOCAL EXAMINATIONS, 1870-1873. JXJNIOB CANDIDATES, 1870. Analysis, Parsing, fto. A^fn'f ^^,^*°^^"«rt pine Hewn on Norwegiau hills, to be the maet Of some great amiral, were but a wandi He walked with. 8. Explain fully the following words and phrases : empyreal thrallm )er. «t- the gle (•) amerced belated jousted nathless (A) The ffrunael edge. Prone on the flood. The burning Tnarle. Night-foundered skiff. > . , Locusts, warping on the oastom wind. .^^w with insolence and wine. The ascendina; pile Stood Jlxed her statelt/ highth. Ml but less than no. What time his pride had cast him out of heaven. What though the field be lost. 4. In the following passages explain the allusions, and illustrate, if necessarv by other passages from Paradise Lost, Book I : (a) The hill of scandal. (A) The Aonian mount. (*') Siloa'fl brook that flowed Fast by the oracle of God. (<^ The brook that parts Egypt from Syria's ground. (e) The asphaltic pool. if) Smooth Adonis from liis native rock Ran purple to the sea. (g) Uther'g son. (*) The Dorian mood Of flutes and soft recorders. (•) The moon whose orb Through optic glass the Tuscan artist views. (A) When Charlemain with all his peerage fell By Fontarabbia. 6. What is meant by gender in grammar? Give instance*. 310 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANOUAOK. 6. Express in simple words the meaning of the following passage: Say, muse, their names then known, who first, who last, Roused ftom their nlumber on that fiery couch. At their great emperor's call, as next in worth Came singly where he stood on the bare strand, While the promiscuous crowd stood yet aloof. JUNIOR CANDIDATES, 1873. I! m\ Analysis, Parsing, &c. [N.B. Every candidate is required to satisfy the examiners in this paper. Attention should be paid to spelling, handwriting, punctuation, and correct- ness of expression. Candidates should pay very strict attention to the parsing. As regards the rt st of this paper, they are requested not to dwell too long over any single question, but (if possible) to answer the whole of the questions.] 1. Parse every word in the following passage : Intermit no watch Against a wakeful foe, while I, abroad. Through all the coasts of dark destruction seek Deliverance for us all. 2. Analyse: Me, though just right and the fixed laws of heaven Did first create your leader, next free choice, With wliat besides in counsel or in fight . Hath been achieved of merit, — ^yet this loss, Thus far at least recovered, hath much more Established — . 8. Explain the allusions in the following passages : '^ . (a) The wealth of Ormus and of Ind, (h) That Serbonian bog, Betwixt Damiata and Mount Casius old. Where armies whole have sunk. (e) Goigons, and Hydras, and Chimeras dire. (d) Whftu Argo passed Through Bosphorus, betwixt the justling totHuk OXFORD I/)GAL fiXAMINATION PAPERS. 311 uncouth pinnace. 4. Show the appropriateness of the following simile in all its parte, and explain the allusions : As when fer oflFat sea a fleet descried Hangs in the clouds, by equinoctial winds Close sailing from Bengala, or the isles Of Temate and Tidore, whence merchants bring Their spicy drugs,— they on the trading flood. Through the wide Ethiopian to the Cape, Ply stemming nightly toward the pole,— so seemed Far oflFthe flying fiend. 6. Jiixplain the following words and phrases : (a) unessential frore welkin buxom (b) By success untaught. That forgetful lake. The vassals of his anger. His fatal throne. Ages of hopeless end. The sensible of pain. Or shun the goal with rapid wheels. The harmony . . . suspende«1 Hell. Impaled with circling fire. 6. Trace the line of argument in the speech of Belial. 7. How does Milton describe the fallen angels as employing themselves in their place of punishment ? 8. Derive the following words : puny, arrive, paramount, apathy, treason. JUNIOR CANDIDATES. 4. Analysis, Faxsing, &c. (Paradise Lost, Book III.) [N.B. Every candidate is required to satisfy the examiners in this pape:. Attention should be paid to spelling, handwriting, punctuation, and correctness of expression. Candidates should pay very strict attention to the parsing. As regards the rest of this paper, they are recommended not to dwell too long over any single question, but ;if pobsible) to answer the whole of the que»tiou»»,] 312 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 1. Analyse : Wliat praise could they receive ? What pleaflure I from such obedience paid, When will and reason, reason also is choice, Useless and vain, of freedom both despoiled, Made passive both, had serv'd necessity, Not me? 2. Parse each word printed in italics in the following passages, explaining its grammatical connection with other words in the sentence : (1) HaU, holy light, offspring of he&Vn Jirstborn Or of th' Mernal coetemal beam May I express thee unblamed ? (2) The rest shall hear me call, and oft be warned Their sinful state, and to appease betimes Th' incensed Deity, while offered grace Invites. (3) As in him perish all men, so in thee. As from a second root, shall be restored As many as are restor'd, without theo none. Distinguish the several meanings of the word 'as' in the last passage. 3. What is meant by : subject, extension of predicate, indirect object, com- pound sentence, noun sentence, adversative connection ? 4. Explain the following: drop serene, glozing, maugre, amarant, eremite, limbec, tiar, archchimic, empyreal. 6. What are the allusions in these passage^^ ? (1) Pilgrims . . . that btrayed so far to seek In Golgotha him dead who lives in heaven. (2) Seasons return, but not to me returns Day. (3) Tho weeds of Dominic. (4) Hesperian gardens. (6) That crystalline sphere whose balance weighs The trepidation talked, and that first moved. 6. What was the course of Satan's journey as described by Milton f OXFORD LOCAL EXAMINATION PAPEES. 318 SENIOR CANDIDATES, 1870. J - ^ • > EngUsh Grammar, including Analysis of Sentences. Afffn? "^rT, T^'^""^ '' "'^''^"'^ ^° ^^^''^y ^^« examiners in this papor. A^ntion should be paid to spelling, handwriting, punctuation, and correct- ness of expression. Candidates should pay very strict attention to the parsing. As regards the rest ot this paper, they are recommended not to dweU too long over any single question, but (if possible) to answer the whole of the questions.] 1. Parse, and show the grammatical construction of evav word in the follow- ing passage : What good would follow this, if this were done ? What harm, undone ? Deep harm to disobey, Seeing obedience is the bond of rule. 2. Express in simple words the meaning of the foregoing passage. 3. Give the feminine forms for the following substantives : abbot actor earl duke marquis lad hero horse hunter governor songster tailor tiger testator master nephew. 4. A, an, the: give the names for each of these words as parts of speech, and point out with instances their grammatical usage. 6. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs, and classify tnem accordingly : ^^^ los« sell malce . p. loose slay trot teed leave teach leap decide beseech marry receive. 6. Show the meaning and usage of the verbs shall, will, ma: '-th as princi pals and as auxiliaries. 7. Give instances of words in which the addition or withdrawal of the aspi- rate h materially affects their meaning. 314 8. Analyse ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. For what are men better than sheep or goats, That nourish a blind life within the brain, If, knowing God, they lift not hands of prayer Both for themselves and those who call theqa friend ? SENIOR CANDIDATES, 1871. English Orammar, including Analysis of Sentences. [N.B. Every candidate is required to satisfy the examiners in this paper. Attention should be paid to spelling, handwriting, punctuation, and correct- ness of expression. Candidates should pay very strict attention to the parsiig. As regards the rest of this paper, they are recommended not to dwell too long over any single question, but (if possible) to answer the whole of the questions.] 1. Parse each word which is printed in italics in the following passage, and show its relation to other words in the sentence to which it belongs : Virtue may he assailed, but never hurt, Surprised hy unjust force, but not inthralled : Yea, even that which Mischief meant most ftarm, Shall in the happy trial prove most glory. But evil on itself shall back recoil, And mix no more with goodness. 2. Briefly and simply express the meaning of the passage in your own words. 8. Explain the terms : (a) objective case, (6) apposition, (o) abstract noun, {d) auxiliary verb, (c) intransitive verb, (/) distributive pronoun. Illus- trate your explanations by examples. 4. Give the past tense and the perfect participle of each of these verbs : sink lie iit fell dig lay thrive rise Am set fall swim. 6. G-ive the origin and meaning of the following prefixes : con-, de-, dis-, oo, eub; sym-, un-, in-. Illustrate your answer by examples. OXl'ORD LOCAL ILVAMLNATION PAPERS. 315 6. Distinguish the imperfect participle from the participial substantive. XiXplain the expressions : (a) Walking stick, (b) Running footman. (c) The house is a building. (d) He is building a house. (e) Acting is better than talking. 7. What is a preposition ? Distinguish the preposition from the coiyunction. 8. Analyse this passage : And where two raging fires meet together, They do consume the thing that feeds their fury : Though little fire grows great with little wind, Yet extreme gusts will blow out fire and all. • SENIOR CANDIDATES, 1872. 7. ■ English Grammar, including Analysis of Sentences. [N.B. Every candidate is expected to satisfy the examiners in this paper Attention should be paid to spelling, handwriting, punctuation, and co^ect- ness of expression. Candidates should pay very strict attention to the parsing. As regards the rest of this paper, they are recommended not to dwell too long over any single question, but (if possible) to answer the whole of the questions.] 1. Ptese each word which is printed in italics in the following passages, and stati its grammatical connection with other words of the same sentence : (1) Boast not my fall, he cried, insulting foe ! Thou by some other Shalt be laid as fow. Nor think, to die dejects mj? lofty mind ; All that I dread is leaving you behind. (2) Come one, come all, this rock shall fly l^m its firm base as soon as\. 316 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. (3) Besides, it were a mock Apt to be rendered, for some one to say, ' Break up the senate till another time. When CtBsar's wife shall meet with better dreams. If Caesar hide himself, shall they not whisper, ' Lo, Caesar is afraid ' ? 2. Analyse the following sentences : > (1) To the great, real, and amiable virtues, and to the uneqiialled abilities of that gentleman, I shall always join with my coun- try in paying a just tribute of applause. (2) So closely connected with these men was Terence, that a rumour soon gained ground that he himself was not the real author of the plays exhibited under his name, but that young noble- men composed what they had not the courage to own. (3) I am monarch of all I survey : My right there is none to dispute. 8. Give the meaning of the terms: (1) syntax, (2) predicate, (3) indirect object, (4) inflection, (5) analysis. 4. Distinguish between : laid and lain, bom and borne, straight and strait taught and taut, ought and aiight, ere and e'er ; and give the comparative and superlative of — good agile quickly easy feeble badly full hot blest. .5. refine : adverb, pronoun, auxiliary verb, interjection, participle, infinitive mood, adversative conjunction, and write down two examples of each. The past tense and perfect participle of : bury saw shine seek shake strive flee sit lee dwell sink think. 7. How does the position of words serve to show the grammatical structure of an English sentence ? Is there any difference on this point between poetry and prose? I OXPOKb LOCAL EXAMINATION PAPERS. 317 SENIOR CANDIBATES, 1873. 8. English Grammar, inclnding Analysis of Sentences ne» of exprjon "^ '^ '■"'• '""'^"-"'"e. P»nc.aati«„. and coZf que,t.„„, tat (if p„.«ib,e) to a„„„ ^^0 whoifof tt^lto?] '"^ ""^ '■ 'Zotroi"::::;^;r,^~?-»««--"^'^^ (1) Those many Aaef not dand to do that eviJ If the first man that did the edict infringe' Had answer'd for his deed. (2) Eeturn, fair Eve, m.rn fly'st thou ? Whom thou fly'st, of him thou art. -ttis flesh, his bone. (3) But, madam, if the fates withstand, and you Are destined Hymen's willing t^fc^m too Trust not too much your now resistless charms • iAo^e, age or sickness, soon or late, disarms. ' The gods would humble them That we might laugh at thnr ridiculous fear iVhose names we trembled at beyond the Alps, I'll tell quaint lies. How honourable ladies sought my love, ^AicA /(^ew^my, thoy fell sick and died. 2. Analyse the following sentences : ^'^ ^obw" f:^""'"' ^'' '"^' ^^^" ^^1« ^ °^-t« abstractionB objects of terror, of pity, and of love. (2) Since words are only names for things, it would be more conve- nient for all men to carry about them such things as are necls- aary t« express the particular business they ar'e to dLoZ (8) ^ ^ Or, wouldst thou drown thyself, Put a little water in a spoon, And it shall be as all the ocean, Enough to stifle Buch a villain up. (4) (6) 318 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGB. 3. Name and distinguish the diifta'ont uses of each of the following worda himself, which, beside, rather, very, hut, without, as. 4. Explain the difference between : tninsitive and intransitive verbs, adverbs and conjunctions, subject and object, nouns and pronouns. 6. How does the language of Chaucer differ from modern literary English in the use of inflections ? Trace the several changes as completely as you can. 6. Distinguish between: lie, lay, laid; eat, ate; rode, road, rowed; fell^ fallen; dyed, died : and give the present and past participles of: slay rise shrive shoot • bray shake flee teach reply speed obey set. 319 EXAMINATION PAPEES SET AT THB CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS. JUNIOR CANDIDATES, 1870. 1. English Grammar. LN.B. Every student is required to satisfy the examiners in this paper 1 1. What IS meant by the parts of speech? Givetheir of each. names with an example 2. Write down the singular or plural, as the case may be, of : bureau pence chimney proof dice staff kine seraph man teeth. 3. Write down the masculine op feminine, as the actor maid case may be, of: toy dame heifer hero marquis nephew nun widow. 4. Distinguish the use of the pronoun in the expressions : That is Ms book ; That book is his; and give the corresponding forms of all the personal pronoun.. 6. Write down the past tense and past participle of the verbs : awake make burst shine chide skj- lay throw lie waa"ve. »! 820 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 6. In what raooda aro verbs conjiigatod? Explain when tho subjunctive mood is used: 7. Explain tho terms predicate, completion of the predicate, extension of the predicate, and write down a souteuce in illustration. 8. Parse and analyse the following : The hero bound for battle strife Or bard of martial lay, 'Twero worth ten years of peaceful life, One glance at their array. JUNIOR CANDIDATES, 1871. English Grammar. J . Explain the term abstract notm, collective noun, relative pronoun, transitive verb, with an oxumplo of each, 2. How do you form tlio plural of nouns ending in ch, x,f, a, y? Give an example in each case. 3. Define adjective. When do you use the comparative and when the super- lative degree ? Write down the comparative and superlative degrees of noble, much, holy, benevolent. 4. Name the different classes of pronouns, and give the possessive and objective cases (singular and plural) of /, she, who. b. Write out the past and future tenses in the indicative mood of the verbs to write and to lose. 6. Parse : Little Gertrude was the eldest daughter of a farmer, who lived in a very fertile country. I 7. Explain the terms simple sentence, complex sentence, compound sentence^ noun clause ; and analyse : To bliss domestic he his heart resigned. Mk- CAMBRIDGE L6nAL EXAMINATION PAPKR8. 8. Analyse the following : The heights, by groat men reached and kept, Wore not attained l.y sudden flight ; But they, while their companions slept, Were toiling upward in the night. 821 JUNIOR CANDIDATES. 1872. 3. English Orammar. [N.B. Every student is required to satisfy the examiners in this paper.] 1 . Name the different kinds of nouns, and give an example of each. 2. Explain the terms nmnher, case, gender, taking the word hero to illustrate your explanation. 3. De^ne transitive verb, adverb, and give examples of each. What inflexions does the adverb undergo ? 4. Name the relative pronouns, and give examples of their respective uses How does the relative agree with its antecedent ? 6. Explain the terms mood, tense; and give the past tense (first person singular, indicative mood) and past participle of the verbs, -^o bring to arise, to draw, to lay, to eat. 6. In the following passage parse the words in italics: TA^re at the foot of yo»c?ernodding beech That wreathes its old fantastic roots so high, His listless length at noon-tide would he stretch, And pore upon the brook that babbles by. 7. Explain the X^tvcxb predicate, adverbial sentence (or clause), complex sentence with examples. ' 8. Analyse: (1) Twilight's soft dew^ steal o'er the village green. (2; Sweet was the sound, when oft, at evening's close Up yonder hill the village murmur rose. 822 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. JUNIOR CANDIDATES, 1873. . ti-. English Grammar. 1. Verbs have voice, mood, teu«c, uurnbor and person. Explain what oach ot these means, and giro examplos of oach from the verbs to sing nud to run, 2. Give tho plurals of leaf, watch, story, storey, potato ; and the singular of swiiio, lives, banditti. 3. Give the past tense and past participle of the verbs to slay, to drink. to mov, to beseech. 4. Correct: He picked up the man who he knocked down. Of London and Paris tho former is the wealthiest. Going into the garden the grass wetted my feet. 5. What do you mean by subject, object, predicate f 'iti you justify either or both of the following? He hit him a blow on the head. He ran him a race. Which is the subject in tho following : To perform is better than to promise ^ Write this with a verbal noun for subject. 6. Parse the words in italics in the following passage: Music can soften pain to ease And make despair and madness please* 7. Analyse and punctuate: He that will not when ho may When he will he shall have nay. 8. Write in the third person the following speech of King Richard, taking care to make the meaning plain, and commencing with King Richard said that : 1 wish I may forget my brother John's injuries as soon as he will forget my pardon of them. r CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATION PAPERS. 328 SENIOR CANDIDATES, J 870. English Grammar. 1. Define the terms language, parts of /ipcech, syllable. How many ByliiibleB are there respectively in the words dainty, laity ? Distinguish between vowels and consonants. Fhice a dot over the aspirate in the sentence : The heir, the hope of the house, sickened and died in u few hours. 2. What is the use of the adjective ? Write down the comparative find super- lative degrees of bad, beautiful, good, much, near, old. 8. Define a verb : and distinguish between transitive and intransitive verbs. Of what iafiexions are verbs susceptible, and what are their respective uses ? 4. Distinguish between the uses of conjunctions and prepositions. Into what two principal classes are conjunctions divisible ? When is for a con- junction? 6. Correct the following sentences : (a) He didn't ought to have broke the window. (b) Why won't you come with me ? JBecause I don't want to. (c) Neither you or me are invited. (d) Let each esteem other better than themselves. 6. When does a noun of multitude tuke the verb in the singular ; and when in the plural ? Illustrate by examples. I . What parts are essential to the formation of a complete sentence ? Explain clearly the use and construction of the copula. By what kinds of phrases may nouns, adjectives, and adverbs be respectively replaced in a sentencs "* Give examples. Y 2 >&■ i \ 524 ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 8. Analyse : One adequate support For the calamities of mortal life E-riats — one only ; an assured belief That the procession of our fate, howe'cr Sad or disturbed, is ordered hy a Being Of infinite benevolence and power : Whose everlasting purposes embrace All accidents, converting them- to good. — Wordsworth, Paree the portion of the above which is printed in italiw SENIOR CANDIDATES, 1871. English Orammar. 1. How many parts of speech are there in English ? Explain the names they bear ; and show that these names express their real character. 2. What is a pronoun ? What are the relative pronouns 1 Explain the dis- tinctions between my, mine, and my own. Distinguish between the uss of each other and one another ; and parse the phrase — They esteemed each other. 3. How many moods of a verb are there ? Explain them. To what parts of the verb do the words in italics in the following sentence belong ? I saw him reading the prize he had gained for reading. 4. Give the past tense and the past participle of the following verbs: bespeak, shrink, espy, seethe, throw, grind, strew, rive, shred, lave. GKve the imperfect participles of the following : differ, offer, confer, visit, repel, revel: and state the rules that guide you in forming them. 6. Define an adverb. Into v/hat classes of adverbs would you distribute the following : yesterday, why, once, whereby, backwards, nearly, badly, halfl Explain the following: He speaks lovd. It is exceeding great. You did riglU to speak at once CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATION PAPERS. 325 6. DiBtinguish between chuse, sentence, phrase, period, paragraph. What parts are essential to make a complete sentence ? ^ ^ '^ ""^ Of what parts does a complex sentence consist? Explain these briefly giving examples. ^^joujr, 7. Give the Saxon words in common use which most noarly answer to the tollowing: ea^panswn, depression, elevation, contraction, depart, proba- OUtty, ridiculous, transgression, veracious, fortitude.* 8. Analyse: •Dangerous it wei-e for the feeble brain of man to wade far into the doings of the Most High; whom although to know be life, and W to make mention of His name yet our soundest knowledge is to knoi Lt yfe know Him not as indeed He is, neither can know Him.' 9. Parse: • Ay me ! ay me ! with what another heart In days far-off, and with what other eyes I used to watch— if I be he that watch'd.' SENIOR CANDIDATES, 1872. English Grammar. 2. Mention the principal sources from which words in u.o in modern English have been derived, and give examples. ^' ^'inr:do^?^' ^''^' '^ '^'''^ '"^ ^''^^''^- ^'''^ ^^ ^^'^' ^^^'t of Form a sentence to show the different uses of the word that, and mention in every case what part of speech it is. 4. Explain the different m.-^ of distinguishing the masculine and feminine genders m English, and illustrate vour answer by examples. S2(J ANALYSIS OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. •; \ ■i . 6. Distinguish between transitive and intransitive verbs. What is tenM? Give the first person plural of the tenses in the indicative mood of tbe verb to sing. ' How do you classify verbs with regard to the mode of forming their past tense ? Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs : to begin, to flee, to flow, to lose, to mistake, to spread, to understand. 6. What are adverbsl Classify them according to their meaning. Give examples of nouns used as adverbs, of adverbial phrases, and of adverbs formed from prepositions and from adjectives. 7. Explain briefly the correct uses of the auxiliary verbs shall and mil in the first, second, and third persons. Give examples of correct and incorrect uses. 8. Analyse : Thus saying, from her side the fatal key, Sad instnxment of all our woe, she took ; And, towards the gate rolling her bestial train. Forthwith the huge portcullis high up drew, Which but herself not all tiie Stygian powers Could once have moved. — Milton. 9. Parse tjie words in italics in the following passage : Slowly and conscious of the rageful eye That watch'd him, till he heard the ponderous door Close, crashing with loug echoes thro' the land, Went Leolin. — Tennyson. SENIOR CiiNDIDATES, 1873. English Grammar. 1. What inflexion do adjectives admit of in modem English " State the general rules for the formation of the comparative and nperlative degrees, and give instances of regular and irregular comparisons. 2. What are pronouns? Enumerate the different cirtvsses into whicli thej may bo divided. ! Ba M? the )a8t 'bn: hve 3rbs the CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATION PAPERS. 327 i. Mention the inflexions of which verbs admit. Enumerate the auxiliary verbs, distinguishing those which are auxiliaries of voice, mood, and 4. What is the meaning of the terms 'weak' and 'strong' conjugations? Give the past tense and past participle of the verbs, to fall, to drink, to lend, to hit, to throw, to swim, to hide, to dig, to dream. 5. Explain the meaning of the terms subject, object, predicate; and give an example of a compound sentence, and of a complex sentence, 6. Form sentences to show the different uses of the words >-. since, mention- ing m each case the part of speech which the word is. 7. Parse the words in italics in the following passage : This is the state of man ; to-day he puts forth The tender /«aws of hope; ^o-Twm-ow; ifosso»^5, ^»c? 5ear5 his blushing honours thick upon him : The third day comes a/rosif, a killing frost, And when he thinks, good easy man, full surely His greatness w n-ripening, nips his root, And then he falls, as 1 do. • 8. Punctuate and analyse : I desire you as the last suit I am like to make to you to believe that I do not fly my country for guilt and how passionately soever I am pursued that 1 have not done anything to make the university ashamed of me or to repent the good opinion they once had of me and though i must have no further mention in your public devotions I hope I shall De always remembered in your private prayers.— CZarenrfon. ;e the lative th^ ...t J TOEONTO UNIVEKSITY EXAMINATIONS. The following papers are made up of questions selected from those set at the different Examinations in English in the University at Toronto during the last fifteen years. In arranging his Praxis the author states that the ohject in view was "to illustrate the tone and requirements of the Public Competitive Examinations " in England, and many of the ques- tions given have not, therefore, a very direct bearing on the contents of the book. The object in view in adding a selection of Canadian questions being very similar, the student need not be surprised to find that some of the questions chosen can be answered but very imperfectly from the work itself I. 1. Give the plurals of "body," "valley," "knife," "appendix," "ter- minus ; " and state all the regular modes of forming genuine English plurals, with examples. 2. Write short notes upon the peculiarities of form in these words : seamstress, afield, himself, twain, he-goat, widower, father-in-law. 3. Give examples of adverbs exhibiting plural and comparative forms and genuine case-endings. 4. What are the chief peculiarities of interjections ? How do you distinguish them from expletives? 6. Mention the most common native English prefixes and affixes, and those derived from Latin and Greek, giving the significance of each. 6. Write a note on the Etymology of the following words : Antithesis, anticipate, shame-faced, bright-faced, bundle, shilly-shally, lamb- kin, deaf-mute, slave-born, Whitby, Colborne, potato. 7. When should the article be repeated before each of several adjectives qualifying a noun, and when not? 8. How may figures of speech ba divided, and what rules are to be ob- served in their useK IT. 1. Give an historical sketch of the English alphabet. 2. Name and explain the parts into wiiich Grannuar may be divided. i ■ ' - I ; 11. TORONTO UNIVERSITY EXAMINATIONS 3. Give rules for the comparison of adjectives, and compare happy, beaati- ful, old, superior, ill, circular, near, fore. 4. Point out the cases in which "that" may he used as a relative instead of "who" or "which;" those in which it must be used; and those in which it must not. 5. Write a note on the distinctive use of the auxiliary verbs sJudl and will. 6. Can a sentence be formed without a verb? Parse the following: (a) Every one to his taste; (6) Great wealth, little wealj (c) The greatest of rarities, a wise man. 7. Illustrate the difference between a simple, a compound, and a complex sentence. 8. Compare as to their historical and grammatical etymology, and their precise meaning, the following words and expressions : break, frac- ture ; trenchant, cutting ; all but one, all except one ; shatter, atomize; astronomy, astrology; swift, rapid; timely, temporary; proceed, go. III. 1. Define the several parts of speech; 2. Give the etymological signification of the definite and indefinite article, 3. "What is meant by Apposition, Nominative Absolute, Predicate noun, Mood, and Voice ? 4. Write a single sentence which shall contain all the parts of speech, employing only words of An ^jlo-Saxon origin. 5. Write notes on the historical etymology of the following : Refract, if, an you choose, fount, font of type, but, except, catarrh, cataract, counteract, disastrous, catastrophe, ox, beef. 6. Mention some words which have been introduced as a result of old superstitions anJ customs, 7. State the rules for tl c concord of (a) a verb and its subject, and (b) a relative and it": antecedent, noticing the peculiar cases that occur. 8. Define and illustrate allegory, simile, metaphor, epizeuxis, litotes, and zeugma. IV. 1. Give rules for syllabication, and state the principles on which they are buHktU. TORONTO UNIVERSITY EXAMINATIONS. 111. k old (5) a tsur. 3, and are 2L When may the Saxon possessive be used instead of the Norman ; and , , . when is the "s" omitted after the apostrophe in the possessive singular? 8. Give the force of the "s" in "towards," "unawares"; of the *'om"in "whilom," "seldom"; of the "re" in "here," "there"; of the "n"in "twam," "then" ; and of the "ch"in "which," "such." 4. Account for the silent letters in debt, schism, judge, two, doubt, talk, design, phlegm, sought, victuals, know, reign. Is their retention desirable in modern orthography ? Give reasons for your answer. 6. The following geographical names occur in Britain ; explain their derivation and note briefly the events in British history which ac- count for the varied origin of such words : Beaumaris, Berwick, Chester, Danby, Dungeness, Dingwall, GrS,ce-Dieu, Inverness, Kent, Langholm, Milnethorpe, Portsmouth, Purfleet, Rotherhithe, Scarborough, Seaforth, Wendover. 6. Name and give examples of those rhetorical figures which consist in the repetition of a word or a phrase. 7. When it is said that " usage gives the law to language " what kind of usage is meant ? If usage is divided, what considerations should have chief weight in establishing a Tiorma loquendi f V. 1. Give a list of those simple phonetic elements in English which have no simple orthographic representations. 2. Explain fully the character and use of Interrogative and Relative Pro- nouns, giving the derivation of the words so classed, and noticing peculiarities in the use of any of them. 3. Write an article on the Noun-substantive, defining it, noticing its ac- cidents, explaining anomalous forms, and giving the rules which regulate its syntax. 4. Give the present infinitive and preterite forms of the verbs whose par- ticiples are, dared, dug, eaten, lain, led, read, riven, sat, 8et> sodden, sown, wound, wning. 5. Shew how the loss of inflections in English has afl'ected its syntax, and give the fundamental laws which regulate the arranging of words into sentences. 6. Comment on the form and history of the following words — roremos;, other, itfly hard, bent/ cottld, wrought, and svugvtrolif IV. TORONTO UNIVERSITY EXAMINATIONS M 7. Derive the following words, giving the intermediate fornui: — Sir, madam, curfew, vinegar, bachelor, prize, biscuit, proxy, kerohie and verdict. 8. Define and exemplify the following figures ; — Comparison, personifica- tion, hyperbole, climax, pleonasm, anastrophe, truism, and pro- lepsis. VI. 1. Give a sketch of the origin and history of alphabetical writing, and show how far the imperfections of the English alphabet may be historically accounted for. 2. Classify the consonants so as to indicate the different relations of each sound. 3. Divide the following words into syllables, marking accent and quantity, and exhibiting the correct pronunciation : — Climacteric, espionage, fanatic, herculean, homogeneity, hymeneal, imbecile, indecorous, pharmaceutist, plethora, recondite, splenetic. 4. " Oral spelling is a contradiction in terms." Give reasons for agreeing with or differing from this view. 5. Give the logical force and explain the derivation of the indefinite article. Which of its ^forms should precede hero, host, hostility, usual, yellow ? 6. Define voice, mood, and tense. Explain the method of the formation of the tenses of an English verb of ti^e strong conjugation. 7. Define "hybrid" /ords, and give som'3 example of such as are in common use. 8. Distinguish with regard to signification and use : Some from any ; each from every and either ; by from with ; a or an from one ; the from that ; shall from will ; where from whither ; hope from ex- pect } laudable from praiseworthy ; silence from taciturnity. VII. 1. Some grammarians classify all words as notional and relational ; where, in such a system, can the Interjection find a place ? Give reasons for the answer. 2. Give a list of auxiliary verbs Avith their etymological derivation and original meaning, specially noting such as can still be used inde- pendently* TORONTO ITNTTERSITY EXAMTNATIONS. V, 8. Rushton says : "Grammarians have produced much needless perplexity by confounding the two forms in *ing."' Distinguish etymologi- oally between the two forms of the so-called present participle, and shew whether any advantage is gained by observing the distinction in practice. 4. Gire an accurate description of the personal pronoun, and state the reasons for and against classifying "he," "she," and "it" as de- monstrative rather than personal pronouns. 6. Fowler defines conjunctions as "words that connect sentences or parts of sentences." Mention all those that do this and nothing more. 6. Give an account of the various influences which have affected English orthography, and state the benefits that have resulted to it from the invention and employment of printing. 7. Trace and explain the derivation of the following words : Abandon, absurd, agree, afraid, coil, doll, dollar, dolomite, doggerel, ency- clopaedia, gramercy, marry (interjection), outrage, proxy, provost, Pleiad, pomp, 'sdeath, surgeon, trespass, teetotaller, 8. What rhetorical advantages are gained by the use of tropical forms, and what rules regulate their use ? .,11 ■1 in ex- ^ere, sons and Inde* VIII. 1. If the words of the English language were to be divided into classes according as they were appellative, attributive, or relational, what parts of speech would be aiTanged under each head, and which ones would fail to find any appropriate position? Give reasons for the distribution you would make. 2. What rules regarding the accidence of nouns are exemplified or trans- gressed in the formation of the following words : Banditti, beaux, genii, horses, irons. Ides, letters, news, pease, pence, politics, scissors, tidings, vespers, women, yeomanry ? 3. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs : Burst, ohide, cleave, cling, dare, flee, fly, flow, lay, lie, load, rid, set, sit, shear, thrust. 4. Explain the part played by auxiliaries in the conjugation of English verbs, and show what is gained by their use. 5. Give the derivation and precise meaning of the following terminations when used to form adjectives from other parts of speech : — ary, — al, — ly, — fed, — some, — n, — ic, — y, — ^ist. '1 vi TORONTO UNIVERSTTY EXAMINaTTONS. 6. Give the derivation of the prefix "a," found in many adverbs and prepositions. 7. Explain the formation and general signification of such reduplicated words as zig-zag, pell-mell, helter-skelter, &c. 8. Can than govern an objective case ? If so, what is the nature of the government ? IX. 1. Explain and exemplify the meaning of the term " orthographical ex- pedient," and \jomt out any that occur in the following couplet : A nightingale that all day long Had cheered the village with his song. 2. Give the rules for the formation of the plural and the possessive case of nouns. Why is **y " changed into "ies" and "f " into "ves" in the plural ? Explain the peculiarities of the following plurals, account for their existence, and give the corresponding singular forms : Oxen, mice, kine, women, mussulmans, arcana, virtuosi, larvae. Magi. 8. Define the verb. Explain what is meant by ** voice," and by the ten-^a "strong" and " weak" as applied to the conjugation of verbs. 4. * * Every part of speech is capable of becoming an adverb. " Discuss the correctness of this statement, giving examples. 5. Write a paper on the mode of origin of the various classes of inteijec- tions, and give examples. 6. Explain and illustrate what is meant by poetical license, and define clearly wherein it difters from prose. 7. Give the original derivation and meaning of knave, churl, clown, rustic, pagan, diffident, cunning, impertinent. Define their later meanings, and trace the changes to their source. 8. ** A great part of our ordinary language, all that concerns the relations of invisible things, consists of implied metaphors. " Explain and illustrate this statement; X. 1. What are the chief conditions requisite in a perfect system of notation by letters ? Account for the " b" in dumb," " I" in could," "a"' in kiln," "s" in island." TORONTO UNIVERSITY EXAMINATIONS. Vll. 2. Some grammarians are of opinion that " self" was orif^inally a noun, others hold that it was an adjective. Which theory will best account for anomalies in the formation of the compound pronouns, myself, thyself, himself, themselves, and why ? 3. Arrange in classes such adjectivt^s us do not admit of comparison, and explain the peculiarities of the following comparatives : Nearer, ulterior, nether, inner, aiU'r, utter, prior, major, elder, rather, other. Give examples of atJjeetivcs in comparative and su[)erlative forma which, though not lo{;;ically correct, are rhetorically admissible. 4. Describe fully the office of the Relative Tronouu, and give the rules that regulate itut syntax. 6. What is Syntax ? Define and give examples of the following syntac- tical figures : Ellipsis, zeugma, pleonasm, hypallage, anastrophe, hysteron-proteron. 6. Distinguish between Barbarism, Solecism, and Impropriety, and give one or more examples of each. 7. Give examples of the varioua forms of compound sentences containing correlative clauses. 8. Give the derivation of the names of the days of the week and the months of the year ; also of Easter, riding (division of a county), shire, county, since, frontispiece, afraid, feign, surgeon, peck, fur- long, sorcerer, matriculation, feat, address, impair, invoice, squadron, raisin, parapet, usher, and surplice. XI. "n' 1. Give rules for the formation of the possessive case of nouns. When may both ** of" and the pc ssessive case proper be used? Correct the following expressions : Misses shoes ; James hat j old wives stories ; old womens fables. 2. Distinguish between gender and sex. Compare English with Greek and Latin with respect to this distini tion. Point out the various methods by which gender is expressed in English. 8. *' Strictly speaking there is no mood in the English veib." What is implied in this statement ? In what sense are mo'^ds of the English verb spoken of ? Specify the moods attributed to it. 4. Shew by what jarocess romplex past and future tenses are expressed in English, and discuss the gains or lossei^ thereby produced. Vlll. TORONTO TTNTVEliaiTY FXAMINATTONS. 1^ i \i\ \ imht H, In what canes are articluA Qs^itted before nouns in English. Give wxamplea. 6. Can an interjection govern a case I Explain such ezpreasions as "Ah mel" "Alas for love I" 7. Latiiam says : " The logical and hiHtorical analyses of a language generally coincide. " Illustrate this in the case of the English language. 8. Define, giving examples, syncdoche, metonomy, allusion, antithesis, aposiopeais, epanalopais, paronomasia. XII. 1. Define Grammar as a science of rh«!toric. Define enallage, catachresis, anti-climax, oxymoron, a»ti«uaclasis, tauto- logy, alliteration, and euphemism. XVI. 1 Classify the letters of the English alphabet with if^erunce to the organs by which the sounds they represent are produc»^d. Classify in the same manner all the simple sounds of the English language. 2. What relics of a previous inflectional state remain in the English language? Mention some inflections that are obsolescent at the present time. 3. Explain the nature ajjd use of the subjunctive mood. What importance should be attached to it in English ? Could it be dispensed with ? Give reasons for your answer 4. Classify as parts of speech the following expressions : — Worth, naught, due, lief, away, afloat, mine, own, self-same, belike, meseems. 6. In how many different ways is the word " that " used ? Write a sen- tones containing an example of each, 6. Give etymological reasons for changing the spelling of the following words : — Leftenant, kurnel, aquaduct, bewty, parsel, decon, sepe- rate, nusance, analize, sirname, deceiptful, supercede, 7. Craik says : "The English of the Anglo-Saxon period diflbred from the English that we speak in two important respects. It was an un- mixed language ; and it is what is called a synthetic, in contradis- tinction to an analytic language." Explain this, 8. Explain what is meant by purity, propriety, and precision of style, and shew how they may bfe attained. XVII. 1. What are the Anglo-Saxon forms of "my" and "mine,', and what assistance can be derived from them in determining the classification Qf these wordi 'i M 't // i; :i Xll. TORONTO UNIVERSITY EXAMINATIONS. 2. Account etymologically for the forms, it, his, there, am, dicl, more, children, other, these. 3. Explain fully the nature and oflSce of the preposition. i. Do conjunctions ever connect individual words in a sentence? Illustrate your answer by examples, and distinguish in nature and use between coordinate and subordinate conjunctions. 5. Mr. Morrell calls the interjection an extra-grammatical utterance. Shew|what is implied in this description and discuss its correctness. 6. Give examples of English words, three or four of each kind, derived from the Celtic, Italian, Spanish, Arabic, Persian, Hebrew, and Hindustani languages. 7. Di-syllable or dis-syllable ; di-ph thong or diph-thong; el -iptical or el- liptical; en-dogenous or endo-genous; ep-hemeral or eph-emeral; pro-gnostic or prog-nostic ; trig-lypli or tri-glyph ; hex-ameter or hexa-meter. Give etymological reasons in each case for preferring one or other of the above forms. 8. Give the derivation of the following words and show how they acquired their present signification : — AduUamite, artillery, bailiff, bankrupt, black-guard, bombast, chartist, chattel, cheque, companion, esquire, gazette, grenadier, heathen, infantry, lumber, marquis, pioneer, prodigious, pragmatical, pagan, preposterous, romance, sacrament, tribulation, villain. ziiL PUBLIC SCHOOL TEACHERS' EXAMIN- ATIONS. The following questions have been selected from amongst those set during the last few years for the examination of first and second class teachers in. the Provinoe of Ontario : FIRST CLASS. I. 1. Specify and exemplify the various constructions in which the sign of the possessive case is omitted. 2. Explain with the aid of examples the meaning of the terms, "gram- matical equivalent" and "conjunctive adverb." 3. Parse the italicized words in the following sentences : — (a) Furthest from him is best ; (&) He told me his sad story on his way thither ; (c) She saved ten dollars a year out of her wages as a servant. 4. Correct or justify the forms of expression employed in the following sentences : (a) Nobody but the good go to Congress. (b) I did groan To think that a most unambitious slave, Like thou, should'st dance and revel on the grave Of Liberty. (c) The hue and cry was raised, {d) Having discussed the future of the good, consider we now the destiny of the wicked. (e) Failing this pvrangement, will you be so good as to come to my assistance. 6. Write half a dozen lines on any subject you choose, using only words of Anglo-Saxon origin. 6. Give the derivation and trace the history of lesson, mean, peer, im- postor, insolent. I XIV. TORONTO UNIVERSITY EXAMINATIONS. II. 1 <<< Orthogj'iiplucal expedients are resorted to on account of the imper- fections of the English alphabet, which may bo characterized as deficient, redundant, and ambiguous." — Authorized Spelling Booh. Explain clearly the meaning of the term *' orthographical expe- dient," and show in wliat respects the Engliah alphabet is deHcient, redundant, and ambiguous. ii. Some grammarians consider the article and the participle diatinct parts of speech. State your own views with reasons. 3. Discuss the grammar of these sentences : — ^) thou my voice inspire Who touched Isaiah's hallowed lips witli fire. (J) Ellipsis is where one or more words are wanting to complete the sense. (c) Lot us take care how we sin. (d) This blunder is said actually to have occurred. (c) An example or two are sufficient to illustrate the general principle. (/) There is more than one fashionable dealer in old furniture in the west of London who habitually sells as old furniture, a great part of which is new. 4. Define the rhetorical figures of which tlie following quotations are illustrative : — (a) Can gray hairs make folly venerable ? — Junius. (6) To Adam Paradise was a home ; to the good among his descen- dants home is a Paradise. — Hare. (c) Pity, ihe violet on the tyrant's grave. — Tennyson. 5. Enumerate the meanings of dear, fair, sound, become, spirit, and brook. 6. Give the derivation of the following words : — Fault, but, that, under- ling, sound, conjure, spirit, once, age, noble, there, fame, than, encompass, indeed, only, and easily ; and trace the history of the meaning where you can. ni. 1. Name the inflected parts of speech, state the inflections to v>Lkii they are subject, and give an example of every iuiiectioual form in the TORONTO UNIVERSITY EXAMINATIONS. XV. language. Give all tlie inflectional forms of "abbot," "me," and "was." Are "fatherly," "happier," and "acknowledgement," inflectional foiins ? Explain the forms "his" and " whom." 2. Parse the italicized words in the following : (a) To speak the truth, I have never been in such distress as now ; {b) The king, so far from raising the question, attempted to prevent the queen from raising it ; (c) The performance of the pupils is wonderfully good, consider- ing that they have only one teacher, 3. " Substantives signifying the same thing agree in case." Point out the defects of this rule for apposition, and define "apposition." 4. Correct or justify : (a) The pupils who have finished the exercise "stand up" ; (b) I intended to have written last week ; (c) Do for any sake be quiet ; {d) He got married to a widow ; (e) About one hundred feet of the dam has been swept away. 5. Point out the figures of speech in wild west wind, thou breath of Autumn's being, Thou from whose unseen presence the leaves dead Are driven like ghosts from au enchanter fleeing, Yellow, and black, and pale, and hectic red. Pestilence-stricken multitudes ! 6. When and under what circumstances did the principal elements which enter into the composition of the English language severally take their places in it ? 7. Give the derivation of : muslin, currant, hymeneal, bursar, coercion, rill, priest, bishopric, deed, urbanity, universe, here, inoculate, religion, gentiy, chestnut, vulgate, preposterous, rival, romance, health, legend, fancy ; tracing the history of the meaning wherever you can. IV. 1 Define adjective and pronoun ; state how you classify adjectives and pronouns ; show where yon draw the line between these parts of speech, and explain your vi'^ws with regard to the parsing of his, each, this, all, another, what, and some, in the various construc- tions in which they may occur. Give reasons for your answers. 2. Give examples of sentences in which it is U'.ore appropriate to use "that" than '"who" or "which.." Explain the reason in each case. XVI. TORONTO UNIVERSITY EXAMINATIONS. hi 8. Parse the italicized words in the following sentences from Macaulay's letters : — {a) I will not omit writing two days running. {b) The great topic now in London is not, as you perhaps fancy, Reform, but cholera. There is a great panic, as great a panic as I remember, particularly in the city. (c) When Chantry dined with Rogers some time ago, &o. {d) Her ladyship is all courtesy and kindness to me. (e) Well, writing to constituents is less of a plague to you than to most people. (/) Now that 1 had risen again, he hoped that they should hear me often. 4. Explain the meaning of orthoepy, idiom, dialect, and metaphor, and give the best definitions you know of letter, syllable, and word. 5. Distinguish between the following wo.'^ds: Common and mutual; stationery and stationary ; feminine and effeminate ; sanitary and sanatory ; persecute and torment ; loiter and linger. 6. Explain the derivation of afeard, afraid, valour, ornament, prithee, peace, enterprise, lady, esteem, adhere, and desire. 7. What information about the following things may be obtained from the names they bear: Port (wiue), sherry, nankeen, ammonia, bayonet, cherry, currants ? 8. Correct or justify, in either case giving your reasons, the following sentences : — (a) In this poem is a very confident and discriminate character of Spenser whose work he had then never read. — Dr. Johnson. (6) This is one of the most successful works that ever was executed. (c) The trade of Marseilles vestly increase^' o^'nce the French have had Algiers. (d) He always begins by drawing down his shaggy eye-brows, making a face extremely like his uncle, wagging his head and saying, &c. — MaccMlay, zviL ig \9, id SECOND CLASS. I. 1. Give the abstract nouns of the same derivation as brief, tme, common, needy, and poor. j 2. Write the plural ef the following: — Two, hidalgo, no, chimney, col- loquy, Livy, vinculum, 3, w, appendix. Lord Gordon, court-martial. 3. Classify the pronouns enumerating those coming under each head. 4. Parse the italicised words in the following quotations : (a) In spite of such a man as Gibbon's opposition ; (b) They are not the same that they have been ; (c) He did it in the geography class ; (d) They are very much in the style of Milton's sonnets ; (e) That is the way that boys begin. 5. Give accurate rules for the use of sTiall and loill, 6. What are the Latin and Greek prefixes meauing/rom, beyond, without ? 7. Give the derivation of none, prophet, line, fruitless, crown, barren, sceptre, succeeding. II. 1. Give the full syntactical parsing of italicised words in the following extract : — ^'Strange as it may seem to find a song-writer put for- ward as an active instrument of union among his foUow-Hellens, it is not the less tme that those poets whom we have briefly passed in review, by enriching the common langum/c, and by circulating from town to town either in person or in their compositions, contributed to fan the flame of Pan-Hellenic patriotism at a time when there were few circumstances to co-operate with them, and when the causes tending to pei-petuate isolation seemed in the ascendant. — Grate : History of Greece. 2. Divide the extract into propositions, stating their kind and connection, and give a complete analysis of each proposition. 3. Make lists of the prefixes and affixes occurring in the pasi'^«:e and classify them according to (a) meaning, and (^6) derivation. i. Give the principal parts of new, fly, Hue, stride, rive, crow. i I XVIU. TORONTO UNIVEHSITY EXAMINATIONS/ 6. Give examples of the difFerent uses of (a) wordi ending in ing, and (J) of but. 6. Correct, where necessary, the spelling of the following words : — Indi- genous, surpless, deliniatiou, dipthong, subtile, judgement, elly- gyac, prophane, purliew, suffragan, indispensible, responsible. 7. Trace the following words to Latin or Greek roots: — Venison, sample, maintain, livery, human, hermit, sarcophagus, volume, technical, phylactery, blasphemy. I' 1 III. 1. Parse the italicised words in the following sentences : — [i) Did •* religion" when our translation was made mean godliness t (b) Thus shall mankind his guardian care engage. The promised /a^7ter of a future age. (c) In Christian hearts for a pagan zeal ! A needful but opprobrious prayer I {d) He is busy thrashing. 2. Give instances of infinitives and infinitive phrases used as the object of a verb. 3. Give examples of the different constructions in which " as" is used, and tell in which of them it may be replaced by " that." 4. Distinguish {a) May I go ? from Can I go ? (i) Shall I go ? from "Will I go? (c) Were I to go? from Was I to go ? {d) Would I have gone? from Should I have gone ? 5. Enumerate the ailixes denoting state, condition, or quality, and give an example of each in cgmbination. 6. Make a list of words derived from lego, including four from the Latin and four from the Greek verb. 7. Correct, giving reasons, or defend the modes of expression employed in the following quotations : — (a) Give us the secrets of his pagan hell. Where ghost with ghost in sad communion dwell. (ft) What sort of a looking man is he ? {e) Thou lovest, but ne'er knew love's sad satiety. (d) One sort of feels impressed with the vastness of the building, thuu<'-h disgusted with the cliiMlohueSS of the ceremonies. Latin 3d in TORONTO UmVERSITY EXAMINATIOWa IV. tit. 1. What do yon understand by gender in grammar t Show that your definition applies to each of these words : — Lady, seamstress, man- servant, testatrix, mistress, nervine, margravine. 2. Give rules for the right use of the subjunctive mood with examples. 3. Write the past tense, present participle, and past participle of flow, fly, singe, dye, loose, lay, bear. 4. What parts of speech perform a double function ? Give full explanatory examples. 6. Give adjectives formed from Latin or Greek roots, corresponding to the English nouns : brother, forest, breath, beginning, husband, cloud, leg, eye, bad, rule. 6. Convert the following adjectives, by the help of prefixes or suffixes, 'into verbs : — Large, just, humble, strong ; and convert the following verbs into nouns : Weave, compel, receive, dig, think. Explain the law which governs each change. 7. Criticise the syntax of the following sentences, suggesting corrections where necessary : — (o) Whom say ye that I am f (6) From whence comes he ? (c) Whom the gods love die young. {d) And many a holy text she strews That teach the moralist how to die. (e) Neither riches or beauty furnish solid peace and contentment. (/) Three months' notice are required previous to a pupil leaving school. ig) If I were he, I would take more care for the future. (A) The atrocious crime of being a young man I siiall neither at- tempt to palliate nor deny. [ling, 33. McGILL UNIVERSITY EXAMINATIONS. The following qnesticns, selected from amongst those set in English at the various examinations in connection with McGill University in 1875, will afford some idea of the requirements in that institution. 1. Shew the difference between abstract and concrete names. Are class names abstract or concrete f Mention some names that are abstract or concrete, according to the way they are employed. 2. Give examples illustrating the use of "that" as an adjective and as a pronoun. 8. Explain the restricting and the oo-ordinating uses of the relative pronouns. 4. Nouns are often used as adjectives ; how are they distinguished from true adjectives? 6. Mention any peculiarities worth noting in the use of the numeral adjectives — both, many, some, all, no, none, every. 6. Enumerate the conjunctions in the first class of the co-ordinating, and mention the classes into which the subordinating are divided. 7. How is the use of different words to denote gender to be accounted for ? II. 1. What are supposed to be the reasons for assigning to inanimate objects, gender, masculine and feminine ? 2. If such forms as "Who do you speak to?"; "Who for?", are admissible, how is the relative pronoun to be construed ? 3. Mention the points of difference between the Past Indefinite and the Present Perfect Tenses, 4. Mention the different periods that have been noted for the inti'oduction of Latin words into the vocabulary of English. $. Composition of Nouna. Give examples of nouns with adjectives — nouns with rulea — nouns with adverbs— adverli and verb—verb and verb. TORONTO UNIVERSITY EXAMINATIONS. XXI. 6. Oire examples of the noun clause, adjeotire olaase, and adverbial clause. 7. State the mode suggested for reconciling grammar and usage in sucli expressions as " it is me," &c. kts, [he Ion m. 1. Mention the principal differences in regard to inflection betwcjen the Anglo-Saxon and Semi^ ^\ ^\ Wk\ fe ^4r s ZXIL TORONTO UHIVEKSITT EXAMINATIONS. V. i 1. Give fimr methods of enlarging fhe snbjeet of ft tentenoe^ ififh examplef. 2. Analyse the following sentence : — " Sunshine of Saint Eulalie" was she called ; for that was the sunshine which, as the farmers believed, would load their orchards with apples. 8. Correct, where necessary, the following sentences :— Suppose you and me go. He gave them to yon and L If I were him I would go abroad. They that honour me I will honour. "The Pleasures of Hope" was written by CampbelL I got it at Dawson's the book- seller. I done my sum first. Has either of your three friends arrived t Neither the captain nor the mate .were saved. Give me them books. 4. The bulk of our borrowed words are of Latin origin ; when and how did they oome into the language f 5. Write down the words in the Lord's Prayer, not of Saxon origin. d. State dearly the differences between Early English (Anglo«Sazon) and Modem Englishi i1 ZXIU UNIVEKSITY OF VICTOBIA COLLEGE. Matrionlation EzaminationB, September 1874. English Grammar, (Time — Two Hoars.) I. » 1. What are the oharaoteristios of mntes, semi-yowels, and liquids ? What letters belong to each of these classes ? 2. To what rules of orthography are the words thus, buzz, $aid, and truly, severally exceptions. 8. Define abstract nouns and adjectives. Show how these classes of words resemble each other and how they di£Fer. 4. How do you distinguish between aender and sex t How does the English language differ from other languages in the matter of Gender ? What is the gender usually given to the words sun, moon, Winter, Spriny, death, and man-of-war ? Give reasons for the usage in these cases. 5. In what number should the words politics, mathematics, &o., be •onstrued ? Give sentences introducing these words as subjects. 6. Into what classes are verbs divided? Givo difiuition and ox* ample of each class. 7. Give the imparfeot tense and the past participle of bid, eat, hang, lay, lie, (to recline), load, and wet, 8. Explain the proper use of the auxiliaries shall and will, Givo •xamples in illustration. 9. Give analysis ofJ[the following sentences; parse the words in itaUcs ; and note peculiar forms and uses of words : — " But that I am forbid To tell the secrets of my prison-house, I could a tale unfold whose hghtest word Would harrow up thy soul, freeze thy young blood, Make thy two eyes, like stars, start from their spheres^ Thy knotted and combined locks to part. And each particular hair to stand an end, Like quills upon the fretful poi-pentine." XXIV TIOTOBU COLLEGE EXAMINATIONS. 10. Saj ^liioh of the following fcrms are to be preferred, and giya reasons for the preference m each case : — (a.) The hoaee is building. The honoe is a-bnilding. The house is being built. (6.) The Miss Smiths. Tho Misses Smith. The Misses Smiilu (c.) A house to let. A house to be let. (d). The first two verses. Tlie two first verses. ' : . Parse the words in italics in the following sentences :— (a.) The well is twenty feet deep, {b.) Thou madest Him a little lower than the ongols. (c.) The land is worth eighty dollars an acre, (d.) We are to leave this evening. (f .) " Let such an one think, such as we are in word by letters, such will we be in deed," (/.) That was but part of tho truth, though nothing but tho truth. 12. Correct vulgar errors in the following sentences, and give the reason for each correction : — {a.) We were looking for you this morning, me and my brother, but we could not find you. Was you at home ? (6.) It's no use trying to persuade him ; he will do as he has a miud to. (c.) She looks beautifully, and sings sweetly. (d.) Mr. A. is a tolerable good writer, but a very poor fipeakor. {e.) I have never been able to find them men, tho' I have tried to, very often. n. English Composition, (Time— One Hour.) 1. Write sentences in which the words god, heaven, saviour, and providence, should begin with small letters. 2. State the various cases in which a colon should be used. QiT6 examples. 3. Give rule for the punctuation of words and clauses in apposition. State the exceptions to this rule, and give example of both rule and ex- ceptions. 4. When should numbers be expressed by written words, and when by Arabic characters ? Givo rule for punctuation in the last case. yiCTOBU OOLLSafl BXAICniATIONS. ZX7 6. Whfti is the proper use of the markB of parentheiis t When may eommM serve to set off parenthetical clauses f 6. Qive the roles of syllabification. Diyide the following words into lullabies by means of hyphens :— individuality, animosity, astronomy, preexistenoe, apostolical, adhesion. 7. CSorreot all errors of punctuation, spelling, Ac, in the following passages : — (a.) Rev. Dr. Egerton Byorson D D, L.L.D Ghiel superintcndnat of education ; Normal School Toronto Ont. (b.) Vio CoU, Cobourg Ont. Sept 29. 1874. (e.) Permit me to subscribe myself your obliged and obt servt Oiobox J Mombamto. (d) I say gentlemen there is an individual present, resumed the host, in whose society I am sure we must take great delight and and the conversation of that individual must have afforded to every one present the utmost pleasure : Thank Heaven He dost not mean me thought Minus; Gentlemen I am but a humble individuel myself and I perhaps ought to apologise for allowing any individuel feelings of fricndBhips to induce me to venture to rise to pupose the health of that perein : A per- son that I am sure, that is to say ; i\ person whose vertues must indear Lim to those who krow him and arid those who have not the pleasure of knowing him can not dialikb him hear here said the Company in a tone of encouragement and approval ? Gentleman continued budden my Cousen is a man who who is a reallat5on of my own Here here Minus groaned oddibly * • * Gentlemen I feel, that I have already tres- passed on your attentions for to long a time. With every feeling of with every Sentiment of of Grattification suggested the friend of the family of Grattification I beg to purpose the health of Mr Minus. Standing Gentlemen Shouted the indefatigeable little man with the whiskers and with the honors take your time, from me if you please Hip Hip Pip Za Hip Hip Pip Za Hip pip Za a a a I A GENEEAL INDEX. ■*o*- I GRAMMATICAL. ABLATIVE, 2, 35 Abstract noun (rae Noun), 1 Accent, 1, 16 rale of, 16 use of, 16 law of, 16 words which vary their meaning according to, 280, 281 Acddenoe, 1 Accident, 1, 28 Accusatiye, 2, 85 doable, 93 cognate, 96 factitive, 97 of space, time, and measurement, 96 Active (see Verb) Adjective, definition of, 1, 36 dassiflcation of, 36 simple, 86 compound, 86 derived, 86 common, 1, 86 proper, 1, 86 numeral, 1, 36 pronominal, 1, 36 ordinal, 1, 86 ^v ^rHtnA.1, 1, 86 definitive, 1, 86 qualitative, 1, 86 quantitative, 1, 36 distributive^ 89 multiplicative, 89 comparison of, 41 rules for do., 42 incapable of comparison, 42 irregular, 48 syntax of, 97, 118 for adverb, n^suse of, 112 Adverb, definition of, 1, 7Q Adverb, classification of, 70 formation of, 72 prefixes of, 72 sufiixes of, 72 phrases and words, 72 comparison of, 78 pronominal, 60, 78 " derivation of, 72 how distinguished, 80, 81 syntax of, 105, 112 for adjective, misuse of, 113 in ly, 112 position of, 126, 126 Affirmative proposition, 85 After, used differently, 80 All, every, whole (usage of), 118 Alphabet, imperfections of, 13 expedients for remedying these, 18 Also, 124 Amid, among (usage of), 118 Antecedent, syntax of, 101 Antithesis, 108 Aphsresis, 107 Apocope, 107 Apparent, obvious (usage of), 123 Art and sciences, definition of, 2, 9 Article, definition of, 2, 37 syntax of, 98, 99, 118 As, a relative, 47, 49 Aught, 118 Augmentative (see Noim), 2, 21 Authentic, genuine (usage of), 1 18 Auxiliary (verb), definition of, 7, 64 classification o^ 64 list of, 66, 67 l| B AD, 43 BarbariAn, 2, 111 830 INDEX. Be, ooi^tigation of, 66 syntax of, 112 compound tenses fbrmod with, 58 Because (usage of), 1 19 Besides (usage uf), 119 Between, betwixt (usiigc of), 119 among (usage of), 118 Both, 124 But, as a relative, 80 as a conjunction, 80 as a preposition, 80 aa an adverb, 80 By, with, through (usage of), 118 By and by, 118 By the bye, 118 CAN, 66 Canons of good usage, 109, 110 Case, 2, 38 Categorical, 2 proposition, 83 Causative verbs, 56, 57 Chiefest, 44 Collective noun (see Noun) syntax of, 93 Collectiveness, how shown, 26 Collocation of words, 117 Common noun (see Noun), 20 mutual (usa^e of), 122 Comparison of adjective and adverb, 2 of adjectives. Ill of adverbs, 78 irregular, 48 sign of, 48 syntax of, 97, 99, 118 Complement of predicate, 87 Completely (usage of), 120 Complex sentences, 88 Composition, 2, 23 Composure, composition (usage of), 120 Compound, 2 nouns, 22 disguised, 22 apparent, 28 adjectives, 40 pronouns, 60 conjunctions, 80 prepositions, 7S adverbs, 78 sentences, 86, 88 Concord, 92 Conditional daune, 101 Goiyugation, 3, 58 active, 60 passive, 63 Conjugation of yerb (to bk), 6S Conjunction, definition of, H, 77 classification of, 77 co-ordinate, 78 subordinate, 78 correlative, 78, /'9 syntaxof, 104, 117 Consequent clause, 101 Consonant, 3, 10 Contemporary, cotemporary (usage of), 120 Contemptuously, contemptibly (usage of), 120 Convertibility, 108 Co-ordinate conjunction, 78, 79 clause, 88 Copula, 3, 82 Correlntive, 3 subjunctive form, 103 Ciould, 66 DARE, 67 Dative, constructions of, d5 absolute, 94 Declension, 8 Defective, 8 verb, 56 Definition, 8 Demonstrative pronouns 46 Derivation, 3, 23 Derivative, 3 Diminutive, 8 suffixes, 137 Diphthong, 3, 12 Disposal, disposition (usage of), 120 Distinction, difference (usage of), 120 Distinguish, discriminate (usage of) 120 Distributed term, 84 Distributive, 3 pronouns, 47 Do, 66, 116 EACH, 47, 50, IM, 121 every, 121 Each other, 49 one another, 121 Eft80ons,72 Either, 47, 88, 100, 120 Either, whether (usage of), 120 Elder, older, 4 1, 121 EHsion, 107 Emp8i8,107 Emphasis, 3, 16 Epenthesis, 107 Etymology, 8, 10, 17 INDEX. 831 ET«n, 126 Ever, never (luage of), 121 Eynry, 89, 47, 100, 118, 121, 128 Except, a preposition and a oonjonction, 80 Exposure, expodtion (usage of), 121 FACTITIVE verb (see Vkbb) accusative, 97 Fare thee well, 180 Farther and Further, 48, 44, 121 Few, a few, 44, 117, 127 Fewer, less (usage of), 121 Figure of speech, 8, 106 First, 48 First two, and two first, 118 For, a preposition and a co ^junction, 80 n ENDER, definition of, 8, 29 U kinds of, 29 bow shown, 80 Anglo-Saxon feminines, 30 Noman French do., 30 masculine fbrmed from feminine, 81 feminine without masculine, 81 shown by different words, 32 how due to thought, 82 Genitive, 2, 83, 39 adverbs derived from, 72 sjmtax of, 94 adjectives governing, 97 (note) Gerund, 8, 103 in compounds, 22 Gerundial infinitive, 102 Get, 116 Gifted, talented (usage oO> 128 Good, 48 Government, 4, 92 Grammar, 4, 9 Grammatical purity. 111 Gutturals, 18 HAVE, compound tenses formed with, 68 He, 47 Highest, uppermost (usage of), 121 Himself, 47, 95 His, a false sign of genitive, 34 Hyperbole, 108 Hypothetical proposition, 88 TDIOM, 4 X Impersonal verb, 4^ 64 ImproprielT, 4, 111 Inflexion, 4 In respect to, in respect of, 181 Intention, 4 Inteijeotion, 18, 81 Irregular verbs, 4, 64, 66, 67 It am 1, 128 It is I, your master, who command(aX 129 It is me, 129 LABIALS, 18 Last, 48 Later, 43, 44 Latter, 43, 44 Learn, 128 Less, 43 Less and fewer (usage of), 121 Letters, table of, 4, 10, 12 observations on the, 18 Lie, lay (usage oH, 121 Like, syntax of, 122 Like, as (usage of), 122 Liquids, 10 List, 67 Little, 48 a little, 127 - MADE, 67 Make, 67 Man. termination, and plural of, 29 Many, 48, 44 a many, many a, 127 May, 66 Meiosis, 108 Meseems, methinks, melists, 54, 95 Metaphor, 107 Metathesis, 106 Metonymy, 108 Metre, 4 Monosvllables, 10, 15 Mood, 4, 58 indicative, 58 imperative, 58, 104 subjunctive, 58, 61, 69, 102, 103 infinitive, 58, 102, 116 gerundial do., 102 Most, 42, 43 Much, 43, 44 Multiplicative numerals, 39 Must, 66 Mutes, 10, 13 332 INDEX. Mutual, common (usage of), 122 Owe, 67 lly, mine, 60, 100 Own, 47, 48 VATION, people (usaKe oO, 122 i^ Nay, no, difroronce between, 106 Near, 48 DARAOOGE, 107 •T Para^'raph, 6 Paraphrase, 6 Nearly, almoHt (usape of), 121 Parsing, 89 Negative propouition, 84 table of, 91 Negatives, 105, 181 Participle, 561 Nigh, 4;J, 97 (note) syntax of, 103, 126 No, 100 Porticle, 6 ' Nominative, 2, 88, 116 Parts of speech, 17, 18 syntax of, 1)3, 96 absolute, 94 Passive voice, 7, 58 conjugation of, 68 Nor, or, after a negative, 181 Person, 6 Not, position of, 126 Personal pronouns, 4G, 67 Noun, definition of, 4, 19 Personification, 107 classification of, 19 Pleonasm, 107 simple and compound, 20 Plural of nouns, 23, 24 proper, 4, 20 single forms, 24 propriate, 4, 21 double forms, 26 common, 4, 20 collective, syntax of, 98, 94 collective, 4, 20 strong, 24, 25 of multitude, 4, 20 different meanings in, 26 abstract, 4, 20 Possessive case, 38 concrete, 4 syntax of, 94, 97 (note) Predicate, complement of, 87 solely plural, 26' solely singular, 26 extension of, 87 diminutive, 21 Preposition, 5, 75, 76, 81 augmentative, 21 syntax of, 105 patronymic, 21 Primitive, primary (usage of), 122 primitive, 20 Pronoun, definition of, 5 derivative, 20 classification of, 45, 46, 120 Number, 5, 23 syntax of, 100, 114 dual, 26 Proposal, proposition (usage of), 122 Numerals, 34 Proposition, according to logic, 6, 82 cardinal, 39 substance of, 83 ordinal, 89 quality of, 83 multiplicative, 39 quantity of, 84 distribution of, 84 categorical, 83 ABJECT, direct, 35 yf indirect, 86 hypothetical, 83, 101 Property, 126 Obsolete, 5 Prothesis, 107 * Obvious, apparent (usage of), 123 Purpose, propose (usage of), 122 Of, genitive with, 34 expressed by gerund, 62 Older, elder, 43, 121 One, 62 Only, 126 AUANTITY, 6, 16 v^ Quantity (usage of), 187 Or, nor, after a negative, 131 Orthoepy, 6 Quoth, 67 Orthography, 6 Other, 62 than, otherwise than, 126 pATHER, 43. 126 li Keduudttut,6 Overflown, overflowed, 122 INDEX. 388 Uedundant TerbR, lint of, 184 Ueduplication (did, hi^t), 67, 147 Hefleclive verbs, 56 Kulntive pronoun, deflnitioD of, 6, 47, 48 Hyntax of, 100, 116 Rhyme, 6 Rhythm, 6 Root, 6 SAME, 49 Save, 76 Scarcely, scarce (usage of), 109 Scarcely, hardly (usage of), llfS Seamstress, songHtress, 81 Seldom, 72 Self (anomalies of), 47, 56 Sentence, 6 simple, 6, 86 complex, 6, 86, 87 compound, 6, 86, 87 co-ordinate, 88 subordinate, 87 analytical scheme of, 86 adjective, 87, 88 noun, 87, 88 adverb, 87, 88 hypothetical, 101 ShaU and will, 66, 116 Shall, 66 Should, 66 Simile, 107 Singular (number), 23, 93 Slut, 81 So, as ^sage of), 123 So, as, / 9 Solecism, 6, 111 Soon, 126 Spelling, rules o(^ 80 anomalies of, 14 Strong, 6 plurals, 24 verbs, 64, 65 Ust of, do., 132, 133, 134 Subject, 82, 88, 87 Subjunctive mood, 69, 61, 68 syntax of, 102 Such, 49, 50, 99 Superlative acyectives, 6, 41 irregular, 48 double, 48 Syllables, 6, 10 dividing, 15 Syncope, 106 Synecdoche, 108 Syntax, 6 Syntax, general rules, 92 special rules, 92 rPALENTED, gifted (usage oO. 121 1 Teach, 96 Tenses, 59 succession of, 108 Term, 7, 82 Than, 98, 99, 106 That, 46, 48, 80, 102, 105, 106 That, which, 124 The, 98, 118 The (more), 98, 99, 118 Then, 80 Theory, 7 Thine, 46, 100 This, 46, 100 Though, although (usage of), 123 Thy and thine, 130 To-morrow (usage of), 127 Total, entire, &c. (usage of), 128 VERB,7, 58, 101, 116 classification of, 63 substantive, 7, 64 impersonal, 7, 54 nmpersonal, 7, 64 tranflitive, 7, 54 intransitive, 7, 54 auxiliary, 7, 64, 6-1 regular or weak (classes of), 7, bb irregular or strong (classes of}, 7, 66 list of, 132 redundant, 7, 56 list of, 136 defective, 7, 56, 66, 67 reflective, 7, 66 causative, 7, 66 intensive, 7, 66 diminutive, 7, 67 inceptive, 7, 57 frequentative, 7, 57 factitive, 7, 97 personal, 7, 64 Vixen, 31 Voice, active, 7, 60 passive, 58, 63 WAGES, 29 Weak, 7 Welkin, 29 West, 61 What,48. 100. 115 Wliidi. 4«, lUO, 116 834 Which, that (usage of), 128 While, though (usage of), 128 Whilom, 72 Who, 78, 100, 116 Whole (usage oO 128 Will, 66, 116 Wilne, 67 Wite,67 Word, 7, 10 INDEX. , Words, table of, 18 Worse, 48 Worth, adjective (syntax), VI Worth, verb, 67 YE and you, B2, 116 Yea and nay, lOt Yes (uid no, 106 GENEEAL INDEX. to* 2. ETYMOLOGICAL [llie numerals reftr to paiii^B. (v. p.) means verbal prefix, and (y. 8.^ verba! e^fi* - before a small letter or syllaule, a tuffix. - after a letter or syllaue, t^pr^fixT] A (y.p.).148 A A (gerund, pref.), 148 -a, 169, 170 A, an, 88,48 Ab-, 174 Abbey, 164, 192 Abbot, 164, 197 Aber-, 169 Abet, 156 Abide, 166 -able, 189 Aboard, 151 Abode, 156 Abominable, 210 About, 150 Above, 150 Abreast, 157 Absurd, 210 Academy, 210 Accoutrements, 187 Acolj-te, 192 Acorn, 156, 210 Acqua, 174 Acre, 156 . -acy, 188 Address, 210 -ade, 188 Admiral, 164, 187 Adrift, 161 Adullamite, 203 Adultery, 210 After, 150 Against, 150 Agar. 210 Agate, 176 -age, 188 A^rhast, 151, 167 Aisle, 198 -al, 139 Alabaster, '175 Alb, 193 Albemarle Sound, 171 Albion, 171 Alcala, 174 Alchemy, 164 Alcohol, 164 Alcove, 164 Ale, 164 Alembic, 164 Alexandrine, 178 Algebra, 164, 178, 210 Alkali, 164 Alleghany, 171 Alligator, 163, 210 AUow,210 Almanac, 164, 210 Alms, 28 Aloft, 151 Alone, 142, 157 Already, 161 Alt-, 174 Am, 146 Amber, 164 Ambergris, 164 Ambulance, 190 Ambuscade, 191 Amen, 164 America, 171 American words, 164 Ammonia, 165, 175 Among, 150, 159 Amuck, 166 Amucker, 205 An, 149 -an, 140 Anckor, 1S8 And (conj.), 149 Anger, 182 Anglo-Saxon words (classes of). 161 Anon, 152 Answer, 210 -ant, 189 Anthem, 210 Any, 189 Ap-, 137 Apostle, 194 April, 181 -ar, male agent, 186 Arabic (words), 164 Archbishop, 192 Ard-, Aird-, 168, 174 -ard, -art, 137 -argh, 169 Argosy, 210 Ark, 169 Arm, 183 Armada, 168 Armadillo, 168 Arms, 189 Arrack, 164 Arras, 175 \ 836 INDEX. Aiwnal, 188 Art, 146, 166 Artesian, 176 Article, 37 Artillery, 189 -ary, 138 is, 149 Ascension, 172 Ash, 167 Ask, 96 Askant, 151 Askew, 151 Assassin, 206 Assault, 210 Astound, 161 Asunder, 161 At, 150 Athwart, 160, 161 Atone, 22, 142 Attorney, 210 Auburn, 157, 182 Auchter-, 174 Aught, 52, 148 Avoirdupois, 185 Aware, 160 Away, 151 Awhile, 151 Awkward, 161, 210 Awry, 151 -ay, 169 Ayah, 164 Azimuth, 164 Azores, 172 Azure, 164 BAAL 174 Bab-, 165, 174 Babbler, 175 Babelmandeb, 172 Bachelor, 22, 211 Bacon, 154 Bad, 140 -bad, 174 Bag-o-nails, 28 Bahar, 174 Bahia, 174 Bailey, 163 •BaiM, 163, 188 Bairn, 154, 166 Bait, 157 Balance, 211 Balcony, 164 Balderdash, 162, 205 BaUad, 211 Baltimore, 172 Baluster, 211 Balustrade, 163 Bamboo, 166 Bund, 156 Banditti, 1G3 Bandy, 156 Bane, 156 Banian, 164 JJank, 156 Bank:. ipt, 211 Banns, 211 Banquet, 211 Bantam, 165 Banter, 156 Barbarous, 165 Barbican, 164, 205 Bark, 156 Barleysugar, 205 Baron, 156, 186 Baronet, 186 Barren, 154 Barricade, 163 Barrister, 211 Borrow, 156 Bashaw, 164 Basket, 162 Bat, 166 Batch, 166 Batta, 164 Battery, 166 Battle, 156 Baudekin, 175 Baudrick, 189 Bayonet, 175, 189 Bazaar, 164 Be, 146 be- (v. p.), 143 Bead, 156 Beadle, 156, 187 Beak, 159 Bean, 163 Bear, 156 Beat, 156 Because, 149 -beck, 167, 169, 174 Bedlam, 206 Beef-eater, 205 Been, 146 Beer, 174 Behemoth, 164 Behind, 150 Behold, 15B Belfry, 193, 206 Believe, 156 Bell, 156 Belles (-lettres), 163 Bellow, 15(5 Below, 150 Ben- (Pen), 168, 174 Bend, 156 Beneath, 160 Bent, 166 Bereave, 169 -berg, 174 Bermuda, 172 Bemouse, 175 Berrj', 166 Berth, 156 -bery, 167 Best, 140, 156 Bestow, 169 Betel, 164 Better, 140, 164 Beware, 159 Bey, 163 Beyond, 150 Bezant, 175, 186 Bid, 156 Bight, 174 Bigot, 205 BUboes, 175 BiUet-doux, 163 Billiard, 211 Bine, 156 Bird, 167 Birth, 164, 156 Biscuit, 22 Bishop, 186 Bissextile, 181 Bit, 157 Bivouac, 191 Black, 167, 182 Blackguard, 205 Blade, 157 Blair-, 168 Blanket, 178 Blast, 157 Blaze, 157 -ble,140 Bleach, 157 Bleak, 157 Blind, 153 Block, 163 Blood, 183 Bloom, 157 Blossom, 167 Blot, 159 Blow, 157 Blue, 182 jdlunderbuss, 205 Blush, 157' Bluster, 157 Boat, 166 Bode, 156 Body, 156 Body, 188 Bogie, 205 Bog-Latin, 20i> Bogus, 205 Bohea, 166 -bol, 169 -boll, 167 Bond, 156 Bone, 183 Bon-mot, 163 Bonnet, 163, 175 Bocby, 205 Boom, 168 Boor, 167, 168 Boot (to), 157 Bootless, 157 Borough, 166, 157 Bosh, 205 Both, 141, 149 Bottom, 168 Bough, 156 Boulevard, 191 Bound, 156 Bouquet, 168 -bourn, 174 Bow, 156 Bow (sprit), 156, 163 Bower, 157 Bower (anchor), 156 Brae, 168, 174 Brag, 205 Bran, 162 Brand, 153, 157 Brandy, 157, 191 Bravado, 163 Bravo, 163 Brawn, 154, 178 Breach, 157 Break, 157 Breas^ 183 Breath, 164, 167, 183 -breck, 169 Breeches, 157 Brew, 167 Brewer, 167 -brick, 169 Bridegroom, 31 -bridge, 174 Brigand, 206 Brisbane, 172 Britain, 172 Broad, 157 Bronze, 157 Brose, 157 Broth, 154, 167 Brown, 157 -brucke, 174 INDEX. Bmnn, 174 Brunt, 157 Bruy malt, 157 Buccaneer, 206 Buffoon, 206 Bugbear, 162 Buggy, 164 Bull, 166 -^ Bullion, 211 Bulwark, 191 Bunch, 15G Bundle, 156 , Bungalow, 164 Bunkum, 206 Burden, 156 Burgess, 166 Burgh, 166 Burglar, 166, 211 Burlesque, 178, 206 Bum, 167 Burnish, 167 Burrow, 156 B>'ry, 156, 167 -bury, 174 Bushel, 186 Bust, 168 But (adv.), 152 But (conj.), 149 But (prep.) , i60 Button, 162 Buxom, 156 -by, 169 flABAL, 164, 19G V Cabbage, 211 Cabin, 162 Cabinet, 196 Cabo-, 174 Cacique, 166 Caddy, 164 Cadet, 188 Cadi, 164 Caer-, 168, 174 Cairn, 168, 174 Caister, 166 Caitiff, 211 Cajole, 211 Calf (of leg), 183 Calibre, 176, 191 Calico, 164 Caliph, 164 Calumet, 166 Cambist, 163 Cambric, 176 Cambus, 174 Camp, 191 Z 3S7 Camphor, 164 Can, 146, 167 Canada, 172 Candidate, 211 Candy, 176 Cannibal, 206 Cannon, 189 Canny, 167 Canon, 186 Canopy, 211 . Canter, 176, 206 Canto, 163 Caoutchouc, 164 Captain, 188 Carat, 164, 211 Caravan, 164 Caravanserai, 164 Carbine, 163, 189 Carbonado, 163 Cardinal, 211 Cargo, 163 Caricature, 163 Cark, 167 Carnival, 163, 211 Carolina, 172 Carouse, 211 Carp, 176 Cai^t, 175 Carraway, 175 Carrick, 168 Carronade, 189 Cash, 211 Castra, 166, 174 Cathedral, 192 Cattle, 212 Cavalier, 195 Cavalry, 26, 189 -ce, 128 Celtic words, 162 Cereal, 178 -cester, 166 Chagrin, 211 Chair, 212 Chalice, 193 Challenge, 191 Chalybeate, 175 Chancel, 193, 212 Chancellor, 187 Chapel, 192 Chapman, 157 Chapter, 192 Chariatan, 163, I7h Charies's Wain, 20t Charleston, 172 Charm, 212 Chartist, 196 Chasuble, 193 B38 Chattel, 212 Cbauvinism, 178 Cheap, 157, 174 Cheapside, 167 Cheat, 212 Check (mate), 164 Cheek, 183 Cheek by jowl, 206 Cheer, 212 Chepstow, 157 Cherry, 176 Cherub, 164 Chess, 164 Chest, 188 -Chester, 166 Chestnut, 175 Ckevaux de fHse, 189 Chibouk, 1G4 Chickens, 28 Children, 28 Chimney, 212 -Chin-, 168 Chin, 188 Chinese words, 162 Chintz, 165 Chipping-, 157 Chirp, 157 Chocolate, 163 Choir, 193 Chouse, 206 Christmas, 193 Church, 192 Churchwarden, 1*J3 Churl, 157 Cigar, 168 Cipher, 141, 164 -cister, 166 Citv, 212 Ciudad, 174 Civet, 164 -ck (v. 8.)» 144 C1-, 168 Clammy, 157 Clarke, 165 Clay, 157 Claymore, 189 -cle, 187 Cleave, 157 Cleave (to), 167 Cleft, 157 Clerk, 187 a.ever, 157, 212 CUff. 157 . -cUff, 174 Clog, 157 Cloister, 192 Cloud, 159 INDBX. Oont, 162 Clove, 157 Qub, 212 Clumsy, 212 Coach, 176 Coax, 206 Cockatoo, 165 ■ Cockboat, 162 Cocoa, 176 Coffee, 164, 175 -001,174 -coin, 16S Colonel, 188 Colonia, 166 Comb-, 168 Comedy, 212 Commander, 188 Commissariat, 171 Commodore, 188 Comp-, 168 Companion, 212 Comrade, 188 Con, 167 Condor, 165 Con%ou, 165 Connecticut, 172 Constable, 187 Control, 212 Convent, 192 CooUe, 164 Cope, 193 Copoe, 212 Copper, 176 Cordwain, 175 Corporal, 188 Corps, 188 Costermonger, 212 -cota, 174 Cotter, 164 Couch, 212 Could, 66, 146 Count, 186 Counterpane, 212 Country dance, 206 Court, 212 Cousin, 212 Covenanter, 197 Coverlet, 212 Coward, 158 Cowl, 198 Coxswain, 206 Crag, 168 Craig, 168 Cravat, 175 Craven, 154 Crayfish, 22 Creak, 157 Creek, 167 Creese, 166 Creole, 168 Crick, 168 Cricket, 157 Crimson, 164, Ifii Crock ,^ry, 162 -croft, 167 Crook, 167 Crutch, 167 Cud, 158 Cuirass, 189 Cul-, 168 cule-, 187 Cunning, 66, 157 Cupboard, 212 Cupola, 168 Curate, 187 Curfew, 22, 212 Currantf", 176 Curry, 165 Cutlass, 189 -cy, 128 Cyder, 166 Czar, 178 T\ (v. 8.), 144 "1/ Dagger, 190 DahUa, 178 Dainty, 162, 212 Daisy, 22, 167, 212 -dal, 169 -dale, 169 Damage, 206 Damask, 176 Dampier, 172 Damson, 176 Dan-, 169 Dandelion, 206 Dane-, 169 Danes, 178 Danger, 206 Danish words, 163 Dam, 162 Dastard, 158 Dauphin, 187 Davis Strait, 172 Dawn, 164, 167 Day, 167, 181 Deacon, 187 Deal, 167 Dean, 186 Dearth, 164 Debauch, 178 December, 18 i Deem, 168 INDEX. 339 Deer, 157 Dejeuner, 168 Deift^ware, 176 DeUght, 207 Delirious, 207 Demijohn, 176 Demur, 207 -den, 168 Denizen, 207 Depdt, 163 Depth, 164 -der, 143 Derby, 167 Dervise, 164 Desperaido, 163 Detroit, 172 Deuce, 206 Dew, 168 Diaper, 176 Did, 67, 147 Diet, 307 Dilett 'te,163 Dimity, 164, 17 Ding-, "?0 Diocese, i^5 Dirge, 207 Dirk, 190 Disaster, 207 Dismay, 169 Dittanv, 176 Ditto, 163 Diva-, 174 Divan, 164 Divers, 143 Djebel, 174 • Do, 67, 147 Dodge, 206 Doff, 207 Dog-cheap, 206 Dole, 167 Dollar, 185 Dominic 0, 172 Don, 163, 207 -done, 188 Donjon, 191 Doom, 168 Doomsday, 168 Dough, 168 Down, 160 Doyley, 178 Dozen, 207 Drag, 167 Draggle, 167 Dragoman, 164 Dragoon, 189 Dram, 158 Drake, 80 Dram, 186 Draught. 163, 158 Draw, 157 Dray, 157 Dredge, 168 Drench, 158 Dribble, 158 Driblet, 158 Drink, 158 Drip, 168 Drivel, 158 Drone, 207 Droop, 158 Drop, 158, 170 Dropsy, 207 Drought, 154, 168 Drown, 168 Drug, 207 Drugget, 176 Drunkard, 168 Dry, 168 Ducat, 178, 185 Dudgeon, 206 Duenna, 163 Duke, 186 Dun, 168, 174 Dunce, 178 Durham. 167 Dutch words, 163 JCj -ea,167 Each, 60, Uii , Ear, 183 Earl, 186 Early, 166 Earth, 164 East, 182 Easter, 194 Eaves, 213 Eccles, 174 Eclat, 163 -ed, 139, 144 -«e, 188 Egg, 156 Egg-on, 213 Egrip, 213 Eight, 141 Either, 149, 193 Eke, 149 -el (v. s.), 144, 146 Elbow, 166, 188 Elder, 141 Eldest, 141 Eleven, 141 . Elixir, 164 s2 Elizabeth Ck>antT, 172 Elb, 186 Rlope, 218 Else, 149 Embargo, 168 Ember Weeks, 194 Embitter, 167 Emerald, 164 Emir, 164 Kmperor, 186 Empress, 186 -En-, 174 -en, 137, 139, 144 -en- (v. p. 8.), 143 Engine, 213 England, 172 Ennia-, 169,174 Ennui^ 163 Enough, 148, 162 Ensign, 188 Envelope, 168 Environs, 163 Ephod, 164 Epiphany, 194 -er, 140, 144, 146 -er,-ar,-or, 136, 187, 140 Ere, 160 -erly, 139 -ermat, 174 Ermine, 176 -€m, 139 Erst, 160 -€s, 136, 187 Escalade,'191 -esce, 146 Esquire, 187 -ess, 186 -est, 140 -et, 187 Ethics, 27 Even, 149 Ever, 152 Every, 141 Except, 149 Exchequer, Court of, 196 -ey, 167, 169 Eye, 188 Eyry, 26, 156, 218 EyseU, 213 FAGOT, 218 Fain, 162, 218 Fair, 218 Faith, 154 Fakir, 164 Falchion, 190 340 INDEX. Fallow, 218 Fangs. 168 Fare, 168, 213 Farewell, 168 Faroe Isles, 172 FaiTago, 163 Farther, 44, 146 Farthing, 141, 185 Fascines, 190 Fast, 194 Fathom, 186 Faubourg, 213 Fear, 182 Feast, 194 February, 181 Fee, 168 Feed, 168 Feld, 174 -feld, 167 -fell, 169 Fellow, 206 Felon, 206 Fenian, 198 Ferns, 28 -ferous, 139 Ferry, 168, 214 Fetlock, 168 Fetter, 168 Feudal, 168 Fiacre, 178, 207 Fib, 207 Field, 153 Fiend, 168, 207 Fifth, 141 Fifth Monarchy Man, 198 Filibeg, 214 Filigram, 214 Filth, 154 filthy, 168 Finger, 158, 183 Firkin, 186 Firman, 164 First, 140 -firth, 167, 169 Fiscal, 214 Fisker-, 169 Five, 141 -fix, 139 Flank, 191 Flannel, 162 Flash, 176, 207 Flee, 168 Fleet, 168, 167 -Fleet-, 174 Flesh, 183 FUghty, 168 Flit, 158 Flitch, 207 Flood, 153 Florin, 185 Flotilla, 163 Flurry, 158 Fluster, 158 Flutter, 168 Fly, 158 Fodder, 158, 191 -fold, 139 Folio, 163 Folk(8), 28 Fons, 166 Font, 174, 193 Food, 158 Foolscap, 214 Foot, 158, 183 Footpad, 168 For- (v. p.), 143 For, 149, 150 Forage, 191 Forbid, 146 -force, 169 -ford, 167, 169 Fore- (v. p.), 143 Fore, 150 Former, 140 Formosa, 172 Forsooth, 162 Fort, 191 For thi, 143 Forthwith, 152 Fort Orange, 172 Forum, 174 Fossa, 166 Foster, 158 Foul, 158 Four, 141 Fourth, 141 Fowl, 158 Fowler, 158 FowUng, 158 Franchise, 207 Fredericsburg, 172 French words, 163 Fret, 214 Friar, 192, 214 Friday, 182 Friendship, 159 Frieze, 162 -frith, 167, 169 From, 150 Fudge, 162 -ful, 139 Fulsome, 158 Funnel, 162 Furbish, 214 Furlong, 185 Furnish, 214 Further, 44, 146 Fustian, 176 -fy (v. 8.), 145 GAB, 207 Gabion, 189 Gadfly, 214 Gaffer, 207 Gala, 163 Gallon, 186 Galloshes, 207 Galloway, 176 Galvanism, 178 Gamboge, 166, 176 Gambol, 214 Gammer, 207 Gammon, 207 Gander, 31 Ganger, 174 -gar, 174 Garden, 168 Garment, 214 -garth, 170 Gas, 168 -gate, 170 Gaunt, 153, 100 Gauntlet, 176 Gawby, 207 Gawky, 207 Gazelle, 164 Gazette, 163, 214 Gehenna, 164 Geneva, 173 Geographical equiva lents, 174 Geographical terms : Roman, 166 Saxon, 167 Celtic, 168 Scandinavian, l(i9 Norman, 171 German, 29 Gewgaw, 201 -gherrv, 174 Ghibbeline, 198 Ghost(ly), 168 Gibberish, 178, 207 Gibraltar, 173 -gill, 170 Gin, 191 Ginger, i76 Giraffe, .64 Girdle, 158 INDEX. 341 Girl, 81, 207 Girondist, 199 Girth, 154, 158 Glen, 168, 174 Gnat, 185 Gobelin, 178 Godown, 165 Gondola, 163 Gong, 165 Good, 140, 158 Good Hope, 173 Goose, 158 Gooseberry, 168, 214 Gooseberry Fool, 207 -gorod, 174 Gospel, 158 Gossip, 158, 214 Gown, 162, 193 Graft, 158 Grain, 185 Grandee, 163 Grape, 158 Grapnel, 158 Grapple, 158 Grasp, 158 Grave, 168 Greek words, 161 Green, 182 Greengage, 178 Grenade, 163, 189 Grenadier, 189 Grey, 182 Griddle, 162 Grief, 182 Grimace, 214 Gripe, 168 Grocer, 214 Grog, 178 Groove, 158 Grope, 158 Gross, 214 Grotto, 163 Grouse, 214 Grove, 168 Grovel, 158 Growl, 207 Growth, 164 Grub, 168 / Gruel, 162 Gruff, 207 i Grand-, 174 ^ Guad-,174 -guard, 170 Guardian, 160 Guelph, 198 Gueidon, 214 Guilder, 185 Guillotine, 179 Guinea, 176, 185 Guitar, 214 Gun, 189 Gutta percha, 165 HABERDASHER, 207 Haft, 66, 188 Hag, 170 Haggard, 214 Hai, 174 Halberd, 190 Hale, 158, 159 Half, 141 Hallelujah, 164 Hallow, 169 Halt, 169 ' Halter, 159 -ham, 167 Hamlet, 159 Hammercloth, 207 Hammock, 165, 214 Hand, 183 Hang, 159 -hanger, 167 Hap, 158 Happy, lo8 Harangue, 214 Harbinger, 214 Harbour, 214 Harem, 164 Hariequin, 163, 176 Harm, 164 Harpoon, 214 HaiTidan, 207 Harvest, 214 Hat, 169 Hate, 182 Hauberk, 190 -haugh-, 170 -haut, 174 Have, 158 Haven, 159 Hawk, 214 Hayti, 173 Hazard, 164 He, 142 -head, 138 Head, 153, 169, 183 Heal, 168 Health, 164 Heart, 183 Heathen, 195, 214 Heaven, 154, 169 Hebrew words, 164 Hectoring, 179 Heifer, 214 Height, 154 Heirloom, 214 Heligoland, 173 HeU, 159 Helmet, 190 Helter-skelter, 208 Hence, 143 Henchman, 179 Her, 142 Herald, 214 Herculean, 179 Here, 148 Heretic, 194 Hermetically (sealed), 179 Hermit, 192, 216 Herring, 214 Hight, 147 Hilt, 163 Himalaya, 173 Hindoo words, 164 Hinge, 159 His, 142 -hithe, 167, 174 Hither, 143 -hlaw, 167 -ho, 174 Hoax, 207 -hoe, 170 Hold, 169 Hole, 159 -holm, 174 -holt, 167 Holy, 159 Home, 159 -hood, 138 Hookah, 164 Hope, 182 -horn, 174 Hosunna, 164 Host, 216 Housing. 162 How, 143 Howdah, 164 Huguenot, 199 Humble-bee, 208 Humble-pie, 208 Humbug, 176, 208 Hundred, 141 Hurdle, 216 Hurricane, 165 Hurry, 215 -hurst, 167 Husband, 156, 215 Hussar, 189 'Hustings, 203 842 INDEX. Hat, 159 -hyrae, 167 IlysoD, 166 T, 142 i -ible, 139 -id, 140 Idle, 152 If, 104, 109 111, 152 Imbecile, 216 Immediately, 152 Impair, 215 Improvisatore, 163 In, 150 Inch, 185 Inch-, 169 Indigo, 169 Individual, 216 -ine, 136 Infantry, 169 Influenza, 163 -ing, 137, 138 Ingot, 215 Instantly, 152 Intrigue, 215 Inveigle, 215 Inver-, 169 Invoice, 215 -ion, 137, 139 -is, 's, 136 -ish, 139 Isinglass, 209 -isk, 138 It, 142 Italian words, 163 -ite (v. 8.)» 145 Its, 52, 142 -ive, 140 Ivory, 216 -ize (v. s.)» 146 TACKAL, 164 Jacket, 179 Jacobin, 179 Jacobite, 179, 199 Jaded, 215 Jalap, 176 Jane, 185 „ , ,i Janissar}', 164 . /r.. January, 181 y.-i < Jar, 164 Jargon, 208 Jasmin, 164 J % i j Jaw, 183 Jealousv, 182, 208 Jennet, 163, 176 Jenneting, 215 Jeopardy, 208 Jerked beof, 208 Jersey, 173 Jerusalem artichoke, 208 Jet, 176 Jewry, 26 Jig, 215 Jigumbob, 208 Jobbernowl, 208 Joint, 184 JoUvboat, 208 Jorcien, 215 Jovial, 179 Jowle, 215 Joy, 182 Juan Fernandez, 173 Jubilee, 164 Juice, 215 Julep, 216 July, 181 June, 181 Jungle, IGi Junk, 1(54 Junket, 208 .jT- (v. s.), 144 14- Kangaroo, 165 -keU, 170 Ken-, 168 Kennel, 215 Kerchief, 23, 215 Kib-, 174 Kickshaws, 23, 208 Kidnap, 215 Kilderkin, 186 Kill, 157 Kiln, 162 Kin-, 168, 174 -kin, 139 Kine, 28 King, 167, 1«0 EUosk, 164 -kirk, 170, 174 -kle, 137 -klobing, 174 Knave, 154, 2lii Knee, 184 Knife, 215 Knight, 187 Knock, 162 Knuckle, IS** -kopf, 174 T AC, 164 Li Lackey, 216 Lad, 159, 216 Ladder, 169 Lady, 31, 186 Lago, 174 Lake, 164, 182 Lampoon, 216 Lancaster Sotmd, 173 Landscape, 159 Larum, 216 Lass, 169, 216 Last, 140, 159 Latakia, 176 Late, 140, 159 Lath, 162 Latin words, 161, 163 Latter, 159 Lava, 163 Law, 159 Law — lawk ! 152 -law, 167, 174 Lay, 169 Lazaretto, 179 -le (v. 8.), 144 Lea, 159 Lead, 159 Leader, 169 League, 185, 216 Leather, 216 Leaven, 154 Lecherous, 216 Ledge, 159 Ledger, 169, 191 Lees, 216 Leman, 216 Lemon, 164 Length, 154 Lent, 194 -less, 139 Lest, 149 Let, 159 -let, 137 Let (sore), 239 Lettuce, 216 Levellers, 200 Leviathan, 164 Lewd, 216 Liberia, 173 Lie, 159 Lief, 152 Lieutenant, 188 Light, 154 Like, 97 Lilac, 169 Lime, 164 in-, 168 -Ung, 137 Lip, 184 Liquorice, 216 List, 67 Litany, 194 Little, 140 Liturjo'^, 194 Lizard) 216 Llan-, 168, 174 Lo, 162 Lowistone, 159, 176 Lobby, 216 Lobster, 216 Loch, 174 Lollards, 200 Loot, 164 Lord, 81, 186 Lot, 159 Loud, 153 Lough, 174 Louisiana, 173 Love, 182 Low, 159 -low, 174 Lower, 159 Lumber, 176, 208 Luncheon, 216 Lungs, 184 Lute, 164 -ly, 139 M(v. 8.), 144 Mao-, 137 Mace, 216 Macintosh, 179 Mackerel, 216 Madrigal, 216 Maeander, 165 i?»«Sar:ine, 164 Maggot, 216 Magnet, 176 Main, 157 Maize, 165 Majolica, 177 Major, 188 Malady, 216 Malaga, 173 Malay words, 164 Malice, 182 Malkin, 216 • Malmsey, 177 Malt, 152 Malta, 173 Mameluke, 164 Man, 31 Man (Isle of), 173 INDEX. Mango, 165 Manifesto, 163 Manna, 164 Mansarde, 179 Many, 44, 127, 140 Marauder, 208 March, 181, 191 Mark, 185 Marquis, 186 Marsala, 173 Marshal, 187 Martial, 179 Martinet, 179 Maryland, 173 Mass, 194 Massachusetts, 173 Massacre, 216 Mastiff, 216 Math, 155 Mattock, 162 . Mattress, 164 Maudlin, 208 Maunday Thursday, 194 Mausoleum, 165 May, 146, 181 Maydukes, 177 Meal, 216 Measles, 216 Meat, 216 Medina, 174 -meer, 174 Meeting, 217 Megrim, 217 Melists, 147 -men, 138 Menial, 217 -ment, 138 Mercurial, 179 -mere, 167, 174 Merely, 152 -mersh, 167 Meseems, 147 Mess, 217 Methinks, 147 Michaelmas, 198 Middle, 157 Midst, 150 MUe, 185 Milliner, 177 Minaret, 164, 217 Mince, 217 Mind, 184 Mine, 142 Miniature, 217 Minion, 217 -minster, 174 Mi&- (v. p.), 144 348 Mississippi, 178 Missouri, 178 Mob, 217 Mocassin, 165 Muhair, 164 Moidore, 185 Mole, 217 Monday, 181 -monde, 174 Mongrel, 159 • Monk, 192 Monkey, 217 Monsoon, 164 -mont, 174 Month, 155, 181 -mony, 188 Mop, 162 Morass, 217 More, 140 Morganatic, 217 Morion, 190 Morose, 217 Mortar, 190 Mortise, 217 -mos, 167 Moslem, 164 Mosque, 164, 217 Mosquito, 163 Most, 140 Moth, 135 Motto, 163 Mould, 153 Mountain (party), 200 Mountebank, 208 Mouth, 155, 184 Much, 140 Mufti, 164 Muggletonians, 200 Muggy, 162, 217 Mulatto, 163 Mullagatawny, 164 Mummy, 164, 217 Munch, 217 Murder, 155 Musk, 164 Musket, 190 Muslin, 164, 177 Mustache, 217 Mustard, 217 Muster, 217 -myln, 167 11 Nabob. 167, 187 Nadir, 164 Nail, 184 , I 344 INDEX. Nankeen, 164 Nap, 217 Naphtha, 164 Nard, 164 Naught, 62, 148 Nave, 193 Nav, 162 -nd (v. 8.), 144 Neat, 217 Neck, 184 Negro, 168 Negus, 179 Neighbour, 167, 217 Neither, 149 Nephew, 81, 217 -nes8, 138, 167, 174 Nettle, 218 Never, 218 News, 28 New York, 178 Next, 140 -ng (v. 8.), 144 Niagara, 173 Niece, 31,217 Niggard, 218 Nightingale, 218 Nightmare, 208 Nine, 141 Nitre, 177 -nk (v. 8.), 144 No, 152 Noble, 186 Nonconformist, 200 Nonjuror, 201 Noon, 218 Norman words, 161 North, 182 Nose, 184 Nostril, 218 Now, 162 Nowadays, 162 Nuisance, 218 Nun, 192 -, 187 -0,170 Oak, 152 Oar, 218 -ock, 137 October, 181 Odd, 162 Of, 160 -ofer, 167 Off, 160 Offal, 218 Oft»162 Often, 162 Ogre, 208, 218 Old Nick, 209 Old Scratch, 209 Olio, 163 -cm, 186 Omelet, 218 On, 150 Once, 142, 152 One, 39, 52, 141, 142 -one, 137 Onion, 218 Only, 142, 162 -oon, 137 Ooze, 218 Opera, 168 Opium, 164 Or, 149 * • -or, 136 Orange, 188 Orangeman, 201 Orang-outang, 166 Orchard, 218 Ordeal, 218 Ordure, 218 Ore, 218 Orgies, 218 Orm-, 170 Orrery, 179 -ory, 188 -ose, 189 Ospray, 218 Ostler, 218 Ostrich, 218 -ot, 144 -otch, 144 Other, 52 Otter, 218 Ottoman, 164 Ounce, 185 Our, 142 -our, 139 -ous, 139 Out, 150 Over, 151 -ow, 137, 144 Owe, 67, 147 Owl, 218 Own, 148 O yes, O yes ! 209 mD(DING), 177 r Paddle, 159 Paddock, 218 Paeony, 180 Pagan, 195, 218 Pagoda, 164 Palanquin, 164 Pale, 196 Palette, 218 Palfrey, 218 Palliate, 218 Pahjy, 218 Pampas, 164 Pamper, 218 Pamphlet, 218 Pan, 162 Pander, 180 Panic, 179 Pantaloon, 162, 209 Paradise, 165, 218 Paramour, 218 Parapet, 191 Parcel, 219 Parchment, 177 Pariah, 164 Parish, 196 Parliament, 201 Parlour, 219 Parroquet, 168 Parrot, 219 Parsley, 219 Parsnip, 219 Parson, 187 Partisan, 190 Partridge, 219 Pasquinade, 179 -patam, 174 Paten, 198 Path, 159 Pawn (in chess), 164 Peach, 177 Peacock, 219 Peasant, 219 Pebble, 219 Peck, 162, 186 Peculiar, 219 Pedlar, 219 Peelite, 201 Peer, 186 Pekoe, 164 Pell mell, 219 Pemmican, 166 Pen, 159 Pen-, 168 Penchant, 168 Penfold, 169 Pennant, 219 Pennsylvania, 178 Penny, 185 Pentecost 194 Perhaps, 162, 158 Pemambuco, 173 INDEX. 845 Persian words, 164 Person, 219 Petard, 190 Pew, 193 Phaeton, 180 Pheasant, 177 Philippics, 180 Piazza, 163 Piccaroon, 209 Pick, 169 Piiie, 159 Pilgrir 219 PiUory, 219 Pink, 183 Pint, 186 Pioneer, 188 Pirate, 219 Pistol, 177, 190 Pitch, 169 Pitcher, 219 Placard, 219 Plagiarism, 219 Platina, 163 -pie, 140 Plunder, 219 Pocket, 219 -polls, 174 PoU-tax, 219 Poltroon, 209 Poljrnesian words, 164 Pommel, 219 Poncho, 163 Pont, 174 -pool, 174 Porcupine, 219 -pore, 174 Porpoise, 219 Porridge, 220 Portico, 163 Portuguese words, 164 Portus, 166 Posset, 220 Potatoe, 165 Potwalloper, 209 Pound, 159, 184 -praag, 174 Preach, 195, 220 Priest, 187 Private, 188 Privilege, 23 Pi«testant, 201 Pi owl, 220 Pudding, 220 Pullen, 28 Pslpit, 193 Punch, 164, 220 Punch and Judy, 209 Punctilio, 162 Pundit, 164 Puny, 220 Purchase, 220 Puritan, 202 Puzzle, 220 Pyramid, 220 QUACK, 220 Quagmire, 220 Quaint, 220 Qualm, 220 Quandary, 209 Quarrel, 220 Quart, 186 Quarter, 141 Quarters, 191 -que, 140 Quell, 167 Queen, 186 Queer, 220 Quickly, 162 Quince, 177 Quinsy, 220 Quire, 220 Quite, 162 Quiver, 220 Quoit, 220 Quoth, 67, 220 .T>, 143 n -ra, 143 Rabbi, 164 Rabbit, 220 Racket, 220 Radical, 202 Radish, 220 Raffle, 220 Rajah, 164 Rally, 220 Ramab, 174 Ramble, 220 Rancour, 220 Random, 220 Ransack, 220 Ransom, 220 Rapidan, 173 Rascal, 209 Rasher, 162 Rather, 146, 162, 169 Rattan, 166 Raven, 159 Re- (v. p.), 144 -re, 143 Ready, 159 Reck(les8), 169 Reckon, 159 -red, 188 Red, 183 Reef (verb), 163 Regatta, 163 -rel, 137 Religion, 220 Rent, 220 Repartee, 220 Retreat, 191 Reverie, 221 Reward, 221 Rhubarb, 221 Rib, 184 Ribald, 221 Ribbonnian, 202 -ric 188 Riches, 28 Riding, 141 Riffraff, 209 Righteous, 139 Rigmarole, 209 Rim, 162 Rio, 174 Rival, 221 Roam, 177 Rob, 159 Robber, 149, 209 Rochet, 193 -rock, 137 Rodomontade, 180 Rogation days, 194 Ros-, 169 Ross-, 174 Round, 151, 221 Roundhead, 195 Rover, 159 Rudder, 221 Ruffian, 221 Rug, 162 Rum, 191 Rupee, 164 Russet, 221 Ruth, 152 'S-'f? -s, 137 Sabba(o)th, 164 Sable, 177 Sabre, 190 Sacrament, 196 Saffron, 221 Sago, 164 Saint, 196 Salaam, 164 i m INDEX. Salad, 221 Salamander, 221 Sslar}', 221 Salmon, 221 Saloon, 221 Samphire, 180, 221 Sandal, 164 Sandwich, 180 Sandwich (Isles), 173 Saraband, 164 Sarcasm, 221 Sarcenet, 177 Sardine, 177 Sash, 164 Satin, 166 Saturday, 182 Saturnine, 180 Sauce, 221 Saunterer, 221 Savage, 221 Savannah, 168 Scale, 160 Scalp, 160 -scape, 128 Soar, 160 Scar-, 170 Scaramouch, 209 Scarcely, 152 Scarf, Too, 221 Scarlet, 188, 221 Scatter, 160 Scavenger, 221 Scaw-, 170 Schooner, 168 Scimitar, 164, 190 Scoop, 160 Scorn, 160 Scoundrel, 209 Scourge, 221 Scrawl, 221 Scruple, 185 Scuffle, 160 Scullion, 164, 209 Scupper, 221 -se (v. s.), 140, 145 Seamstress, 21 Season, 121 Secure, 221 Sedan, 177 Self, 48, 142 Stneh, 177 Seneschal, 187 Sentinel, 189 Sentinelle, 189 Sepoy, 164, 189 September, 181 Septuogcsima, 194 Seraglio, 164 Seraph, 104 Sergeant-at-artns, 188 Sergeant-at-law, 188 -set, 167 Seven, 141 Sexagesima, 194 Sexton, 187 -sh (v. sX 144 Shade, 160 Shadow, 160 Shagreen, 221 Shale, 160 Shall, 66, 146 ShaUot, 177 Shape, 159 Share, 160 Sharp, 160 Shawl, 164 She, 142 Shears, 160 Sheath, 155 Sheathe, 160 Sheer, 160 Sheet, 160 Shell, 160 ^ SherueL, jo4 Sherd, 153 Sheriff, 160, 187 Sherry, 168 Shibboleth, 164 Shield, 190 Shillelah, 177 Shilling, 160, 185 -ship, 188 Shiver, 163 Shoot, 160 Shore, 160 Short, 160 Shot, 160 Shotover, 209 Shoulder, 160, 184 Shout, 160 Shove(l), 160 Shred, 153, 160 Shrine, 195 Shroud, 160 Shrub, 164 Shuffle, 160 Shutter, 160 Shuttle, 160 Sidesman, 193 Siege, 191 Sight, 165 Silhouette, 180 Silly, 221 Simoon, 164 Since, 149 Sincere, 221 Smew, 184 Sir, 186 Sirocco, 164 Six, 141 Skuti's, !68 Sketch, 168 Skill, 160 Skin, 184 Skip, 138, 170 Skipper, 209 Skirmish, 221 Skull, 160 Skvlark, 209 Sla'ck, 160 Sloop, 168 Sloth, 168 Slow, 160 Slubber de Gullion, 209 Slug, 160 Sluggard, 160 Sluice, 222 Slut, 31 Smith, 156 Smuggle, 163 -snade, 167 Snail, 160 Sneak, 160 So, 149 Sodor, 170 Sofa, 164, 222 Soir^, 163 Soldier, 189 Solecism, 222 Some, 143 -some, 139 Somersnult, 222 -son, 136 Songstress, 31 Soon, 162 Soothsayer, 160 Soprano, 163 Sorcerer, 222 Sorrow, 182 South, 182 Souther, 170 Sovereign, 184 Soy, 168 . Spaniel, 177 Spanish words, 168 Sparrow, 222 Sparrowgrass, 23 Spear, 190 Spencer, 180 Spick and span, 20t Spider, 16Q, 222 Spin, 160 Spinach, 177 Spindle, 160 Spirit, 184 Spoor, 168 Spouse, 222 Squadron, 190 Squaw, 166 SquillB, 177 Squirrel, 222 -sc,188 St. Domingo, 178 St. HeUer, 178 St. Malo, 178 Stage, 160 Stair, 160 Stallion, 222 Stannary, 222 Stanza, 168 Starboard, 160 Star Chamber, 204 Stork, 162, 2?2 Storve, 222 -stead, 168 Steak, 160 Stealth, 166 Steep, 160 Steeple, 160, 193 -stein, 176 Stentorian, 180 Step, 160 -ster, 130, 170, 144 Steriing, 184 Stern, 164, 160 Steward, 122, 160, 189 Stick, 160 Stiletto, 163, 190 Still, 149 Stimulate, 222 Stipend, 222 Stipulate, 222 Stir, 160 Stirrup, 160 Stitch, 160 Stiver, 185 -stoc, 168 Stock, 160 Stockade, 160 Stocks, 160 -stoke, 168 Stomach, 1$4 • Stores, 160, 191 Storey, 160 -stow, 168 Strad, 160 Strata, 160 Strath, 160 INDEX. 847 Streat, 160 Ttanpor, 228 Street, 160, 168 Ten, 141, 166 Strength, 166 Tennis, 223 -stress, 136 Tenor, 168 Stret-, 160 Tent, 191 Stucco, 168 Tcnnagttnt, 1 69 Studio, 168 Terracotta, 163 Sturdy, 222 Tester, 186 Sturgeon, 222 Testy, 228 Stye, 160 Tether, 228 Subtle, 222 -th,lM Such, 60, 148 Thaler, 185 Sugar, 164 SuScy, 222 Thank(8), 29 That, 142, 149 Snlt^n, 164 The, 86, 142 Summer, 181 Their, 142 Sunday, 182 Then, 85, 148 -sure, 138 Thence, 143 Surgeon, 222 There, 143 Surplice, 193 These, 140 Suttee, 164 Thigh, 186 Sutter-, 170 Thimble, 228 Swain, 222 Thine, 142 Swine, 222 Thing, 170 Sword, 190 Thither, 143 Sycophant, 222 -thorpe, 168, 170 Synod, 196 Those, 140 Syrup, 164 Thou, 142 Though, 149 Thousand, 141 .rp (v. s. ), 144 i Tabbard, 222 Three, 141 Threshold, 228 Tabby, 177 Thrice, 142 Taboo, 164 Throat, 185 Tabor, 164 Through, 150 Tadpole, 222 Thnmb, 186 Tafety, 177 Thunder, 210 Tafftta, 164 Thursday, 182 Taflrail, 163 Thus, 143, 162 Talisman, 164 Ticket, 223 Tallow, 222 Tierce, 186 Talmud, 164 Tiffin, 164 Tamarind, 164 Tight, 163 Till, 160, 181 Tambourine, 164 Tantalise, 180 Tiller, 166 Tantivy, 222 Tilt, 164 Target, 190 Tilth, 156 Tarifa, 174 Timber, 223 Tariflf, 164, 177, 208 Tinsel, 223 Tarn, 174 Tintimatre, 210 Task, 162, 223 Tissue, 228 Tatterdemallion, 209 Tithe, 141 Tattoo, 164, 223 To, 151 Tawdry, 180 Tobacco, 164, 177 Teach, 97, 223 Toddy, 164 Teem, 223 Toe, 184 -teen, 141 -toft, 170 848 INDK. ToU, 160 Toilette, 228 ToU, 160 Tomahawk, 164 Tomato, 164 To-morrow, 162 Tongue, 186 Tontine, 180 Too, 162 Tooth, 166, 184 Topaz, 177 Tornado, 168, 228 Torpedo, 228 Torso, 168 Tortoise, 228 Tory, 202 Towards. 161 Towel, 228 Town, 160 Train, 228 Tram-(w»,y), 180 Trance, 2ilS -tro, 169, 174 Treacle, 228 Trench, 191 Tribulation, 228 Trifle, 228 Trigger, 228 Trim, 228 Trimmer, 208 Trinliet, 228 Trivial, 228 Troop, 190 Trousseau, 163 Troy, 186 Truant, 228 Trudge, 162 Trumpery, 228 Trumpet, 190 Tuck-(er), 177 -tude, 188 Tuesday, 181 Tulip, 164 Tumbril, 190 Tunicle, 193 Tumwl, 160 Turban, 164 Turbot, 223 -ture, 189 Turkish words, 164 Turnip, 228 Twain, 36, 142 Tweak, 223 Twelve, 141 Twice, 142 Twine, 223 Twirl, 224 Twist, 161 Two, 141 -ty, 188, 141 TTCK (V. 8.), 144 yj -ng (v. 8.), 144 Ugly, 224 ule, 187 Umber, 177, 183 Umbrella, 163 Umpire, 224 Under, 151 Unless, 149 Until, 161 Up, 161 Upon, 161 Urchin, 210 Usher, 224 -usk (v. 8.), 144 -utch (v. s.), 144 Utmost, 141 VALET, 224 V Valetta, 174 Vallum, 166 Van Dieman, 174 Vaudeville, 178 Varnish, 177 -vat, 170 Veer, 163 Venal, 224 Venison, 224 Venom, 224 Verandah, 163 Verbal prefixes : a, and, an, be, for, fore, en, ent, mis, re, with, 148, 144 Verbal suffixes : ate, en, le, em, m, en, er, esce, nd, ng, nk, nt, ot, t, d, ow, ag, augh, ug, uck, ck, k, ulch, otch, atch, ush, sh, ass, ster, isb, fy, ite, ize, y, on, 144, 146 Verdict, 22 Verdigris, 224 Verger, 192 Vermilion, 183 Very, 153 Vestry, 193 -vie, 174 Vignette, 234 Villain, 161,224 Vinegar, 224 Vipor, 224 Virtuoso, 168 Vista, 163 Vixen, 31, 224 Vizir, 164 Volcano, 168 Volley, 224 Voyage, 224 WAGES, 29 Waggle, 161 Wagon, 161 Wain, 161, 162 Wainscot, 224 Wald, 174 Wall, 162 Wallet, 224 Walnut, 210 Wan, 160 Wane, 160 Want, 160 -ward, 139 Warden, 160 Warder, 160 Wardrobe, 160 Warmth, 166 Warn, 161 Warrant, 161 Wary, 160 Was, 146 Wassail, 224 Wave, 161 Way, 161 -weald, 168 Wealth, 165 Wear (ship), 16f Weather, 224 Weave, 161 Wed, 16^ Wedge, 224 Wednesday, 181 Week, 181 Weigh (anchor), 145 Weight, 224 Welkin, 29 Wert, 146 West, 182 Westerham, 16> Wether, 224 What, 142 When, 193 Whence, 148 Where, 143 Wherry, 224 Whey, 224 Which, 60, 142 Whiff, 202 Whilom, 72 Whisky, 191 White, 182 Whither, 143 Whitsunday, 194 Who, 142 Whole, 169 Why, 86, 148 -wich, 170, 188 Wicket, 162, 224 Widower, 81 Wife, 161, 224 Wig, 170 Wight (lale of), 174 Wigwam, 166 Wild, 168 WiU. 66, 146, 224 Wimple, 224 Wince, 224 Window, 224 Winter, 181 Wisdom, 161 Wise, 161 Wist, 147 Wiatftil, 161 INDKX. Wit, 161 With (v. p.), 144 With. 151 -with, 170 Without, 161 Wizard, 161 Wold, 224 -wold, 168 Woiii/in, 31, 161,224 Woodrocvo, 187 Woof, 161 Work, 224 Worn, 140 Worsted, 177 Worth, 67, 147, 168 Wot, 67 Wrack, 161 Wrangle, 161 Wrath, 161, 182, 224 Wreak, 161 Wreath, 224 Wreathe, 161 Wreck, 161 Wrench, 161 Wretch, 161 Wretched. 161 Writhe, 161 Wrist, 184 Wrong, 168 849 Wroth. 161 Wiy, 161 _y, 188, 144, 146 " 1 y-, part, pref.. Yacht, 168, 226 Yard, 168, 186 Y-clept, 147 Y- ANALYSIS — OF — THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE, By I. PLANT FLBMINO, M.A.. B.CX. With a SnionoN of Examination Papkiw tbom odr Canadian Univmwitibs, Bt W. Houston, M. A., Examinbr in Enoi.mh, Toronto Unitbrsitt. FOR USE IN PUBLIC HIGH SCHOOLS AND COLLEGIATE INSTITUTES. PRICE, $1.00. OlOROK DiCKBOK, B.A., Head MmiUr, ColUgiate Instttute, HamilUm. " Fleming's English Analysis has been used in the Hamilton Collegiate Insti- tute since 187S. " I know of no better text book in English Onuumar for the Intermediate Forms in our High Schools and Collegiate Institutes." J. Sbath, B.A., Head Master^ Colltgiate Institutt^ St. Catharints. " Fleming's Analysis has been in use here for about two years ; it is the best manual I know of for advanced pupils— particularly in etymology.** OlOROK WalIiACB, B.A., HeadMoiter, H. S.^ Weston. " We have used Fleming for nearly one year. It Is the best book I have ever taught on the subject during an experience of two years in Canada and eight in Bnglish Grammar Schools." T. MolNTTRC, M.A,, Head Master, H. S., IngersolL " Fleming's Analysis has not been introduced into the High School, Ingersoll, as a Text Book, but much of its contents has been brought before the notice of the students in the form of lectures. ** I have carefully examined the work, and I have no hesitation in pronounc- ing it superior to anything yet presented on the subject of English. It is especially adapted to High School work. I shall be gratifled to l«am that it is placed OQ the list (^ authorized Text Books." FLEMING 8 ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. W. W. Tambltn, VL.K.y Head Master^ Hi^h School, Oskawa. " I think that Fleminf^'s Analysis is a very excellent work." A. P. Kniobt, M.A., Rector K. C. /., Kingston. '* Accept thanks. It is in my opinion the best School Text Book on the sub- ject that has ever been placed before the public, and supplies a want felt by every teacher in the Dojiinion." S. J. WWLi:wOf)V,B.A., Head Master U.S., Streetsviiie. " I consider that it contains much valuable information, and that it is en- titled to a place on the list of Authorized School Books." G. StradchoN, Head Master, H. S., IVoodstock. " I use * Fleming's Analysis ' to a considerable extent in the higher classes of the school." A. HlliLaR, Head Master, H. S., IValkerton. ""' I am now using ' Fleming's Analysis ' in my senior class in English Gram- mar, and must say that I consider it a most excellent text book, and hope to see it put on the authorized list for High Schools." Ahdrbw McCulloch, M.A., Head Master, H.S., Drummondville. ** I have used Fleming's Analysis for several years, and from its brevity, clear- ness and comprehension, consider it especially adapted for the use of senior classes in our high schools." L. G. Morgan, B.A., Head Master, H. S., Vientui. *' I am much pleased with it, and hope it will be authorized for use in the 7.^h Schools, as it contains much valuable infonnation not found in any of our text books. It is a work long needed. The examination questions at the end will prove very valuable to both teacher an*!, pupil." • A. PuRSliOW, LL.B., Head Master, H. S., Pert Hope. " I have used it extensively in my teaching for two years or more. It has so many excellencies that I would like to see it permissively authorized, but not pre- scribied to the exclusion of others." W. C. MiDDLBTON, B.A., Head Master, U. S., Amprior. " I consider ' Fleming's Analysis ' admirably adapted for the upper forms in our High Schools." R. W. Young, B.A., UeadMasUr, H. S., Dunville. ^* I think that this work could be used in the Schools with much advantage." RoBBRT Mathbson, B.A., Head Master, H. S. Napanee. ^ I am very happy to add my testimony to the value of ' Fleming's Analysis of the English language ' as a text book for High Schools." FLEMING S ANALYSIS OK TltE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. i8ub- Bvery isen- Albirt Andrews, Head Master^ H. S., Niagara. "I r^anl it as a valuable holp in the study of En)(lish daisies. I would b« glad to see it authorized." E, M. BiQO, M.A., Head Master, H. S., Aylmev. " I have made a thorough examination of the work and think it just the thint; for advanced clasaes in Enf^lish." WaIiTBR Ruthbrford, B.A., Head Master, H. S., Parkkill. " I have found it a very useful work in teaching. It is brief, yet comprehtnsiv and practical, containing the etymology of words of every day use,^' asses John Millar, B.A., Head Master, H. S., St. Thotnas. " I make use of it in teaching. The work is one very well arranged and emi* nently suited for many of our High School classes." ram- nsee lear- usses Rrv. F. L. Chbcklby, B.A., Head Master, H, S., Loughborough. •' It is an oixcellent Jjook." Wh. yflhUAHS, B.A., Head Master, H. S., CoUingwood. " Fleming's Analysis has been used in our High SchoMs but hitherto as a book of reference. We will probably use it more largely next term. I consider it a very valuable and useful book for High School purposes, and believe that the addition of the exauiination papeis will greatly add to Its usefulness." the our end pre- B m Sc. ysis Q.K.K .:>iaotl,^.A., Head Master, H.S., IV/titiy. " I have to say in reply that Fleming's Analysis is not in use in this Schoo' as a Text Book. It is used for occasional reference. I have already expressed mj- opinionof it." D. H. HUNTBR. B.A., Head Master, H. S., Waterdown. " I may state that I liku the work very much, and hope that it will find a place in the authorized list of text books for High Schools," F. ULiTCilKhh, B.A.., Head Master, High School, Perth. " Fleming's Analysis has been in use in our school. In regard to its merits as a text book, it cannot be too highly eulogized, and we feel confident in saying that its introductcon into our High Schools would be attended with highly bene- fictal results." Jambs Lumsdbn, M. A., Head Master H. S., Port Dover. " We have been using Fleming's Analysis in our school for some time. 1 think that the book is the best of any we have got for imparting a real knowledge of the language to advanced pupils." . E. T. Crowlb. M.A., Head Mastor, H. S., Markham. " We use Fleming's Analysis, and consider it an e.xccllent work," ItLEMINg's analysis op the ENGLISH iiANOUAOt. i I H. M. HiOKB, M A.. Head Master, H. S., Trenton " I have uaed the work and think it a» ^wA as any I have seen on the subject." P. C. McOrioor, B.A., Head Master^ H.S., Almonte. *' I have already introduced Fleming's Analysis into our High School here. In the senior class, I find it an excellent work : far exceeding any grammar we have yet had." If A, Sinclair, M.A., Head Master, H. S., IVindsor. " Fleming's Analysis is used by the teachers of the Windsor High School in giving notes on Grammar, &c. We have not used it as a text book yet, since it ia not authorized. The work is certainly very good." Jamks TurnbuIiL, B.A., Head Master, H. S., Clinton, "I consider it an excellent book of reference, and as such it is in the hands of some of the pupils of the senior class." D. McBridk, B.A., Head Master, H. S., Port Perry. ''I have used 'Fleming's Analysis' in the seni&r grammar class in this school, and I consider it an excellent work." J. R. WiGHTMAN, M.A., Head Master, H. «., Newcastle. " I value the work vury highly. The list of examination questions appended to it I find especially useful.'* P. A. SwiTZRR, B.A., Head Master, H. S., Oakville. '* Our English Master uses Fleming's Analysis as a book of reference. He would like to see it allowed as a text book." Rev. F. F. Macnab, B. A., Head Master, H. S., Carlton Place. " I regard it as the very best I have seen on that most important department of Grammar ; and would have no hesitation in introducing it if on the authorised list of text books.'* Jambs Mills, M.A., Head Master Brant/ord Collegiate Institute. " I have no hesitancy in saying that I consider it one of the best books we can «ret for High School work." S, Woods, M.A., Rector, Kingston Collegiate Institute. " It fills a place too long unoccupied, by graving in small space, more g^enuine information on our mother tongue than any other primary text book with which I am acquainted.' /.- J. Campbbll, M.A., Head Master, H. S., Napanee. **S9t High School purposes, such a work is just what is needed." ect." lere. r we ilin itia acU his ed le FLEMINO*S ANALYSIS OF THE ENGLISH LANOUAOS. Obo. H. ROBIH8ON, M.A., Head Master. H. S. Whitby. ' ** It is concise, methodictil, and generaily very accurate in definition." OlO. S. Wrwht, Ph. D., Prof. 0/ Moderfi Literature. " ' Fleming's Analysis ' has been four years in use in Albert College Grammar School, and is considered the most comprehensive and scientific school-book on the subject that we have ever used. I am pleased to see a Canadian Edition of the woric, as we had some difficulty in getting a supply of the English edition of 1873-4 I consider the opinion of students who have used it, an indication of its merits and their verdict is unanimously in its favour." Obo. R. R. Cockburn, M.A., Frinctpal U. C. College. '* During the last two or three years I have used ' Fleming's Analysis ' in the Upper Forms of U. C. College, with the most satisfactory results. It is :.he best worIc of the kind for teaching purposes with which I am acquainted." Rbv. Dr. Fykb, Principal 0/ Canadian Literary Institute. '*I deem it a very valuable introduction to more extended works on this Bubject.*' Jiias C.%VWA\kV, l,.h.li., Hmd Master H. S.^Dundas. "• Having carefully examined ' Analysis of the English Lauguage ' by Fleming, 1 have no hesitation in strongly recommending it to teachers as a work well adapted for High Schools, and Divisions 4, 6 and 6 of the Public Schools. It is concise and methodiobl in its arrangement, and explains the leading principles of the language in a short, clear and comprehensive manner. Although the author intendal the book to be only ** a brief, simple and systematic introduction to the works of Angus, Lv^ham and Marsh," yet it will be found to contain all that is necessary to an ordinary English education." D. C. McHbnrt, B.A., Principal Cobouxg Collegiate Institute, *• After a careful examination of your " Analysis of the English Language " by Fleming, I have great pleasure in testifying to the excellence of the work. It exactly meets tne requirements of our High School course in English Classics. I shall be £:lad to introduce it as soon as it is placed on the list of authorized text-books ; and I trust it may meet with the general favor iirhich it merits." tn le I OORTBZ Fbssbndbn, B. A., Head Master^ H. S. Brampton. " I have carefully examined the " Analysis of the English Language " by I. Plant Fleming, M. A., &c., and am well pleased with both the plan and execution of the work. I shall be greatly disappointed if it is not soon found in all our High Schools." W. Ttler, B. a.. Head Master, H. S. Guelph. " I am satisfied that it will prove a valuable aid to the teacher in imparting to his pupils a knowledge of the structure and derivation uf the Englisi lani'uage." FLBMING's ANALYSIK of I'HE EKOLtSH LANOlTAOF. Wm . Cochrane, D.D., President of Faculty Young Ladies' Colk^e, Brantford. "We have used ' Fleming's Analysis' in the Brantford Ladies' College for ti past two years witli j^rcnt ttatisfaction. We regard it as admirably adaptM for thw senior classes of our higher schools and colleges. Your Arm have conferred a favour upon the friends of education in our land, by the issue of a Canadian edition of this useful text book." Wm. Tassw, LL.D„ Gnlt Collegiate Institute. " I am convinced that from the extent of ground gone over, and the amount of nformation contained in it, and that from sources from which many aru precluded, that it will be a valuable acquisition to students generally, and especially to Public School Tftfu^hers." Jambs Huohbs, P. S. Inspector, Toronto. '*! regard it as a very able and exhaustive work. The explanations of the principles of English Orammar are clear and simple, and ought to do a great deal towards renvoving the mysteries and difiicultiea which some treatises have thrown around this imiraitant subject. The numerous exercises which it contains, render it of great value to teachers." \ '• GioBB, Mtly 2. " For High School purposes and for use in the higher classes of our Public Schools, Mr. Fleming's Book is unquestionably the very best at present available. No other volume yet published contains in so small a space so much valuable mat- ter, well arranged and uitelligibly ex])ressed as this one does. It is not surprising, therefore, that it has made its way rapidly into favor in the schools of Canada, or that a publishing Arm here should have taken steps to secure the privilege of issu- ing a Canadian ^ition. The present reprint is from the latest English edition, and for the information of those not already acquainted with the work it is only necessary to state that it contains a number of additional sets of examination papers, and, what is of still greater importance, a very complete index, by reference to which the place where any particular word is treated can readily be found. As the etymolo- gical portion of the work is one of its most important features, the additional con- venience thus provided can hardly be over-rated." i I ^ Mail, May 1st. " This is a class book of exceptional merit, well approved of by our educational authorities, having been now for some years in use in the Orammar and High Schools. For this— the third edition, several important improvements are claimed. There have been added the Examination papers of the Oxford and Cambridge Local Examinations for the last four years ; which, to:;ether with a valuable Etymological Index, increases very much the utility of the work." i i r .„e J L NEW PUBLICATIONS. Analysis of the English Language by I. I'LAMT FLIMINa, M.A., B/J.L. Si 00 " Fleming^H Rngliih AnnlyglR hM been osed in the Tlniiiiltou ColleKiiite Institute Rlncc 1873. I know of no better I Vzt Book on iMigliHh OraniniAi for tbe IntorrotMliiiti^ Forms In our ni^h Schools Autl •'ollegl- ate IiMtitiituM."— ticoRGi Diouo, hM,. Uead SIIn«ling our i'nhlic or Hi^h Schuolt* and Colle(;iatu In8titiitf«. It ^fv«'H lK>th tlio meaning and dosrivatioti of wfiniH, and indicntoM their pronunci' ati on— omitting none of thoHti in common nan. At the oloHe of the volume there lg a vocahuiarjr of roots, which will be fA Mercury." " * * I Hnd the arraiig«>meDt simple and plain, well suited for the utte of Schools * * I will take ple»>trm*to,